The estates, empires, & principallities of the world Represented by ye description of countries, maners of inhabitants, riches of prouinces, forces, gouernment, religion; and the princes that haue gouerned in euery estate. With the begin[n]ing of all militarie and religious orders. Translated out of French by Edw: Grimstone, sargeant at armes.

Of the Estate of the king of Spaine

THE ISLAND OF SARDINIA. [ A] [ B]

The Contents.

1 DEscription of this Island, her length, breadth, and vnder what Climat. Little in∣habited [ C] for the pestilent ayre. Among other singularities there are Muscrions whose skins serue to make Targets: and the hearbe Sardonica, which makes men dye laughing. II. Manners of the ancient and moderne inhabitants of Sardinia; their riches and meane forces. The gouernment, religion, and number of Archbishops, like vn∣to that of Sicile. And how after possession of diuers Nations it was vnited to the Crowne of Spaine.

[ I] SArdinia is a great Island, and almost like vnto Sicile; it extends from North to South in length, and is onelie eight miles distant from the Island of Corsica. Vpon the East, it hath the Tuscane sea, and [ D] of that side lyes Sicile, distant from it some two hundred miles. Vp∣on the South, it is bounded in by the sea of Africk, from the which, it is about one hundred and sixtie miles: and on the West, it hath the Sea of Sardinia. The Moderns giue it two hundred and fortie miles in length, and ninetie in bredth, and in circuit fiue hundred. It is vnder the fourth Climat, and comprehends the eleuenth and twelfth Paralell, where the longest day in the yeare is of foureteene houres and almost three quarters.

¶ Qualitie of the Countrie.

THis Island is duided into two Regions or parts, that is to say, into the Cape of Ca∣laris, [ E] which lyes towards Corsica, where it is somewhat rough and hillie: and into the Cape of Lngudor, which lookes towards Africke. This Island beares fruit of all sorts, and it abounds in Corne, yea it would equall Sicile, if it were well manured: It hath also siluer; but the ayre is so bad, as it is well inhabited, for that the plague doth breed ordi∣narily there; the which happens in summer, and in the most fertile places, that is to say, at cape Lugudor, where there are many Moores & Marishes: for as for the cape of Calaris, which is hillie, as we haue said, and subiect to the Northerly wind, the ayre is better. They haue store of cattle, and they send forth corne, hides, cheese, and they make excellent white wines: They haue no oyle of oliues, by the negligence of the inhabitants, who [ F] dresse their meat with sewet, and make oyle of Linseed, or of Lintills. Amongst other beasts, they haue the Muscrions, which are not found in any other part of Europe: their skins and haire is like vnto the stagge, or as Strabo saith, a goat, and their hornes like to a sheepe, but bending backward: they liue in the mountaines, and run verie swiftly, their

[ A] skins being drest, are those which are called Cordouants. There are great store of wild Boares, Stages, and wild Goats for hunting; they haue no hurtfull beasts, except the Fox, and another litle creature like vnto the Spider. It breeds good store of horses, which be not great, but yet they arestrong and couragious. In this Island, there growes an hearbe called Rianuncula, in old time Sardonica, which doth shrinke vp the sinewes of them that eat it, and makes them die in such sort, as they seeme to laughe euen at the last gaspe. They keepe their raine water in Winter, for their vse in Sommer, for then they want it. There are pooles and lakes full of fish, and in like manner fountaines of hote water, which are very good and wholesome. There are also Mines of Sulphure, Alume, [ B] and Salte.

¶ The Manners of the Ancient.

THe Carthaginians (who made themselues maisters of Sardinia) would not suffer them that were borne in the countrie to till and manure the ground: The Sarrazins haue held it, and then the Pisans, and lastly it fell into the hands of the kings of Arra∣gon, so as now the king of Spaine carries it among his other titles; and they haue li∣ued sometimes after one sorte, sometimes after another, according to the Conquerors [ C] nature and disposition.

The Manners of them at this day.

THe Inhabitants of Sardinia are strong of bodie, and of a browne and swart complex∣ion, by reason of the heat of the sunne. They are not very ciuile, and are much gi∣uen to labour and to hunting: they eat grosse meats willingly; but they intreat stran∣gers courteously and liue quietly among them, yet some say that they are full of cruel∣tie. They are much giuen to theeuing and piracie at Sea.

[ D] ¶ The Riches.

THey make good store of monie of their wine which they carrie to Rome, and of their horses, which they fell at a good rate to strangers, they are so couragious and of great toile. They make also some monie of their Muscrions skins, which they carrie into Italie.

¶ The Forces.

THe king of Spaine doth alwaies entertain some garrisons in this Island, but the small number of the Inhabitants will alwaies make it to bee of lesse force. Calaris is the [ E] chiefe of the whole Island, it is a good towne and well fortified, seated vpon a hill, and hath vnder it a goodly and spatious Port. There is also Oristagne, the which is not well peopled, by reason of the bad qualitie of the aire which growes by the neerenesse of the fennes: it hath a port, and a riuer neere vnto it, which is the greatest of the whole Island. Then haue you Sassari, a towne of importance, where there is an Aqueduct to be seene that is twelue miles long. We may not omit Alghes-Bosa, a good towne, a wholesome aire, and a fertile countrie, with a spacious hauen where the ships of Genoa and of Ca∣talognia doe commonly lie. Besides this Port which is six miles long, the Island hath two others able to receiue any armie, the one is that of Cape Gallea, and the other Carbo∣nara, both desart. There are other townes in the Island, as Chia, Orexia, and other strong [ F] places.

¶ The Gouernement.

THe king of Spaine hath a Vice-roy in this Island, who remains at Calaris, and dispo∣seth of all things. The Iustice is in a manner like vnto that which is practised in Sicile.

〈2 pages missing〉〈2 pages missing〉

¶ The Religion, and that which concernes the Church. [ A]

THe Sardinians are Romish Catholiques, and there are Inquisitors in this Island, as in that of Sicile. There are three Archbishops, that is to say, he of Calaris, who hath vnder him the Bishops of Sulo, Dolia, and Puella: He of Saffaris, who hath vnder him the Bishops of Sora, Plonata, Ampuria, Gisace, or Gerarda, Castre, Othae, and Bosane: Hee of Albore hath vnder him the Bishops of Vssella, Saint Iuste, and Terra Alba: They of Siuita and Galtella are priueledged.

¶ The Princes. [ B]

THe Carthagenians possest this Island, but they were expelled by the Romans: The Sarazens inuaded it afterwards, vpon the declining of the Romane Empire; after which, it was taken by the Geneuois and the Pisans, and the Pope hauing wrested it out of their hands, gaue it in fee to the king of Arragon, and by this meanes it came into the power of the king of Spaine. [ C] [ D] [ E] [ F]

[ A]

[ B] THE ESTATE OF MILAN.

The Contents.

1 CIrcuit of the Duchie of Milan: The chiefe townes: among others Milan peopled with two hundred thousand inhabitants: in former times possest by the Gaules, [ C] Romans, Gothes, Huns, Lombards, and others, and how in the end it came into the hands of the kings of Spaine. II. Rice growing in aboundance neere vnto Milan. Fertilitie of the soyle of Pauia, and therefore called the Garden of Milan. III. Milanois fit for armes, learning, and merchandize. IIII. What number of duckats the king of Spaine drawes yearely out of the Duchie of Milan, besides the free gifts. V. What souldiers both horse and foot he hath continually in pay there. VI. Milanois ruled by a gouernor, and by the Senat of Milan, consisting of twelue Doctors, some Prelats, and certaine gentlemen Milanois. VII. Ge∣nealogie of the Dul••es of Milan.

THe Duchie of Milan hath in circuit about three hundred [ D] miles. The chiefe towne is Milan, from whence the who••e Duchie hath taken the name. This citie is verie well peo∣pled, mighty, and strong seated in a pleasant and good scitu∣ation, and it is at this day held, one of the chiefe cities of Europe. They number in it two hundred thousand inhabi∣tants. The suburbes are verie long and large; and make it much greater, and these suburbes are enuironed with water as well as the citie, by two great channels, the one drawne from the riuer of T••sin, and the other from Adda, the which doe water their meadowes and fields, and make them verie [ E] fruitfull. By these channels, boats bring all things to Milan in so great aboundance, as they are at a reasonable rate. The buildings are faire and stately, and there are in it a num∣ber of great and rich families. There haue come out of this citie foure Popes, Alexander the second, Vrban the third, Celestin the fifth, and in our time Gregorie. They admire three things in this citie for their magnificence and statelinesse, the Castle, the Domo or Ca∣thedrall Church, and the Hospitall. Cremona stands in this Duchie, where there are goodly buildings, as well publike as priuat: and the towne of Lodi, which is rich. But these townes yeeld in greatnesse to Pauia, a good and an ancient towne, sometimes the abode of the Lombard kings, in which there is an Vniuersitie.

There is also Nouara seated vpon a little hill, wherein there are noble families: and [ F] Como a rich towne, which giues her name vnto a great Lake, which in old time was called Larius Lacus. In winter it hath two armes, whereof the one runs from the South vnto the West, towards Como; and the other to the East, towards Leuca, whereas the riuer of Adda hath her passage. Strabo writes, that it hath eight and thirtie miles in length, and foure in bredth. The riuer of Adda passeth through the middest of this Lake, and yet their waters doe not mingle, but the riuer doth float ouer the other. There

are many castles and villages about this lake, which doe beautifie the place and make it [ A] exceeding pleasant. There is also an Island called Comacina, in the which there was in former times a fort, whereas the kings of the Lombards did keepe their treasure and iew∣els, as in a safe custodie. The towne of Como is famous, rich, and abounding in all things necessarie for the life of man: The inhabitants are carefull and industrious to be rich.

The citie of Milan was for a long time vnder the dominion of the Gaules, vntill that M. Marcellus the Consull, hauing defeated Virdumarus king of the Insubrians, made it subiect to the Romans. The power of the Emperours growing weake, this citie was spoyled by many barbarous Nations, that is to say, by the Gothes, Huns, and Lom∣bards. [ B] These last being expelled Italie by Charles the Great, this citie obeyed the kings of France, and afterwards the Emperours of Germanie. In the end it ••ebelled in the times of Frederick the first, and Frederick the second, Emperours, and had new lords, that is to say, the Galeaces, Viscontes, who had the title of Dukes giuen them afterward by the Emperour Wenceslaus, in the yeare 1395. These comming to faile, the Sforces suc∣ceeded in their place, who ended in the person of Francis. The French kings haue long held this citie, but in the end it fell into the hands of the King of Spaine, with the whole Duchie, whereunto notwithstanding, the French kings doe rightly pretend, as doth ap∣peare by the Genealogie of the Dukes of Milan.

¶ The Qualitie of the Countrie. [ C]

[ II] THere are many Lakes in this Countrie, and a great number of Riuers; the fields yeeld aboundance of Corne. There growes also verie good wine, and all sorts of fruits, and the Riuers and Lakes feed great store of fish. Neere vnto Milan, there growes such plentie of Rice, as it is not possible there should be more in the like quan∣titie of ground. Neere vnto Cremona, there is store of Corne and Wine, and all sorts of fruit, of millet, and flax in great aboundance. Neere vnto Lodi, there is so much Rye, Millet, Wine, Flax, and fruits, as it is not possible to be more; and besides, there are many meadowes, whereas they feede great numbers of cattell. The Countrie [ D] about Pauie is so fertill, and so full of all fruits, and pasture, as they call it the Garden of Milan: there is also great store of Wildsoule, and aboundance of fish. There can be nothing seene more pleasing, nor of greater profit, than the Countrie which is neere vnto Como.

¶ The Manners of the inhabitants.

THis Countrie breedes men fit for learning, armes, and merchandise, yet in some [ III] places they are grosse and rude. They of Cremona haue the reputation to be fayth∣full. The people of Milan are wonderfully industrious. They of Lodi are fit for mer∣chandise and armes, and to gather wealth. And they which liue neere vnto Como, loue [ E] labour, and are full of industrie. They tearme the women of Pauia to be couetous, and desirous of gaine; them of Milan, ciuile and courteous; them of Lodi, superstitious; and the women of Cremona sumptuous.

¶ The Riches.

[ IIII] MIlan is so full of all sorts of Artizans and Handicraftsmen, as they say commonly, That who so will accommodat Italie, must ruine Milan. And these workmen are so industrious, and make euerie thing so well, as whatsoeuer goes from this citie is held in great esteeme. For we know well what price is giuen for harquebuzes of Mi∣lan, [ F] and for all sorts of Armes that come from thence, for hilts of swords which are much regarded, for girdles and hangers, for lace, and for imbroderies. So as we must con∣fesse, that this citie doth draw a great masse of money from all the rest of Europe: ad∣ding herevnto their silke stockings, which are much esteemed, and their Rice, which they

[ A] impart vnto many other Prouinces: after this, Lode makes such store of Cheese, as it is sent vnto many other parts of Italie; and to be short, Milan doth furnish the Grisons and Suisses with much of her fruit, and is supplied of all that is necessarie with excesse.

The king of Spaine receiues from this Estate yearely eight hundred thousand duc∣kats of ordinarie, besides the free gifts and other extraordinarie matters: And to shew, that this king can tell how to draw as much as is possible from this Estate, or that his offi∣cers make it for him, the prouerbe of Italie saith, That the officer of Sicile doth gnaw, He of Naples doth eate, but He of Milan doth deuour.

[ B] ¶ The Forces.

THe king of Spaine doth entertaine continually in this Estate three thousand foote (Spaniards) one thousand light horse, and six hundred men at armes, for the guard [ V] thereof. The great numbers of people would much fortifie this Estate, if they did loue the Spaniard: but some hold, that their actions are so vnpleasing vnto these people, as there is not any one whom they hate more: so as if they were not kept in awe, they might well attempt some innouation against them that rule ouer them. There are good Forts in this Estate, whereof the castle of Milan is the first. The gouernor drawes great summes of mony from the king of Spaine yearely, to augment the fortification of this [ C] place, which is able to make great resistance. Cremona hath as strong a towre as may be seene, which they doe number among the maruels of Europe. Pauia and Nouara, in like manner, are good places. There are also many other strong places in this Estate, but the Spaniards relie chiefely vpon the Castle of Milan, holding themselues inuincible by reason of this Fort.

The king of Spaine hath no cause to feare any, in regard of Milan, but the Venetians, who haue remained a long time quiet, and as it seemes demaund nothing but rest; or the duke of Sauoy, who may much annoy him, either by entring sodenly into this Estate, be∣ing assisted by some greater prince, or else in giuing passage to those that would vnder∣take to inuade it: but the Alliance which is betwixt them two may free him from all [ D] feare. Or else hee may feare the Suisses, who haue many times safely vsurped many good members of this Estate: but the Fort of Fuentes, and the good order which the Go∣uernour of this Estate doth set, will alwaies diuert them, as well as the Grisons, from any attempt.

¶ The Gouernment.

THe king of Spaine hath a Gouernor in this Duchie, who is also Captaine Generall of the foote and horse which are entertained there, and carries the title. The know∣ledge [ VI] of causes, both ciuile and criminall, depends of the Senat of Milan, where there [ E] are twelue Doctors, and certaine Prelats, and gentlemen Milanois.

Genealogie of the Dukes of Milan.

• Mathew Visconte in the yere 1312.
  • Galeace
    • Actio.
    • Marc.
  • Iohn Bishop of Milan.
  • Luchin.
  • Stephen.
    • Mathew
    • Galeace.
    • Barnabie.
      • Iohn Galeace, sonne to Galeace:
        • Iohn Maria.
        • Philip Maria.
          • Blanch maried to Francisco Sforce.
            • Galeace.
            • Lewis, Duke.
            • Ascanio.
            • Philip.
            • Octauio.
        • Valentine.
      • Yoland.

Genealogie of Sforce.

• Francisco Sforce.
  • Lewis, Duke.
    • Maximilian. dead without heires.
    • Francisco. dead without heires.
  • Ascanio.
  • Philip.
  • Octauian.
  • Galeace.
    • Iohn.
    • Blanche Maria.
      • Bonna married to Sigismond king of Poland.
      • Francisco Sforce the last duke led captiue into France.

By what right the king of France pretends the Duchie of Milan.

• Iohn Galeace sonne to Gale∣ace was first Duke, created by Wences∣laus, he had
  • Iohn Maria the se∣cōd duke, who died without heires.
  • Philip Maria the third duke, who had no lawfull is∣sue.
    • Blanch his base daughter married to Francisco Sforce, who vsurped by force the Duchie of Milan.
  • Valentine who was married to Lewis duke of Orleans, vpon conditiō that if her two brethren died without sons, the lawfull succes∣sors of Valentine should be heires of the Duchie of Mi∣lan: and they say the Pope signed this treaty, for the which many thousands of Christians haue lost their liues.
    • Philip Earle of Vertus, who died without heires.
      • Galeace gouernor of Milan.
        • Iohn Galeace whosucceeded.
        • Blanch Maria.
          • Bonna married to the king of Po∣lonia.
          • Francisco Sforce the last duke, led captiue into France.
      • Lewis Sforce who was made duke by the Emperor after his brothers sonne, whom some say he poisoned.
        • Maximilian died without children.
        • Francisco died without children.
      • Lewis the twelf••h, duke of Orleans, who also made war to recouer the Du∣chie of Milan, and being king hee tooke Milan by force, and carried Lewis Sforce away prisoner.
        • Claude daughter to Lewis, married to Francis duke of Valois, and afterwards king of France.
        • Francis of Va∣lois the French king. Henry 2. king.
      • Charles Earle of Angoulesme, Loyse his wife, sister to Philibert duke of Sauoy. Francis 2. the French king.
    • Charles Duke of Orleans, who af∣ter his vncles death went with an army against Milan.
    • Iohn Earle of An∣goulesme.

[ A] ¶ The Islands of the Canaries.

THe Ancients place these Islands in the Atlantick sea, & cal them the Fortunat Islands, but they do not agree in their names. And moderne writers are verie different from the ancient, touching their disposition & scituation. They were vnknown since the ruin of the Roman Empire, vntil that a French gentleman called Iohn of Betancorte made conquest of some of them, in the yere 1405; which con∣quest was afterwards continued by D. Fernando de Castro, by the order of the infant, D. Hen∣rie [ B] of Portugal, who sent a good armie thither in the yere 1444. Some reckon they are se∣uen in number, that is to say, the great Canarie, Lansarote, Forteuenture, Teneriffe, Go∣mera, Fierral, and Palma: Others add vnto these, Gratiosa, S. Clara, Roca, Lobos, Ale∣grança, and Infierno. The great Canarie hath ninetie thousand Stades in circuit, & hath about nine thousand inhabitants. Teneriffe is somewhat lesse, it hath a mountaine in it called the Pike, so high as it may be seene aboue fortie leagues off. Palma is a small I∣sland, but verie pleasing.

¶ The Qualitie of the Countrie.

[ C] THe Islands abound in barley, honie, wax, sugar, cheese, sheepe, goats, and camells, and they haue great store of hides. Among other things there growes a hearbe cal∣led Oricela, which is verie good to dye red, whereof they vent a great quantitie into all the parts of Europe. The Island of Palma, which is verie small, hath notwithstanding grea•• commodities, and doth abound in wine, cheese, cattell and sugar. By reason wher∣of they that go•• from Spaine vnto Brasil furnish themselues here with such victualls as they want. The Island of Fierral hath neither fountaine nor well, but God hath proui∣ded them miracul••••sly of water, from a cloud which doth couer a tree, from whence dot•• distill so much liquor as may suffice for men and beasts, yea and to water their land. T••••s cloud begins an houre or two before the Sun rising, and continues as long [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Sun••••eset▪ and the humor falls continually vpon the leaues, which distils this liquor continually in••o a Ceste••••e which they haue vnder it to receiue the water.

¶ The Manners.

THe inhabi••an••••, whom they call Ganches, were in former times so grosse and rude, as they 〈…〉〈…〉 the vse of fire. They did beleeue in one Creator of the world who rewarded the good, and did punish the wicked, and herein they all agreed, but in other things they disagreed much. They had no yron, but did esteeme it much (if any came to their hands for vse. They made no account of gold or siluer, saying, that it was a mad∣nesse [ E] to esteeme that which could not serue for any mechanicke instrument. They did ••ha••e thei•• heads with certaine flint stones, and their armes were stones and staues: but at this day, they are growne more ciuile and wittie, and are of an actiue disposition, since that the Spaniards haue frequented those Islands; whereof Lanzarotta, Fierral, or Hier∣ro, and Gomera, belong to priuat men: the rest are subiect to the Crowne of Spaine.

¶ The Riches.

THe Islands of the Canaries vent their excellent wines into all Europe, as also, their ••••gars, for which cause the Spanish and Italian Merchant come thither to buy it, [ F] a•••• ••••ansport it to other places. And to this effect there is a place called by them the 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

¶ The Gouernment. [ A]

THere is in the Island of great Canaria, a seat of justice, whereas they heare all causes, and doe justice to the other Islands. The lawes of Spaine are practised there.

¶ The Religion, and matters which concerne the Church.

THe people of this countrie in former times did worship the Sun, Moone, and Stars: but the Spaniards hauing made themselues Maisters thereof, in the yeare 1404, set∣led [ B] the faith there with their dominion, so as at this day they are all Christians. The Bi∣shop of these Islands hath his residence in the great Canaria, with the Inquisitors of the faith.

¶ The Islands of Cape Verd.

SOme thinke that these be the auncient Islands of Hesperides: They haue taken the name of Cape Verd, from Cape d'Africa, which stretcheth it selfe into the sea, right against the said towne. They be nine in number, and were discouered, in the yeare 1455, by Lewis Cadamuste, others write, that they were found out by Antonio de Nolli a Ge∣neuois, and began to be peopled in the yeare 1440. Their names are, Saint Iames, and [ C] Fueogo, or the Island of Fire, S. Anthonie, S. Luce, S. Vincent, S. Nicholas, Sel, Bona∣uista, and May. The chiefest Island is that of S. Iames, the which is seuentie miles long: The Portugals haue in this Island a good towne, which is called Ribera Grande, and hath in it about fiue hundred families. There is and safe a spatious Port, it is scituated be∣twixt two mountaine••. There is a Riuer which waters it, the which doth rise some two leagues from the citie, whose bankes are ful of Cedars, Oranges, and di••ers other plants, among which, the Indian Palme tree, which beares nuts, growes verie well. The Island of S. Iames is generally ••ough and hillie, but it hath good and pleasant valleis, the which are verie well peopled. They sow good store of Rice there and Millet, which growes ripe in fortie dayes, wh•••• doth not prosper well; they haue cotton, the cloth whereof, [ D] they vent vpon the co•••••• of Africke. They h••ue generally throughout this Island store of goats, which euerie foure moneths haue three Kyds or more. There are also great store of Tortoises, whose shels are as big as a Target.

When as the Sunne passeth into Cancer, it raines in a manner continually there. Vpon the West of Saint Iames, is the Island of Fire, and that of Bra••a, of small impor∣tance, yet the Island of Fire, hath some dwellings in it; and vpon the North, is the Island of May, where there is a broad Lake, two leagues long, full of salt, a common thing in those Islands: but there is one hath more of those salt pans, than all the rest, and therefore it was called the Island of ••alt, which is otherwise barren, but onely of wild goats. Bonauista hath a name, contrarie to her qualitie, for that it is without [ E] any grace o•• ••ontent. There is nothing worthie obseruation in the other Islands. Vpon the West of Cape Verd, is the Island of Palma.

¶ The Island of the Prince.

THis Island del Principe stands three degrees from the Equinoctiall Northward; it is so called, for that the reuenues thereof were assigned to the Prince of Portugal for his entertainment. It lies from the Island of S. Thomas, Northward one hundred and twent••e mi••es▪ it is little, but good, and therefore reasonably well ••anured, their greatest wealth grow•• by sugar, whereof they send great store into other countries: There grows [ F] also a kind of Palme tree, from whence the inhabitants draw a certaine liquor, which serues them for drinke, and doth quench their thirst.

[ A] ¶ Mozambique.

MOzambique is distant from the firme land about halfe a mile: It is a towne scituated in the Island of Prase, which Island containes in bignesse about halfe a mile, and is plaine. There is a very good Port, whereas the Portugals ships lie without danger, ha∣uing a Fort which couers them.

¶ The qualitie of the countrie.

[ B] THis Island carries Palme trees, and Indyan nuts, Limo••ns and Figges. As for other fruits they haue not many: and they bring vnto them wheat, rice, and other ne∣cessarie thinges from the Indies. They haue great store of beeues, and sheepe, which haue broade tailes and very waightie, goats, hogges, hens and such like. The flesh of their foule is exceeding blacke, but of a very good tast. This Island stands in the mouth of a riuer which they call Mogincates, in the fifteenth degree to the South: it hath no fresh water, but what they bring from the maine Land, from a place which the Portugals call Cabasera, and for this cause they haue great cesterns and pots wherein they keepe their water. The ayre of Mozambique is hot and vnwholesome, so as many times passengers [ C] which stay there fall sicke.

¶ Their Manners.

THere are in this Island some fortie or fiftie Portugals which are married there, and dwel commonly in this Island; these men liue after the maner of their owne coun∣trie. Besides these fortie or fiftie Portugals, and the Mestiz which are ingendred of Indian women by Portugals, there are some foure hundred families of Negros which dwell there, and their houses are couered with straw: these liue partly after the manner of the Portugals, and partly like the other Negros. But they that liue betwixt Mozambique and the Cape of Good Hope, are altogether barbarous and sauage, without either God or [ D] law. They all go generally naked, and the men haue only a little peece of cloth which co∣uers their priuie parts, and the women from the middest of their brest vnto the middest of their thighes couer themselues with a certaine peece of course cotton, but they that liue within the maine land hide not any part of their bodies. At Mozambique, they make their greatest dainties of swines flesh, and doe not forbid it to any sicke person, as they doe all other kinde of flesh. It is not lawfull for any one to liue in this Island vnlesse hee marrie. The tyrant or king of Quiloe, was sometimes ma••••ter thereof, and the Mahome∣tans dwelt there vnder a gouernor, whom the Arabians call Zequen.

[ E] ¶ The Riches.

THere is a mine of gold neere to Sofale; which is three score French leagues from Mozambique, towards the Cape of Good Hope; there is much gold drawne out of this mine, and an other kind of gold which they call Botongo, and Ouro Po, that is to say, poulder of gold, for that this gold is thinne, like vnto sand, and yet as good as any that comes from the East. The gouernour of Mozambique hath a Lieutenant which remaines in the Fort of Sofale, and sends vessells called Pangajos to Mozambique, which goe along the coast and carrie gold to the gouernour. These vessels are made of a light wood, and the boords are ioined together with thred hauing but one naile onely to hold [ F] them. The mines which are neere vnto Angola are on the other side of Affrica, distant fr•••••• those of Sofale about one hundred and fiftie leagues, and the Negros doe often go th•••• iourney by land, to bring gold to Sofale. The profit which the gouernor of Mozam∣bique drawes in three yeares, is about three hundred thousand duckats an d more, which some esteeme to be nine ••uns of gold: and this profit growes chiefely from the mines of

Sofale and Angola. They carrie from Mozambique to the Indies, gold, ambergreece, [ A] hebene, and iuorie, and in like manner a great number of slaues, who are very strong and fit to endure labour.

¶ The Forces.

THe Portugals haue a Fort in this Island, which was made perfect in ten or twelue yeares, it is as well fortified as any one that is in all those parts. But there is very small store of Artillerie, and munition for warre; neither are there many souldiers. Not∣withstanding, at any time of neede, all the Portugals which dwell in this Island are [ B] bound to defend this Fort, for that there is not any other place of strength in this Island. By meanes of this Fort, the Portugals haue made themselues masters of the trafficke of all the neighbour countries, which abound with gold and iuorie: and by meanes there∣of, they make their voiages to the Indies more easie, for their ships doe winter at this Island, and refresh themselues there. Within the Fort of this Island there are many ce∣sterns to preserue water, where they haue alwaies prouision for a whole yeare.

¶ The Gouernement.

THe gouernours charge which is sent to Mozambique continues three yeares, at the [ C] end whereof an other succeeds him. It is the custome of the Portugals, not to con∣tinue their officers longer in any charge, but to substitute others in their places. They are chosen among them, whom the king of Spaine hath imployed in his Indian fleets, for that they are recompenced for the seruice they haue done by the meanes of these offi∣ces, for the which they haue good entertainements, beside the profit which they may make by the meanes of that wherin they are imployed, and the place where they remain: and this profit cannot be small, for that the officers doe all things at their pleasures. The ships passe once a yeare from Mozambique vnto the Indies, that is to say, in August, and they returne againe in Aprill, neither may any one be admitted to this trade but those that are married at Mozambique. [ D]

¶ The Religion.

Some of the Negros which remaine in the Island of Prase, whereas Mozambique stands, are Christians, but the rest hold the Mahometane law, and the opinion recei∣ued by the Turkes, who had bin in those countries before the Portugals. But they whom they call Mestiz are all very affectionat to the Romish religion.

¶ The towne of Ormus.

I Place Ormus in the Monarchie of Spaine, for that it is tributar••e to the Spaniards, [ E] who haue the best place in all the Island: and to auoide many repetitions, Ormus hath of the one side, the realme of Persia towards the North, and on the other side, Arabia. This Island is twentie miles broad, it lies at the mouth of the Persian Gulfe, and is in the seuen and twentieth degree of height.

¶ The Qualitie.

THis Island is full of rockes, stonie, and in a manner barren, where there is not any grasse to be seene. The rockes are all couered with salt, and their houses built of salt [ F] stones. It beares not any fruit, but receiues all kind of victuals from Arabia, Persia, and the towne of Bassora. Their Winter is like vnto that in Portugal, but in Sommer, at the same time it is so extreamely hot, as the people are forced to rest themselues in certaine channells couered with wood, which are full of water, wherein they plunge their whole

[ A] bodies, hauing nothing out but their heads. The couerings of their houses are flat, and pierced with holes, to receiue the coolenesse of the wind and ayre, as at Cayre. The wa∣ter which they drinke, is brought from the maine land. There is a certaine disease which raines at Ormus, which is such, as there breeds wormes in their thighs which are touched therewith, and these wormes proceed only from the water which they drinke; they are like vnto Lute strings, and are two or three ells long: they are drawne foorth by little and little, causing them to turne with a straw, which they doe willingly follow; but when as they resist they must deale no more with them, but only tie that which they haue drawne forth, and rubbe the swelling beneath the hole with sweet butter, and in [ B] this maner their thighs are freed from these wormes in tenne or twelue dayes. If any one breaks one of these wormes, he feeles most violent torments.

¶ The Manners.

THe inhabitants of the Realme of Ormus, participat of the humours of the Persians and Arabians, but I will not make any long discourse of their manners and humors, but will speake more particularly thereof when I shall come to the realme of Persia, and shall treat of Arabia.

[ C] ¶ The Riches.

BY reason of the scituation, and commoditie of this Island, it abounds in all things, and is frequented by the merchants of Persia, Arabia, Turkie, and the Indies, and with all the neighbour countries; but the greatest numbers are of Armenians, Persians, they of Asia, and the Venetians, who are verie curious to recouer the pretious stones which come to Ormus from the Indies, and they returne from Ormus to Venice by land. They bring to this Island, from Persia, Coraçon, and Dias, goodly tapistries which they call Alcatiffes, and Grogerans of diuers sorts from Turkie; in like maner from Ara∣bia, many hearbs and phisicall drugges, Dragons bloud▪ Manna, Mirre, Incense, and ex∣cellent horses from Barem; with many goodly pearles from Masca••te, which is a Port [ D] betwixt the Capes of Rosalgate & Moncadon vpon the Arabian shore. Moreouer, they bring dried raysons, and dates of diuers kinds, with marmalade, the which is afterward sent from Ormus to the Indies, by which meanes they are all furnished. They doe also make great profit at Ormus vpon the Larins, which is a kind of coyne of Persia, long, and ending as it were in two branches. The cause of the great concourse of people to Ormus is this: There are two troupes which assemble euerie yeare to go thither by land; they are called Caffiles, or Carauanes, and they part from Aleppo a towne in Syria to go to Tripoli, which is within three daies journey. The Carauane obserues this order: euerie yeare in Aprill and September they chuse a captaine with a hundred Ianisaries, [ E] who conduct the Carauane vnto the towne of Bassore, from whence they go by sea vnto Ormus without any difficultie. The merchants know well the time of the Carauanes departure, at what times there will be a great multitude of horses, cammels, dromedaries, and so many men readie for this voyage, as sometimes they number fiue or six thousand, who march in order like vnto an armie. Euerie camell carries two with their baggage, which hangs of either side, and the Ianisaries haue a continuall care least the Arabians should annoy this troupe, as they attempt commonly to doe. They passe a desart, which continues fortie daies journey, and at the end of euerie three or foure dayes they dig pits to water their cattell, and to quench the thirst of men. There are also many Pourueiers which follow the troupe, and sell victuals to them that need. Euerie night they sleepe [ F] vnder Pauillions with good Sentinells on euerie side. They come after this manner to Bassora, hauing passed Babylon, which they now call Baggadet. They rest some day••s at Bassora, and meet againe in this towne at the time of their returne, and so go backe to Al••ppo after the same maner. And this is the reason of the great trade of merchants and merchandise at Ormus.

The gouernor of Ormus reapes more commoditie than any other at the Indies, ex∣cept [ A] him of Mozambique; for he sends his ves••els to Goa, Chaul, Bengala, and Mesca∣ta, and there sells his commodities, hauing made an Edict, that no man shall sel any mer∣chandise before the gouernors haue been bought. And this comes not from the king of Spaine, but from the libertie which gouernors take, who vse their authoritie as they please. Moreouer, by a priuiledge which the king hath giuen to gouernors, there is no man that may send any horses to the Indians but they, or such as they haue appointed. This brings great profit to the gouernor, for that horses are wonderfull deere at the In∣dies,* 1.1 so as a horse of a meane bountie shall be sould for foure or fiue hundred Pardauues, euery one of which, is about a Rickes Doller. The most conuenient time to go from Goa [ B] to Ormus is in the moneths of Ianuarie, Februarie, March, September, and October.

¶ The Forces.

THe chiefe strength of the realme consists in the Fort which the Portugals haue built there, the which is well fortified, and there are Cesternes in this Fort as in that of Mozambique, by reason that the Island hath great want of water. This Fort is reasonably well furnished with souldiers and Artillerie, to keepe the Mahometans in awe. All other places are of verie small importance.

¶ The Gouernment. [ C]

THe Portugals gouerne themselues after the maner of their countrie, and the captain or gouernor of the fort carries himselfe, as they doe in other places of those quarters where they obey the king of Spaine. The king of Ormus remaines in this Island, but not in the place where as the Portugals are. They that are made kings hold it for a maxime of State in the beginning of their raigne to put out the eyes of their brethren, and of all those of the bloud royall; which done, he giues them all the contentment that they can desire, except that which may satisfie the sight: For there is a setled law, that no blind man may gouerne the realme, so as by this meanes they are freed from all feare of ciuile [ D] warre.

¶ The Religion.

THe king of Ormus and all his subiects are Mahometans, and follow the Persian Re∣ligion; but they that are Portugals, or issued from Portugals, are verie zealous Ca∣tholicks: and moreouer, there are some of the Countrie which haue beene conuerted by the preaching of father Gasper a Iesuit of Zeland.

¶ The Island of Diu.

THis Island of Diu, sometimes called Alambater, is distant from the riuer Indus fiue [ E] and thirtie French leagues. It is one of the most famous Islands in all the sea of Cam∣baia, diuided from the maine land by a verie narrow channell, so as they passe ouer vnto it by a bridge of sto••e. The citie lyes in the fiue and twentieth degree. It hath a good and commodious Port, the which is shut vp with a chain: ouer the port there is a strong Fort built by the Portugals.

¶ The Qualitie of the Island.

THere is small store of fruit in this Island, but it is full of things necessarie for the life of man. There is plentie of oxen, kine, sheepe, foule, butter, milke, garlike, pease, [ F] and such like: yet the milke is not so cleanely as in other countries. There is also cheese, but it is verie beastly. The inhabitants haue great store of salt fish, and they smoke their flesh, as we doe our neats-tongues.

[ A] ¶ The Manners.

THe towne of Diu is inhabited by Portugals, with whom they that are borne in the Prouince are mingled, as at Ormus and other townes at the Indies which the Por∣tugals hold. Some follow the manners of the Portugals, others hold those of their neigh∣bours, whereof wee shall hereafter make mention: yet the ordinarie conuersation doth daily giue more credit to the fashions of our Europe.

[ B] ¶ The Riches.

THis towne hath a very commodious Port, whither many merchant strangers come, so as it cannot faile to be rich: it lies betwixt two rich countries, Sinde, and Cambai••. There are alwaies great numbers of Turkes, Persians, Armenians, Arabians and others. They pay great customes••here vnto the king of Spaine, for that the Banjanes, Gusarates, Rumes, and Persians, which traffique into Cambaia and go towards the red Sea, doe most commonly lade and vnlade their ships here, by reason of the commoditie of the Island.

[ C] ¶ The Forces.

THe Portugals haue so well fortified the towne of Diu, as they haue made it in a manner impregnable, whereof they haue made good proofe by two terrible sieges, the one by the Souldan of Cambaia, in the yeare 1539, and the other by the Gusarates, in the yeare 1546: but they defended it so well, and interated their enemies in such sort, as they raised the siege with much losse and shame. This towne is Maistris of all the na∣uigation and traffique of those seas. Some eight leagues from thence is a little Island cal∣led Betel, as neere vnto the continent as Diu, and a league in compasse, the which a king [ D] called Badurius thought to compasse in with a wall, and to make it a Fort, but Magno de Acugna interrupted him, and cut his garrison in peeces.

¶ The Gouernment.

THis Island did sometimes obey the kings of Cambaia, being seated in his realme: and this king had suffered the Portugals to build a Fort there, the which hee after∣wards repented, and sought by treacherie to dispossesse them: but in time the whole Island is come into the Portugals power, who gouerne themselues as in other countries which they hold in those parts.

[ E] ¶ The Towne of Daman and other places.

THis coast of the Indies is properly called the Island of Vaquas vnto the gulfe of Camb••ia, other places haue their proper names, as Mozambique, Melinda, Or∣mus, Cambaia, Choromandel, Bengala, Pegu, Malaca and others. This countrie hath many Ports and Islands, which are vnder the Portugals dominion, with diuers strong forts which they haue built there. Daman is the first of all, and fifteene miles from thence and nineteene degrees and a halfe of eleuation, is the towne of Basaijn: ten miles from thence, and in the nineteenth degree, is the towne of Chaul, with a good fort: fiue [ F] leagues from thence, is Dabul, which is in the eighteenth degree; and from Dabul vnto the Island of Goa they reckon fifteene leagues, and Goa is in the fifteenth degree. The Inhabitants of Goa terme all that countrie which is from Goa vnto Daman, the Nor∣thern Region: and that which lies from Goa vnto the Cape of Comorin the Southern; but it is properly called the land of Malaber.

¶ The Qualitie of the countrie which is neere Daman, [ A] Chaul, and Basaijn.

ALl this countrie doth yeeld aboundance of rice, pease, and other pulses, of oyle, In∣dian nuts, and plentie of butter: But there is no oyle-oliue to be found in all the East Indi••s, but what is carried out of Portugal: it hath aboundance of all other things necessarie for the life of man: it doth also beare great quantitie of ginger, but they doe not much esteeme it. This countrie called the Northern part doth enioy a temperat aire, yea the best of all the Indies. [ B]

¶ The Riches.

THe Townes of Daman, Chaul, and Basaijn haue very good and commodious Ports, where there is a great concourse of merchants: but Chaul is the most fa∣mous, for the great commerce it hath with the Inhabitants of Ormus, Cambaia, Sinde, Mascatte and Bengola, neere vnto the red Sea. There are in this citie merchants which are exceeding rich, and a great number of ships: in all the countrie they make certaine workes of cotton, but no great store. There is a place neere vnto Chaul, whereas they make many stuffes and garments of silke: and this silke is brought from China, and then wrought by the Inhabitants about Chaul, whereof they make great store of mo∣ney▪ [ C] They doe also make in the same towne Litters and Chaires with wonderfull art.

¶ The places which the Portugals hold vpon the Coast of Malabar.

THe Coast of Malabar, begins at Cape de Ramos, which is ten miles from Goa to∣wards the South, and ends at the Cape of Comorin, in all which space there may be about foure and fiftie French leagues. The Portugals haue in this part the Fort of Onor, ten miles from Cape de Ramos. [ D]

¶ The Qualitie and Riches.

THere is great store of pepper in this place, so as they transport from thence yearely seuen or eight thousand pound weight: and this pepper is held the best of all the Indies. It is not many yeares since they did trafficke thither for pepper; but it is now much in request. The Queene of Baticole (to whom this countrie belongs) sels this pep∣per, and deliuers it vnto their Factor that transports it, who remaines at Onor: but hee must pay his money six moneths before he can receiue his merchandise. There grow•••• also much rice in this countrie. [ E]

¶ The Force.

THe Fort of Onor, which the Portugals haue here, is not much frequented, but at such times as the ships come to lade pepper; the rest of the time it hath little com∣panie: the Fort is reasonable good and well furnisht. They haue also along this Coast the Fort of Barzelor, fiue and twentie miles from Onor, where there is much rice and good store of pepper, as at Mangabor, whereas the Portugals haue also a good Fort, nine miles from Barzelor.

¶ The Fort of Cananor.

THere is also a Fort in Cananor ten miles from Mangalor, and this place is much [ E] esteemed, for that they find greater aboundance of pepper there than in any of the other places. The Malabares haue neere vnto this Fort a place built after their manner, whereas there is a market kept euery day, and aboundance of victuals brought thither,

[ A] especially great store of foule, egges, butter, honie, oyle, Indian figs, which are particu∣larly called of Cananor, and exceed all others that are at the Indies in greatnesse. There they also sell masts for ships, which are exceeding great and strait, and yeeld nothing to them of Norway, whereof they haue so many as they furnish their n••ighbour countries. This countrie is full of goodly long trees, which are verie pleasing to the sight. There are many white Moo••es, Mahometans, among the Malabares, who trafficke towards the red sea. But neither these Moores nor the Indians may trafficke without permission from the Portugals, who doe euerie yeare scoure the sea with a good armie, to free it from pi∣rats: [ B] and if they find any vessels without their priuiledge, they carrie them away, and hold them and their merchandise for good prise. Finally, the Moores are friends and confe∣derats to the Portugals for feare of their fort, but they conspire secretly against them, and giue money to the Malabares, enemies to the Portugals, to annoy them.

¶ The Fort of Cochin.

THe Portugals haue also a place verie well fortified in the towne of Cochin, whereas the Vice-roy, and the Bishop of Cochin remaine.

[ C] ¶ The Fort of Coulon.

THere is also a fort in Coulon, which is twelue miles from Cochin, whereas they doe euerie yeare lade a ship with pepper.

¶ The Fort of Colombo in the Island of Zeylan.

THey haue also a strong place in this Island, the which hath beene besieged by a king of Zeylan, and did so resist him, as he returned with great losse. But the Portugals haue no kind of commerce with them of the Island. The gouernor hath not in a man∣ner [ D] any profit, but that which growes from the synamon, which the Portugals doe ga∣ther forciblie in the Island where they may get it, for that it is held the best at the Indies. It is the barke of a tree, which growes like vnto a Bay tree, thin & low, and it is gathered after this manner: They cut the barke off the tree round about, from one knot vnto ano∣ther, then giuing a slit downe, they pull off the barke with their hand, and set it to drie in the Sun, which makes it to turne as we see it. This tree doth not wither away, but ga∣thers a new barke for the next yere: and that synamon is best which is taken euerie yere, for that which is two or three yeares old, is grosse and not so good. Betwixt the Nor∣therne point of Zeylan, and the firme land, ariseth a little Island called Manar, where there is a Fort, built by the Portugals, to secure the fishing of pearle, which is made [ E] along that coast by the Parauians.

¶ A Towne in the realme of Bisnagar.

THe Portugals haue also a Towne in this Realme, called the Citie of Saint Tho∣mas, or Malepur: it is the place (as they say) whereas Saint Thomas was buri∣ed, it was in a manner desart, but now the Portugals doe inhabite it, and there are some Iesuits. They haue built a faire Church of stone, whereas before it was but a Chap∣pell of wood, and the doore of this Church is made of the wood of that Chappell. The Portugals doe vainely and superstitiously attribute many miracles to this place. This [ F] Church doore is set full of nayles, and couered with Iron, to the end it should not be carried away by too much deuotion.

¶ The Towne and Fort of Malaca.

MAlaca is seated vpon the riuer of Gaza, and is a good faire Towne, hauing in cir∣cuit neere twentie miles. The originarie or first inhabitants of this place report, that the beginning came of six or seuen fishermen, which came to dwell there, but their number increased, by the arriuall of other fishermen of Siam, Pegu, and Bengola, who bi••i•• a towne▪ and framed a particular language, taking all the best kind of speech from other nations. They named their towne Malaca, which is growne so rich and mightie in a short time by reason of her s••ituation, as she contends for precedence with the grea∣test [ B] townes, yea with some realmes thereabouts.

¶ The Qualitie of the Countrie.

THe ayre is so troublesome, as not only strangers, but euen they that are borne there are many times troubled with diuers infirmities, which fasten chiefely to the skinne and haire: so as it is almost a miracle if any one escape with life: which makes many for∣beare to goe thither; yet the desire of gaine doth incite many to hazard their healths by this voyage. The countrie yeelds not any fruit, but some little corne in certaine places. Finally, all the realme of Malaca, which runs two hundred and seuentie miles in length, [ C] is in a manner nothing but a de••••rt, if you except that which is neere vnto the towne. The Countrie people sleepe vpon trees for feare of Tygers, where of there are so many as they will come into the towne for a prey. The Portugals who tooke this towne from a king of the Moores, found the scituation so commodious, as they haue made it in a man∣ner the Center of all the merchandise and trafficke of the East, and the head of a king∣dome, which extends from S••••capura to Pullo, and Cambilan; yet, as I haue said, the ••••re is vnwholesome, by reason it lies so neere the equinoctiall, and is hot and moist.

¶ The Manners of the people.

THere are in this place about a hundred families of Portugals, which liue after the [ D] manner of their countrie, with a Bishop, and a Colledge of ••esuits, besides the Ca∣stell. They that are borne in this place weare long haire, they haue malitious spirits, and take delight to commit murders in the night, to the end the authors may not be know••. Both men and women make loue alike, and thinke that there is not any Nation can man∣nage it so well: they make amarous songs and rimes, and doe wonderfully commend the power of loue in their verses, which are w••••tie, well composed, and of a good grace. They haue the nearest, and most elegant language of all the East: and therefore ma∣ny at the Indies doe vse it; as in England, Germanie, and the Low-countries they vse the French tongue. [ E]

¶ The Riches.

THere is a Staple in this Towne or a Market place, with the trafficke of all the Indies, of China, and of the Islands which are called Molucques, and other neighbour Islands: and there may you see many vessels from China, the Mo••ucques, Banda, ••a∣••••, Sumatra, Siam, Pegu, Bengola, Choro••••andel, and other places, which returne la∣den with merchandise. This place yeelds great profit vnto the gou••rnour, and more than any other, except Mozambique and Ormus. Euerie yeare there parts a ship from Portugal for Malaca, a moneth before all the rest, and goes not to any other part of the [ E] Indies without constraint. They receiue their lading onely at Malaca, and haue the best of all them, that come thither. There are six hundred Portugals continually in the fort of Malaca.

[ A] ¶ The Gouernment.

THere was sometimes a Mahometan king at Malaca, but hee was dispossest by Al∣phonso of Albuquerque, for that he sought to annoy Lopes of Seguiera a Portugal all he could; so as both the towne and realme are now vnder the dominion of the king of Spaine, and this realme is now gouerned like vnto the rest which obeys this prince. They coyne money both of gold and siluer there, whereof the Inhabitants before had [ B] not any vse, for that they did vse certaine money of Tinne, which did weigh much, and was worth little,

¶ The Religion.

THe Portugals which remaine at Malaca doe all hold the Romish religion, and they that are borne in the countrie, whom they call Mallayes, are for the most part Chri∣stians: but there are many merchants whose aboade is sometimes long, which are of di∣uers religions, and liue at libertie. There is (as I haue said) in the towne of Malaca a Bi∣shop, as at Cochin, but he is vnder the Archbishop of Goa.

[ C] ¶ Banda and Amboyna.

FRom Malaca they goe by Sea to Banda and Amboyna, whereas the Portugals haue Forts and Captaines to make the trafficke easie. Banda is an Island fiue degrees in alti∣tude beyond the equinoctiall. The Portugals frequent there, for that there are very good nuts, which they call Maciz, the which they preserue, and they also make oyle thereof which is much esteemed, and carried to Malaca, and from thence to other places. All the trafficke in a manner here, is made by exchange, as at Sunde, and at Iaua. They must not easily trust the Inhabitants of this Island, who are commonly great deceiuers of mer∣chants; [ D] so as the Islanders must bring their merchandise vnto the ships, before they can treat safely with them.

Twentie miles from the Island of Banda, towards the West North-West are diuers Islands which are called Amboyna, of the principall among them, whereas the Portugals haue also a little Fort; they were discouered in the yeare 1512. The soile is very rough and barren, and the manners of the people bad and wicked: they are men eaters, and demand one an others parents when they are old to deuour them. By reason that their soile is barren, they are giuen to the Sea, and do much annoy the neighbour Islands with their Piracies. There is not any great store of spices in this Island; but the ships which go from Malaca to the Molucques, refresh themselues, and water in this Island.

[] ¶ The Philippines.

BEnding toward the East, a hundred miles or thereabouts from the countrie of Cambaia, wee see the Islands called Lussones, the which are otherwise called the Islands of Manillia, or the Philippines, either by reason of the principall towne or fa∣mous Port, which is called Manillia, or in honour of Philip the second king of Spaine, at whose charge they were discouered first by Magellanes, who died in Cebu, which is one of the chiefe Islands of the Philippines: but afterwards more fully by Michaell Lopes [ F] of Lagaspy, who was sent by Don Lewis of Valesco Vice-roy of Mexico, by commande∣ment from king Philip the second in the yeare 1564. The towne of Lusson or Manillia, lies in foureteene degrees of height from the Pole Artike. The Island hath about one thousand miles in compasse. About this Island there are many others, whereof the prin∣cipall are Tendaiar, which is properly called the Philippina, and is the fairest and most pleasing of all the rest; it hath one hundred and sixtie leagues in compasse: and Minda∣nao, in which Island there are many good townes, as Cailon, Pauados, Subut, Dapito,

and Suriaco. The Spaniards haue beene so hautie and ambitious, as to call all them the [ A] Islands of Philippina which lie betwixt Noua Hispania and the gulfe of Bengola, and they affirme for certaine vpon their owne knowledge, that they are in number eleuen thousand.

¶ The Qualitie of the countrie.

THe whole countrie is very fertile in wheat, and there is store of stagges, horses, oxen, kine, goates, and hogges: There are also many ciuet cats, and all kind of fruits, with great aboundance of honie and fish. The Spaniards say that they beare spices, but there is [ B] little seene or none at all. There is also great store of rice, sugars, pulses, and figges which are halfe a cubite long. They doe also find gold and iron there: the aire is good and temperate, and approching more to heate towards the Sea, but within the countrie it is more cold.

¶ The Riches.

THe Inhabitants make much siluer of their gold and yron which is transported to neere places, and also into Spaine, their ciuet cats yeeld them no small profit: but that which makes them more rich, is the great commerce they haue with the Chinois, who brings great store of merchandize thither, as silkes, cottons, Porcellaine dishes, [ C] sulphure, quicksiluer, brasse, copper, meale, nuts, chestnuts, dates, all sorts of linnen cloth, inkehornes, and many other prettie toyes. There comes euery yeare twentie ships from China with such merchandizes, the which is transported to Mexico, with infinite profit to the Inhabitants

¶ The Forces.

THere are good places in these Islands, whereas the Spaniards entertaine great gar∣risons, being resolued not to leaue them in any sort. The losse which they made of late yeares, of that which they held in the Molucques, hath made them resolute to de∣fend [ D] these better; and to this end they haue great store of munition for warre, and much ordnance, and are prouided of men necessarie for this defence.

¶ The Gouernment.

THe king of Spaine entertaines a gouernor in the towne of Manillia, or of Lusson, who hath charge of all these Islands: he is sent thither from Newe Spaine. These Islands were sometime vnder the Monarchie of the kings of China, but being abando∣ned by the Chinois vpon certaine occasions, and the Inhabitants not supported by any, it was easie for the Spaniards to make themselues masters thereof. [ E]

¶ The Religion.

THe Bishop of all these Islands r••maines at Manillia: there are many persons cate∣chised daily, and which receiues the Christian religion. [ F]

[ A] [ B] THE ISLAND OF GOA.

The Contents.

1. DEscription of the Island of Goa, the climat and circuit. II. Barrennesse of the Isl••••d, which abounds in nothing but in wine made of Palmes. III. Begin∣ning of winter in Aprill, and of sommer in September, contrarie to other coun∣tries. IIII. Ordinarie diseases in Goa. V. Nature and disposition of the Inhabitants of Goa, and of the Portugals in all the Indies. VI. What titles they beare, and what distinction there is among men. VII. Ceremonies obserued in the celebration of mariages [ C] and christnings. VIII. Apparell, and the manner of liuing of the women of the Countrie, and their loosenesse. IX. Of the Canarins and Corumbins of the Indies, their manner of liuing and religion. X. Riches of Goa, consisting in the traffique of slaues, horses of Arabia, spices, gummes▪ tapistrie, and the exchange of siluer coynes. XI. The fortification of this Island, and how they are gouerned by the Vice-Roy. XII. Of the pepper which is drawne from the In∣dies, and their manner of proceeding. XIII. Diuersitie of religion at Goa, where they liue with libertie of conscience. XIIII. Christianitie brought first into the Indies by S. Tho∣mas. XV. Christianitie newly planted at the Indies by the Franciscans.

THe towne of Goa is the chiefe of all the Indies, whereas the [ I] [ D] Spaniards and Portugals doe frequent. The Island with the towne are in fifteene degrees of altitude towards the North: it is inuironed with a gulfe or riuer of three miles in bredth, which diuides it from the firme land, and com∣passing about the towne, joynes with the Sea on the South side, making in a manner the forme of a halfe Moone. The mouth of the riuer vnto the towne is of an equall bredth; and there are, betwixt the firme land and the Island of Goa, certaine little Islands inhabited by that countrie men: 〈◊〉〈◊〉 on the other side of the towne, the riuer growes so low in [ E] sommer in some places, as they may easily wade ouer, and go not aboue the knees. The Island where Goa stands is called Tizzuarin, nine miles long, and three broad. The Bardes lye on the North side, whose scituation is higher, and therefore the ships of Por∣tugal lie more safely when they carrie away their lading. This land is also subiect to the Portugals, and hath many boroughs and villages well peopled. There is a little riuer which doth seperate the Bardes from the maine land for a small space. On the South side of the Island of Goa, whereas the riuer enters into the sea, stands Salsette, which doth also obey the Portugals, and is in like maner diuided from the maine land by a little 〈◊〉〈◊〉. The towne of Goa hath goodly houses after the Portugal fashion, but low by reason of the heat, and euerie house in a manner hath his garden and orchard full of all [ F] sorts of Indian fruits. In old time it was a little towne, closed in with a weake wall, and ditc••es without water, but when the raine filled them: the walls are yet standing, but the gates are gone, and about the old walls you may see the new towne twice as big as the ancient, b••t it lyes open.

¶ The Qualitie of the Island. [ A]

[ II] THe Island of Goa is verie barren, and bears not any thing that may serue for the nou∣rishment of man; it hath onely some few sheepe, goats, pigeons, and some foule. The countrie is rough and hillie, and therefore not fit for labour, but lies desart and vn∣manured. Other things fit for the life of man, come from Salsette and Bardes, but prin∣cipally from the firme-land. They haue onely wine of Palmes, which they make in a∣boundance. There is a little water at Goa that is good to drinke, the which they find in a fountaine called Baganijn, a quarter of a league from the towne, which slaues fetch and [ B] sell. As for the water which must serue in bathes, to wash them with all, and to seeth their meat, they draw it out of wells which are made in their houses. The ground is sto∣nie, drie, and of a red colour; and this hath giuen occasion to some Italian Alchimists to seeke for gold there and brasse, but the Vice-roy did forbid them, least the reputation of this treasure should draw the neighbour nations to assault the towne.

[ III] Winter begins there about the end of April, from Cambaya vnto the Cape of Co∣morin, by means of the Westerne wind which comes from the sea in this countrie. It be∣gins by thunder and lightning, after which followes a continuall raine vntill September, and then winter ends with like thunder and lightning. This continuall raine makes them to call this season winter at the Indies, and at this time they can make no voyages by Sea. [ C] As for sommer they take it for the clearest season of the yeare, and then is there a fresh wind which comes from the East, and makes the nights more pleasing: but there are no other fruits in sommer, but such as hang on the trees all the yeare. Euerie man shuts vp his goods for feare of winter, as if he were to make some long voyage by sea. At that time they lay all their ships before the towne, vnrigging them, and taking out all that is in them, they couer them with reedes, least the aboundance of raine should rot them. There are some houses which the continuall raine doth quite ••••ine to the ground. There are certaine heapes of sand which stop vp the riuer in the beginning of winter, suf∣fering no passage for the ships, and the sea is so troublesome and low••, as it makes all the world deafe. The riuer which inuirons the Island of Goa, becomes fresh, by meanes of [ D] certaine red waters which do fall from the mountaines, although that the water be com∣monly salt, and like vnto the sea. In September these heapes of sand go away, and the ri∣uer is open in such sort, as it not onely giues passage to small vessels, but to the greatest ships of Portugal of eight hundred tunne, and these ships enter freely into the riuer with∣out sound or danger. Finally, winter is wonderfull troublesome in this countrie, for that they canno•• ••ractise any thing by reason of the continuall raine, so as men are forced to liue retired in their houses, or to entertaine themselues with their neighbours as well as ••••ey can. Yet the women and the Mestiz (who are well pleased when they haue raine) go into the countrie with their groomes and seruants, taking conuenient victualis with them. These people haue cesternes and reseruers for water in their houses, which are [ E] made to swim in, which is one of their delights. At this time in a manner all the fruits at the Indies doe flourish. Sommer begins in September and continues vnto the end of Aprill, with a bright and cleare season, and little raine: and then they put their ships to sea, and the armie parts to defend the coast and the merchants. The Easterly windes which come from the firme land, and are therefore called Terrenhos, blow then at Sea, and although they be pleasing, yet they breed many diseases, by reason of the great chan∣ges whereunto the Indian coast is subiect. Moreouer, they blow alwayes in sommer from midnight vntill noone; but they go not aboue ten miles from the land. Presently after di••••e•• the Westerne windes rise, the which are called Vi••asons. These windes do sometimes bring a great temperature against the insupportable heat of the country. And [ F] doubtlesse we must admire the qualitie of the aire in these quarters; for that from Diu vnto the Cape of Comorin, winter is boistrous and hurtfull: and from the other part of the Cape of Comorin, vnto the coast of Comorandel, the sommer is pleasing, although that both be in one height, and but seuentie miles distant, yea in some places twentie, and

[ A] at one time. They that go from Cochin towards the towne of saint Thomas,* 1.2 being sea∣ted vpon the same coast of Choromandel, and towards the mountaines of Ballagatte which they must passe to go into the other countrie, see on the one side the fields won∣derfull pleasant and well m••••ured in Sommer, and on the other side, a countrie spoiled with rain••▪ darkned with clouds, and full of the horror of thunder and lightning. And this is not seene alone in this countrie of the Indies, but also neere vnto Ormus to∣wards the Cape of Rosalgatte, whereas the ships haue a clee••e and calme season; but hauing once past the Cape, and being on the other side, there is nothing but winde, raine, and stormes, with the same alteration of Winter and Sommer as is seene in other [ B] places of the East.

They that remaine at Goa fall into many diseases by reason of this change, for they [ IIII] haue one sodaine infirmitie called Mordexin, which comes vnto them with so great a vomitting, as they are readie to giue vp the ghost: this disease is common and mortall. The flux is also contagious there, as the plague is with vs continuall feuers kill men of∣ten in three or foure daies. The Portugals finde no better remedie, than to draw bloud: the Heathen draw it with certaine herbes, sandall, and vnctions. These diseases kill many Portugals yearely, for that they eate nothing which is of good nourishment, and aban∣don themselues to glut their lusts with lasciuious women. We may see the experience in the kings Hospitall, which is a retreat for Portugals onely, out of which there are carried [ C] euery yeare foure or fiue hundred dead persons. The pox are very general amongst them, neither is it any blemish to him that hath them: they haue the remedie from China roots, and although they bee much infected, yet no man flies them, no, although they haue had them three or foure times: but contrariewise they glorie in them, and hold this for a sweet paine, in regard of others.

The Indians are ignorant of the plague. Many are tro••••led with the stone, and a loose∣nesse of the bowels, especially they that are married, for that they drinke water continu∣ally, and commit infinit excesse and disorders. They stand alwaies with their bellies na∣ked, in their low galleries, which are in the e••••••ing of their lodgings, receiuing the wind there, hauing neere vnto them their seruants, whereof the one rubs his toes, another his [ D] h••••d, and the third driues away fl••e••▪ ••hey continue in this manner two houres after their meat, and then they rest; and being 〈◊〉〈◊〉, they bring them many kinds of preserues, to the end the water should not trouble 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ which seemes vnto them of a better tast. Hence it comes, that most of the men haue great bellies, and are called Barriges for this cause. The daies in Winter and Sommer differ not aboue an houre: the sunne riseth at six, and sets at the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ho••re, according to the cou••••e thereof. At noone day in that countrie they haue the sunne perpendicular ouer their heads, and haue little or no shadowe at all. At Goa, they may se•• the ••wo Poles of the world: the South Starre is not much aboue the Horizon, nombre than that of the North.

[ E] ¶ The Manners of the Inhabitants of Goa, and of the Portugals generally throughout the Indies.

THe countrie of the Bardes▪ is inhabited by people which are ru••e, and grosse, who [ V] are called Canarins, and go all naked, except their p••iuie parts. They spend their time chiefely in manuring their Indian Palme trees, which loue sandie places, and the leane shoare. Many Portugals dwelling at the Indies are ma••ied to women of that coun∣trie, and their children are called Mestiz or Mesticos, of •• yellow complexion for the most part, and reasonably wel proportioned, as the women of that countrie be; but after 〈…〉〈…〉 they differ nothing from naturall Indians▪ As for the children whose [ F] father and mother are Portugals▪ they call them Castis••••, th••t is to say, of Race, for that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 signified Race▪ and the•••• re••••emble the Portugals, but that their colour is betwixt yellow and 〈…〉〈…〉. The Portugals or Mestiz liue for the most part idle, yet there are 〈…〉〈…〉 make 〈◊〉〈◊〉, shoe••••, stooles, a••d vessel▪ notwithstanding▪ commonly they cause 〈…〉〈…〉 to doe it▪ Finally▪ the masters keepe thei•• state in such sort▪ as it is not pos∣sible

to see any thing more arrogant; for they haue so graue a gate as a man would hold [ A] them for princes if he knew not their natures and disposition: the which doth not onely raigne among gentlemen and nobles, but also among men of the basest condition, which other nations find insupportable, by reason of this slow measuring of the streets: and all doe equally thinke that other men doe owe them much honour, the which they affect and looke for. The Indians borne, and strangers, as well Infidels as Christians, labour in other arts and trades. All the I••habitants are distinguished into two sorts of persons; that is to say, in those that are married, and those that are not. They that are not married are commonly called souldiers, which is a very honest name among them; not that they are inrolled vnder any captaine, or haue taken an oth to any one, for that this manner of [ B] inrolling of souldiers is not in vse at the Indies. So as the Portugals which are sent out of Spaine vnto the Indies, are not tied to any certaine place where to make their aboad, but may goe where they please. They are all distinguished by titles and prerogatiues of dignitie. Some are termed Hidalgos da casa del Reynosso Segnor, that is to say, Gentle∣men of the kings house: others M••ssos Hidalgos, which are gentlemens children, or such [ VI] as the king hath bred vp in this ranke. Others are termed Cauelleros Hidalgos, that is to say, Knights, which carrie this title for some deed of armes whereby they haue made them∣selues famous, or for the seruice they haue done their Prince: or to speake more truely they obtaine it of the Generall when he is readie to go ••nto the warres, or else for mo∣ney; so as at this day men which are come from base places in Portugal carrie this qua∣litie, [ C] although they haue no merit; and they doe not refuse it to any one that seekes it, so he be rich. There are also some which they call Mosos de Camera, & de seruitio; these be gentlemen or groomes of the kings Chamber, and this name is of such esteeme among them, as they desire it more than great riches. There are also Esquires or Escuderos Hidal∣gos, who haue a ranke among 〈◊〉〈◊〉: all the rest are termed Hombres Honrados, that is to say, honourable persons: and they that are of baser condition among them carrie the ••ame of souldiers, without any other title: and so he is aduanced in qualitie as he doth seruice to the king, and according to their titles they haue recompences. The gentle∣men doe willingly entertaine and feast the common soldiers when they are retired into towns, and cal witnesses of this boun••ie. The Portu••••ls, Mestiz, and Christians, are stately [ D] in their houses, and the Portugals among others haue commonly ten or twentie slaues, according to their meanes. They that are ma••••ie•• ••aue their houses well furnished, and in regard of their persons they are curious to change their apparrell and linnen euery day, as their wiues doe; and euen their seruants change often by reason of the heat. The officers doe honour all Portugals equally, as well Nobles as others. When any one goes in the street he hath one seruant which carries an Vmbrello to defend him from the sunne, another his cloake for feare of raigne, and for the sun••e, and the other ••hird car∣ries his sword, least it should hinder his affected graui••ie. Before dinner the seruant brings his master a cushion of silke to kneele on, if he haue any deuotion to goe to the church to pray. They vse great and long salutations with kissing of hands, which they [ E] spare not one to another. When they enter into the church, their seruants are there before, who haue prepared their seates, whereas all they that are set, rise vp and salute them with great reuerence. If any one doth not render them the honor which they haue done them, they are much offended, and seeke all meanes to haue reuenge, calling their friends together to kill him, who by negligence hath not saluted them: but when as they will not kill him, but onely reuenge themselues in some sort, they beat him cruelly with a great reede which they call Bambus, gathering great troupes together to this end; and this is practised in a manner euerie day at the Indies, and yet the Magistrat doth not pu∣nish it: they doe also beat their enemies with long sackes full of sand, and bruse their whole bodies. When as any one of the common people goes to visite another, the Ma∣ster [ F] of the lodging meets him at the doore with his hat in his hand, and leads him into his hall, where hee presents vnto him a seat, such a one as he himselfe sits in, and then he demands of him the cause of his comming. When he hath a will to depart, the master of the lodging conducts him to the doore, with kissing of hands, and much reuerence

[ A] and offers of seruice: if he were not intreated after this manner, he would be so much offended, as he would seeke a reuenge vnto the death: and they doe so much affect this honour, as if they giue him a seat that is too low, or not so honourable as the other, he is much incensed.

Whe••••s there is a marriage celebrated at any ones house, that is esteemed weal∣thie, [ VII] all their freinds and acquaintance come thither, either vpon their owne horses, or vpon horses that are borrowed or hired, and there are sometimes a hundred richly ap∣pointed. They goe vnto the Church after this manner; with their seruants and Vm∣brellos in good order: the friends goe before, and the b••idegroome comes betwixt two [ B] of them, which they call gossips, then the bride followes betwixt two she-gossips, who are carried in their litters richly appointed: the seruants follow after without ranke or order. When as the ceremonie of marriage is ended in the Church, the married couple are conducted backe with the same order, and their freinds, neighbours, and kinsfolkes goe, and place themselues in windowes hanged with tapestrie, which are in those streets whereas they must passe, and besprinkle them with a water made of roses and sugar. Those which are of account haue seruants which can play vpon flutes and other instru∣ments, and reioyce the companie with their musicke. The married couple com∣ming neere vnto their dwelling house, thanke such as haue accompanied them, who are on horsebacke with much honour, and then they enter presently with the she-gossips [ C] with great grauitie, and then place themselues at windowes. They that haue accompa∣nied them, giue some carrires vnto their horses to doe them honour, and the gossips be∣gin first: others doe them honour with a consort of flutes, which are much vsed at the Indies. After their courses, all passe before the window, and leaue the house with much honour, except the gossips, who go vp and make many good wishes vnto the ma∣ried couple, whilest there is something preparing to make them drinke water, which is a signe of friendship among them. Hauing once tasted of that which is presented vnto them, they depart, and there remains but three or foure of their neerest kinsfolkes, who, after they haue made good cheere, stay not long with the married couple, for that they will not keepe them from their content. The married couple go most commonly to bed before Sun-set without any ceremonie or modestie as they vse here. When as they chri∣sten [ D] a child, they carrie it after the same manner, and the godfather goes last of all alone, being followed by two seruants on foot, whereof the one carries a siluer dish, the which is white or gilt, full of roses, in the middest whereof there is a wax candle gilt and artifi∣cially made, and pierced through with certaine pieces of gold and siluer, which is the pre∣sent of him that baptiseth the infant: an other carries a siluer salt gilt in the one hand, and in the other a bason of the same mettall, with goodly napkins that hang vpon his shoulders: this is followed by two litters, in the one is the godmother, and in the other is the midwife with the infant, couered with rich cloth made for that purpose.

The ceremonies of baptisme being ended, they returne in the same order with the [ E] sounding of flutes, and the running of horses, the godmother beholding all, as at a mar∣riage. These are the ceremonies obserued in regard of them that are married; but the souldiers which are not, go to sea in Sommer and defend the coast. They are sta••ely in their houses, and obserue a great grauitie, hauing a seruant who carries an Vmbrello, and sometimes they giue vnto a man, whom they hire to that end, fiue and twentie Basarucs a yeare. Many times ten or twelue souldiers liue together, and haue but one or two ser∣uants to make cleane their clothes. They liue vpon Rice sodden in water, salt fish, and other mea••s of small substance, and without bread, vsing for their drinke, fountaine wa∣ter. They haue most commonly two or three suits of apparrell in common, which they put on that go abroad, for that such as remaine at home haue not any need of clothes, by [ F] reason of the great heat which makes them glad to be couered with linnen. There are gentlemen and captaines that be rich, who giue money bountifully to these souldiers, to the end they may buy them clothes and all other necessaries. By this meanes they do pu••chase the loue of these souldiers to imploy them afterwards more freely in their voy∣age•• at sea, or in the courses they take to get their enemies. There are many which liue

after this manner at their ease. But the greatest profit of some of them growes from the [ A] loue of the Portugals wiues, from the Mestiz, and Christians at the Indies. These wo∣men are so loose and incontinent, as they giue all the money they can get vnto their adulterers, whom they inrich by this meanes. Some of these souldiers, by the fauour of their she-freinds, trafficke here and there, and these are called Chatins, for that they haue left the profession of armes, and will serue no more as souldiers in their sea armies: For there is not any one of these that is forced to goe to the wars, although he be inrolled in the booke of Portugal, & notwithstanding that they are exempt from going to the war, yet for that they liue vnmarried, they are called souldiers. There are a great number of these Chatins at this day at the Indies, for that hauing little or no wars, many giue them∣selues [ B] to merchandise, to the end they may get something: There are many reasons hereof.

First of all, Captaines who made account of souldiers, doe not now much regard ho∣nour, and they giue little to them they hire. The souldiers also remaine alwaies mise∣rable with this pay, and although they haue many attestations and certificats, which should make them expect some recompence, yet they cannot beare that great charge which they must vndergoe from thence to Portugal, nor make presents vnto them who can doe any thing in Spaine, and yet doe nothing without gaine. And moreouer there is this inconuenience, that although they obtaine some dignitie, yet must they many times attend the death of some one that goes before them, and spend their whole liues [ C] in this expectation. We must add hereunto the discommodities and dangers of the Na∣uigation, which is the cause that many returne no more into Portugal, but marrie at the Indies, and giue themselues to some trafficke. Moreouer, the warre is not hot against the Barbarians, and they discouer no more lands, for that the Vice-roy is more curious of his owne profit than of honour. For charges at the Indies (being but for three yeres) they that exercise them, seeke nothing but to inrich themselues during the time. This is the cause why the seas are not so safe as they haue beene, and that Pirats doe in a manner what they list, for that the Vice-roy doth not ordinarily entertaine a good armie at sea to scoure the coasts. And this doth also diminish the king of Spains power and reuenews. For no man can trauell by land, for that there are many realmes which are no friends to [ D] the Portugals, who onely haue certaine forts vpon the coast.

[ VIII] At the Indies they doe seldome see the wiues of Portugals, of Mestiz, nor of Christi∣ans, but whenas they go to some Visite or to the Church; and when as they go forth, they are carefully garded, for they are in their litters so couered as it is impossible to see them. Whenas they goe to the Church or to Visite, they are proudly attired with store of pearle or pretious stones, their garments are of damaske, velvet, or sattin stript with gold, for silke is verie common in that countrie. In a manner all goe bare headed in their houses, hauing a fine smocke called Baju, which couers them vnto the nauell, and from the nauell downewards they haue a linnen cloth painted, twice or thrice double; the rest is vncouered. This is the habit which women of all ages and all conditions doe weare [ E] in their houses, and whilest they remaine within doores their maides doe their businesse abroad: they eat no bread, no more than the seruants; not for any dearth there is of corne (for they may haue aboundance) but vpon a certaine ••ustome and inclination which they haue, to eat Rice, the which they seeth with water, hauing for their meat salt fish, and fruits which are also salt, called by them Mangas, whereon they poure the broth of flesh or fish. Finally, they eat their pottage with their hands, mocking at the vse of spoones, as if they were vnciuile. They vse for their drinking certaine thin vessels made of blacke earth, the which are pierced in the necke; they call them Gargolettes, for that he which drinketh lifteth vp the vessel, and not touching it with his lips receiues the water by those little holes, the which doth gozle, and make a pleasing noyse. They [ F] hold this manner of drinking more ciuile, to the end they defile not the cup with their mouthes, which are sometim••s vncleane. They that come newly out of Portugal and will drinke after this manner, spill much water vpon their clothes, for that they know not how to vse the cup. They call such men Reynolz in mockage, and this name is applied

[ A] to all those that are ignorant of the Indians manners, who being not accustomed to their affected grauitie, walke freely vp and downe the streets not c••ring for this retirednesse, whereunto notwithstanding they do soone accustome themselues.

The men of those Eastren countries are wonderfull iealous, and doe not suffer any one to see their wiues or daughters, be he neuer so deere a friend, except their Gossips. If any one knocke at the doore to speake with the husband, presently the women flie away and hide themselues, leauing the husband alone to entertaine him that comes, yea their neerest kinsemen, and which is more, their sonnes, hauing past the age of fifteene yeares, are banished the places where the women remaine, and haue their lodgings apart. For [ B] it hath beene often heard that the Nephew hath beene beloued of his vncles wife, the brother of his brothers wife, yea and the brother sometimes hath had to do with his own sister. Without doubt the incontinencie of the women of those parts is verie great, and there are few married women chast. Many haue a souldier to be their friend, who goes to visit them secretly by meanes of their maides which ••erue as bauds. They vse certaine herbes to this end; and among others they haue a herbe called Dutroe, ••rom whose seed they draw a iuice the which they mingle with their husbands drinke, who hauing drunke it, laugh continually like men that haue lost their vnderstanding and remaine without all apprehension, or else they sleepe as soundly as if they were without life; then the wo∣men being assured of them, enioy their loues in the presence of their husbands, who lie [ C] without all knowledge: sometimes the force of this drinke continues foure and twenty houres.

And to make these poore cuckolds recouer their sences, they wash their feet with cold water, but they haue no remembrance of what is past. The wiues doe often kill their hus∣bands with poison, the which they doe applie as they thinke good, to the end it may worke his effect in the time which they haue prefixed; so as some haue liued six yeares after they haue taken it. Husbands do also kill their adulterat wiues, or that are suspe∣cted to haue done them wrong, with the testimonie of three or foure persons, who wit∣nesse that they haue broken their faith in wedlocke. For by the customes of Portugal, a man that kills his wife vpon this occasion is not punished, but he may lawfully take ano∣ther. [ D] There are many which die after this manner, and there is nothing more common at the Indies than the death of adulterous wiues, yet cannot it induce others to a better life, for they hold it for a great content and glorie to die in making loue. Moreouer they are verie curious to haue their houses and all other things exceeding neat and handsome, and they wash their bodies often to keepe them cleane. They flie labour and take delight in perfumes. They rub their heads and foreheads with Sandall that they may smell well, and they do continually eat the leaues of Bethele with garlicke, and an herbe called Areque which is sometimes of such force, as it makes them in maner drunk; and this herb is drie, and hath a tast like wood or roots. The women do continually chaw of these three things like vnto beasts, and do swallow downe the iuice and spit out the rest: [ E] which is the cause that their teeth grow blacke and red, which amaze them that haue not beene accustomed to see them. These fashions come from the Indians, and these wo∣men are persuaded that they are thereby preserued from a stinking breath, and from the toothach and the paine in the stomacke, so as they would rather loose their liues than these herbs. Whenas the husband is absent, the wife eating of Bethele, will stand behind a mat, to see who passeth by, and not be seene; if any one whom she loueth passeth by, she will lift vp the mat gently, as a testimonie of her affection: these are the beginnings which the women giue vnto their loues, the which they do afterwards practise by their seruants, and many other stratagems. They do also eat much spice, to maintaine them∣selues in heat, or to augment it, and they do eat certaine cakes called Cachondes compo∣sed [ F] of diuers sorts of spices to the same effect. And the women do not onely prepare this for themselues, but they doe also giue them to their husbands to eat, to make them more valiant in bed, and to giue themselues more content. They bath themselues often, and swim ouer riuers whereunto they are accustomed. They goe forth in the night to performe certaine vowes which they haue made, and then they walke freely on foot, for

that the magnificence of Litters and Chaires is defended in such occasions: the women [ A] do often long for these nights, and then their most confident slaues doe accompanie them, and whilest their mistres praies, they entertaine their friends in some other place, where they enioy their loues, whilest they mocke at their mistres who is at her deuoti∣on. The women of those countries, hold it a great felicitie to be beloued of a white man or a Portugal, and among themselues they commend the beautie of their louers with great vehemencie. The children which are borne of women slaues belong vnto their maisters, who reioice whenas they haue augmented their familie with a seruant. This is alwaies obserued whenas the children are not begotten by a Portugall, or a man of a free condition: for then the father may redeeme his child eight daies after his birth for little money, and make him free. But if he forbeares to redeeme him within eight or ten [ B] daies, he is then a slaue, and shall be his masters, who may sell him afterwards for what price he pleaseth or breed him vp as his slaue if he thinke good: you shall seldome see the mother although a slaue and a miserable creature to kill her child vpon her deliuerie: for it is a glorie for those women to be with child by a white man: this makes the mother to keepe her child carefully, and not to giue it vnto the father, so as if he will haue it, he must steale it away. The children of Portugals, Mestiz, and other Christians are bred vp naked, they haue a shirt onely, which we haue called Baju, the which they carry vntill they be able to weare breeches: they are in a manner all nursed by Indian slaues.

The Pagans which liue at Goa, hold the incounter of a rauen to be ominous, not∣withstanding that there are many of these birds at the Indies; he that hath seene any one, [ C] comming out of his lodging, returnes presently, and shuts himselfe vp with a resolution not to come forth for any cause whatsoeuer, so much they feare some disaster. There are many Magitians generally, who charme serpents, and drawing them out of a basket, force them to dance by the sound of some instrument; they kisse and imbrace them, yea and speake vnto them as to men, to the end they may get mony by these trickes. They know too well how to prepare and compound poisons, and they giue it freely to them they hate. The lodgings of these Pagans are commonly low, and little, couered with straw, without windowes, and with such low doores as they are forced to stoope when they go in or out: their beds are of mats of reeds, whereon they lie either to sleepe or to rest themselues. The tables, the clothes, and the napkins are made of figge leaues, which [ D] do also serue as dishes or pots both for oyle and butter. They dresse their meat in ear∣then po••s, and seeth their rice in them, wherewith they fill holes which they make to that end, and they do also beat their rice, for that being poore and miserable, they buy rice in the huskes: some sow rice neere vnto their dwellings, for the vse of their fami∣lies. Whenas they will drinke they vse a little vessell of copper, with the which they po••re wine into their mouthes, for that they will not touch the vessell. They do in a man∣uer rub all their houses ouer with cow dung for feare of flies. Finally, they keepe their bodies as cleane as they can, so as after the necessities of nature, they wash themselues all ouer: they do vse to wash themselues with the left hand, for that they eat with the right hand, and doe neuer vse any spoones. They do strictly obserue their superstitions [ E] and ceremonies, neuer going forth before they haue made their praiers. When they go vpon the way they do worship the horrible images of their Gods which are in rockes, mountaines, and caues, and they adore the shapes of diuells. Whenas they haue a voiage to make either by water or land, they do nothing but sound their trumpets for the space of foure••ee••e daies before their departure, and if they go by sea, they set vp many Ban∣der••lles and Flags in euery part of the ship, in honour as they say, of their Pagodes or Idols▪ and when they are returned they make the likenoise for a weeke or two. They ob∣serue th••se ceremonies in other solemnities, as in marriages, christnings, the seasons of the yeare of haruest, and seed time. There are a great number of barbers amongst them, [ E] who go vp and downe and are imploied for a small matter: they haue no shops, but go from house to house and are imployed in the basest seruices, and to be short, they are in∣••reated as men of small account. The Pagans which are skilfull in phisicke, hold their ranke in the town of Goa, for that next to Embassadors and some Merchants, there is not

[ A] any other infidels that may couer thēselues with an vmbrello going through the towne.

The Portugals when they are sicke, disdaine not to conferre with those Pagan Phisi∣tians, & the Archbishop with all the Church men trust more in them than in the Portu∣gals themselues: this is the reason why these phisitians are wonderfully honoured, and gather great wealth. The labourers or husbandmen about Goa, are in a maner all Chri∣stians, yet they differ little fr••m Pagans, from whom they haue taken many ceremonies, whereas the Inquisitors doe winke, by reason of their long custome. There are in the same towne, at the end of euerie place, Changers, Indian Christians, who are called Xa∣raffos: these men haue great knowledge in me••talls, and tell if a peece be good or false [ B] as soone as they see it. The Pagans haue this custome, to continue in their fathers trade or profession; and they marrie wiues of their owne art: they are all distinguished by their vocations, and they doe not deale in marriage with women that are of another trade. The fathers giue nothing in marriage with their daughters, except some Collers, and Carkenets, and all his other expence consists in the marriage banker. The male chil∣dren carrie away all the inheritance.

There are many Gusarates and Banjanes of the countrie of Cambaia, which dwell at Goa, Diu, Chaul, Cochin, and other places of the Indies, for the trafficke of wheat, cot∣ton, rice, and such like things, but especially for pretious stones, wherein they haue more skill than any man. They are learned in Arithmaticke, and not onely exceed other In∣dians [ C] in that point, but euen the Portugals themselues. They will by no meanes eat with other nations, no though they should die for hunger. Whenas they goe by sea to Cochin, they carrie as much victuals as they think shalbe necessarie for their voyage, but if they remaine longer than they had set downe, they had rather die than eat with a Chri∣stian, or any other, or to receiue meat.

Many Canarins and Decanins, which are of the countrie of Decan, make their abode [ IX] in the towne of Goa, and haue shops there. They buy from the Portugals silke, dama••ke, veluet, cotton, Pourcellain dishes, and other merchandise of China, Cambaia, and Ben∣gola, after the great measure, to the end they may sell it againe by a lesser ell. They haue broakers to this end, their countriemen, who prouide for their trade. These men bring [ D] victuals from the maine land to Goa. They haue Indian ships with the which they traf∣ficke along the coast of Cambaia, Sunde, and the red sea. There are many excellent goldsmiths among them, many grauers and other Artizans, a great number of barbers and phisitians, who remaine all at Goa, and doe in a maner equall the Portugals, Mestiz, and Christians, in number. They farme the kings rights about Salsette, Bardes, and the Island of Goa, and for this cause they are often constrained to assist at all iudgements, whereas they plead their owne causes, alledging the laws and statutes of Portugal, with amasement to the Portugals themselues.

The Canarins, and Corumbins of the Indies, imploy themselues onely to labour and fishing, and haue a care of the Indian Palme trees which carrie Cocos. There are some [ E] of them which doe nothing but wash linnen; these are called Meynattes, and the other Patameres, that is to say, messengers by land. These (which are the basest among the In∣dians) liue of little; they forbeare to eat the flesh of cow, oxe, bufle or bugle, and hog, and they liue like vnto the Canarins and Decanins. They goe all naked, hauing nothing but their priuie parts couered with a little cloth. The women couer themselues with a linnen cloth, which hangs to their thighs; whereof they trusse a part vpon their shoulders, so as halfe the brest is seene. Many of these Canarins make profession of Christian religion, for that they do all in a maner liue neere vnto Goa: for there are many palme trees neere vnto the bankes, as also Rice, which is the Canarins food, and grows in a low land. These men bring foules, milke, fruit and egs from the firme land vnto the towne: their houses [ F] are couered with straw, with a little low doore whereas a man cannot enter but stoo∣ping: they beget verie many children, which remaine naked vntill they be 8 yeares old, and from that time they hide their priuie parts. The women are d••liuered without any Midwife, & then they presently wash their children, & lay them vpon Indian fig leaues, and so they goe presently about their houshold businesse, as if they had not been n••wly deliuered. The children, as I haue said, are nursed naked, and when they are filthie, they

vse no other mysterie but to wash them with water; so as they grow strong and actiue, [ A] a••d fit for any thing, for they are not daintily bred. The men of this sort liue many times a hundr••d yeares in perfect health, and neuer loose tooth, mocking at our delights, with the which we wrong our liues and nature. They onely keepe a rust of haire on the top of their heads, and shaue the rest. They are good swimmers, and go by water in boats called Almadies, which are so little as they will scarce containe one man, so as they are often oue••t••rned; but they are so nimble as they recouer them againe, cast out the water and go on the•• voyage. But they are ver••e miserable, for that they liue poo••ely & ill, and are most commonly by this occasion leane, weake, and of small courage, which makes the Portugals to disgrace and contemne them. They obserue the Decanins ceremonies in their marriages. When as the husbands are dead, they make a pile to burne their bodies, [ B] and their wiues cut their haire, and teare their garments (which are but little worth) in signe of mourning.

There are many Moores and Iewes remaining at Goa, Cochin, & other places, wherof many are come from other countries, & many Indians also by birth, who haue suckt Ma∣homatisme and Iudaisme with their milke: as for their families, they follow the custome of the country where they remain. They haue among the Indians, Temples, Sinagogues, and Mesquites, where as they exercise their religion at their pleasure. In the Portugals townes euerie man liues in libertie of conscience: yet no man may make sacrifices after his owne manner for feare of scandal, and it is forbidden vpon paine of death. The Iewes haue most commonly faire wiues. There are many come from Palistina, & yet they speake [ C] verie good Spanish. As for the Moores, they liue according vnto Mahome••s law (the which we will describe in the Tu••kes Empire) and trafficke towards the red sea, whither they carrie spices: and although that many of them liue among the Portugals, yet they hate them deadly, and hinder the aduancement of the Christian faith, the which they make as odious as they can to the Indians.

¶ The Riches.

[ X] THe Portugals and Mestiz which remain at Goa trafficke daily to Bengala, Pegu, Ma∣laca, Cambaia, China, and other places. The ••itis••ns of Goa, the Indians and neigh∣bour nations assemble daily in a place which is like vnto the Bourse at Antuerpe, but af∣ter [ D] a different maner: for at Goa the gentlemen and others assemble with the merchants, and all things are ••xposed to sale, as in a market or faire: this assembly is made euery day throughout the yere, except the Festi••all daies: it begins at seuen of the clocke in the mor∣ning, and continues till nine, by reason of the excessiue heat in the afternoone. There are publike criers in the chiefe place of the towne which is called Leylon, and they go vp and down this place with chaines of gold, jewels, pretious stones, and other ornaments, being accompanied by a great number of slanes of either sex, to sell, and when as any one offers to buy any of these miserable people, they bring them forth to view as we doe beasts. They haue also at Goa, Arabian horses, all kinds of spices and drugs, gummes which smel wel, goodly tapestries, & many other curiosities of Cambaia, Sinde, Bengola, China, and [ E] other places, so as it is almost a wonder to see so great a multitude of people. Some Por∣tugals liue and gather wealth by means of their slaues, which are sometimes to the num∣ber of twentie or thirtie, and liue of little: these slaues are hired in the towne to do all workes, and carrie water to sell. The women slaues dresse their Indian fruits, and make di∣uers works, which they carrie to the market to sell; for the which they chuse the fairest and yongest, to the end that merchants (being allured by their beautie) may buy their commodities more willingly for the womens sake that carrie them, whom they hope to enioy, to whom these women doe easily yeeld, to get a peece of siluer. The Portugals in∣rich themselues easily by this meanes, and entertaine their families. Others make great [ E] profit of siluer after this manner: When as the Portugals ships arriue, they buy many great Royals of Spaine, and giue twelue in the hundred profit, the which they keepe vntill Aprill, when as the Merchants goe for China, for that these Royals are in great request there, and they gaine twentie or thirtie in the hundred. At the same time they buy Larins of Persia, giuing eight or ten profit for euerie hundred, and

[ A] when as the Portugal ships come, they exchange them for Royals, and gaine twentie or fiue and twentie in the hundred. The vse of these Larins is necessarie at the Indies, to buy pepper at Cochin, wheras this kind of coyne is much esteemed. There are also other sorts of mony as Pagodes, Venetians, and Santonois, which are of gold. Many doe also make great profit of all these coynes, especially if fortune fauour them. Many liue of the re∣uenews of Cocos which their Palme trees beare them, for that they make great trafficke of this fruit at the Indies: so a•• you shall haue one, who besides all charges, will gaine in one day by one Palme tree, halfe a Parda••ue, whereof one is worth three Testons of Portugal money, and there are some that haue foure or fiue hundred of these trees in one [ B] f••rme, the which they let out to Canarins.

Many of the Pagans dwelling at Goa are rich merchants. There is a street in which there is nothing but shops of these people, full of silkes, vellets, and other stuffes, and of Porcellains. They buy all these things first in grosse by the meanes of their Brokers, then they sell them by retaile, being wonderfull wittie in these businesses. In the same street there are other merchants right against them, who sell linnen cloth of all sorts, and shirts readie made as wel for the Portugals, as for their slaues, with much other smal ware. There is another street, whereas they dwell that ••••ll all kind of workes for women, and hempe to make ••ailes and cordage. In another street are the Banjanes of Camba••a, who sell pearles and pretious stones, corall, and such like. There is also a street whereas [ C] they make litters, chaires and stooles, which they paint of diuers colours, with Lacca, an Arme••ian Gumme. The goldsmiths haue also ••heir dwelling apart, as also the carpe••∣ters, ioiners, and other tradesemen: and there are others which sell rice by great with other Indian commodities. There are a great number of Apothecaries who sell drugs and spices by retaile; these are for the most part Bram••ns or Idol•• Priests, who haue at the end of euery street shops furnished with all sorts of merchandise, the which is very commodious for the people.

The chiefe and most ordinarie kind of coine is the Pardauue Xerafin which is of sil∣uer, and made at Goa: it hath on the one side the image of saint Sebastian, and on the other three or foure arrowes bound together; it is worth three Testons or three hundred [ D] Reyses of Portugal, and the price is sometime higher, sometime lower, according to the course of the change. They vse another kind of counting, by ce••tain Tangas, fiue of which make a Pardauue or Xerafin of the lesser mark. For there are two kinds of mony, that is to say, ••he good and the bad: for that foure Tangas of good mony make fiue of bad: by rea∣son wherof, in buying & selling, before they conclude, they desire to know if the paiment shal be in good or bad money. They haue also another account by twenties, not that they are in Specie, but in his imagination that acounts: these are worth foure Tangas of good, and fiue of bad money: their small money carries the name of Basarues: they doe ac∣count for fifteene Basaru••s of good money, eighteene of bad: a twentie and three Ba∣saru••s make two Reyses of Portugal money, and they are made of bad tin: three hun∣dred [ E] seuentie fiue Basarucs make a Pardauue: a Larin of Persia is worth a hundred and fiue, and a hundred and eight Basarucs, according to the course of the change. There are crownes of gold called Pagodes, which are alwaies worth about eight Tangas: the Pa∣gans which make them, graue the figure of their Idol: the crownes of Venice or of Tur∣kie are almost worth two Pardauues Xerafins. They haue also crownes of gold of saint Thomas with the image of this Saint, which are esteemed at seuen or eight Tangas. As for the money of Portugal, they receiue not any but great Royalls, which are worth ••ight small ones; whenas the ships of Portugal arriue, a Royall is esteemed at one hun∣dred thirtie and six Reyses, but the price doth rise whenas the time drawes neere to carry [ F] them into China. There is a certaine kind of counting at Goa, in regard of buy∣ing and selling. There are Pardauues Xerafins of siluer which are in Specie, but there are some of gold, which are in imagination, and serue but for accounts: for whenas they buy pearles, stones, gold, siluer, and horses, the Pardauues are valued at six Tangas; but in regard of other merchandise, whenas they do not specifie any thing, they meane simply Pardauues Xerafins, euerie one of which is worth fiue Tangas. They also

name Pardauues of Larins, and then the Pardauue is worth fiue Larins. These are the [ A] coines which they vse at Goa, and the manner of exchange, by meanes whereof many grow rich. Finally, the great falshood of these Pardauues, which are sometimes won∣derfully well counterfeited, is the cause that they haue great need of changers to disco∣uer this false coine. The Indians of the firme land make this false money to deceiue the Portugals; so as no man dares take the least peece of siluer before he hath shewed it to a changer.

These changers are carefull to prouide all kindes of siluer for them that demaund it, hauing tables prepared where there are heapes of siluer distinguished by Tangas. A Tangas is worth seuentie and fiue Basarucs, and in the exchange of a Pardauue for three [ B] hundred seuentie and fiue Basarucs, they doe sometimes adde eight or ten.

The waightes of Goa, are like vnto them of Portugal, and are distinguished into Quintalls, Arrobes, and others: yet they haue another waight called M••o, which signi∣fies the hand, and wayeth twelue pound, the which they vse in selling of butter, honie, sugar and such like. They measure pepper with the Bharo, which makes three Quintalls and a halfe of Portugal weight, and euery Quintall is a hundred pound. They haue a measure which they call Medida, which is about nine ounces: Foure and twentie of these measures make the hand, and twentie hands the Candil. They measure rice, wheat, and other drie things after this manner, and lade their ships, making the account of their lading by Candils or Bharos. They sell rice also in the strawe well bound vp in bundels: ••••e bundell containes commonly three hands and a halfe. The best rice is called Girasall, [ C] and is better than that which they call Chambasall. There are also other sorts of rice of lesse value: when it is in the huske, they call it Batthe and it is very like vnto barley.

As for the Viceroys they are accustomed to visit the places and forts which are vnder the king of Spaine, fiftie, sixtie, and eightie miles from Goa, as wel towards the North as South. This suruey brings him as great profit as any other thing. It is most certaine that the Vicerois haue great reuenues, and dispose of the king of Spaines at their plea∣sure, growing exceeding rich by this meanes, for that the king giues them absolute power. Besides the reuenues and ordinarie profits they receiue presents from all parts, which inrich them: for all they that haue any alliance with the king of Spaine send (ac∣cording to the custome of Embassadors) to the Vi••••roy newly arriued, with presents [ D] which are great and stately: and whilest he remaines at Goa, he is entertained at the kings charge, like to the other officers, out of that which is receiued for the king in the countries of Salsette and Bardes.

¶ The Forces.

[ XI] THe Island hath onely a wall towards the East, right against the land of Salsette, vnto the other side of the land of Bardes. This defence is not good, but against the so∣daine inuasions of the people of the firme land, which are not vnder the dominion of the Portugals: there is no other fortification in this Island. There is in the land of Bar∣des [ E] a Castell standing high at the mouth of the riuer, but it is almost ruined, and hath only three iron peeces, and a man to keepe it.

The Island of Goa toward the sea, for the most part discouers it selfe with high rocks: but the land of Bardes towards the sea, hath a goodly shore of sand fiue hundred paces long. This is the guard of the Island: towards the East there are three or foure ports neere the riuer vpon the extremitie of the Island, right against the firme land of Salsette and Bardes: euerie port hath a captaine and a secretarie, without whose permission no man may go to the firme land; by reason whereof, when the Indian Decanins and other Ethiopian Idolaters which remaine at Goa, go to the firme land for any trafficke, or to seeke for victuals; they must in these passages haue a marke set vpon their naked arme, [ E] which marke they must shew at their returne, and they giue for the libertie of the pas∣sage two Basarucs being paid to the Captaine and Secretarie, who doe set a young man in Seninell all night, whose charge is to ring a Bell which hanges in the Tower.

[ A] There are fiue of these passages, one is towards the South, which leads to the firme land and to Salsette; this passage was called Benesterijm, and now the passage of S. Iames, by reason that the Church of Saint Iames is neere it. The second passage called Sec is vp∣on the East part of the Island, and it is the common passage to go to the firme land, for that the riuer is easier to be waded through there, than in any other place. The third, which is called the passage of Daugijn, or of the mother of God, is vpon the South side, and neere vnto the town; the wal reacheth vnto it, beginning at the passage of S. Iames: and as for the rest of the Island it hath no other defence. From this passage they ferrie ouer vnto the other Island, which answers vnto the firme land, and this fourth is called [ B] Nor••••••. The fifth and last passage is from the towne vnto halfe the riuer, vpon a low flat bending towards Bardes: this is the strongest of all, and is called the passage of Pangijn: and here they stay all vessels which go in, or come out of the riuer. These are all the for∣tifications of this Island, which notwithstanding doth not much feare the attempt of her neighbours, being carefully guarded and full of people. Yet that which might hurt the Portugals is the great multitude of Idolaters & Mahometans which are in this Island. But if there be any feare of that side, the Portugals doe set so good an order and keepe so carefull a guard, as they may well liue in assurance. Moreouer, their armies at sea which scoure the coasts, k••epe them from surprise, and their entertained souldiers which are many in number secure them.

[ C] ¶ The Gouernment.

THe Viceroy of the Indies which remains at Goa is sent thither for three yeares with full power, and sometimes he continues longer, according to the kings pleasure, but it happens not often, and is verie extraordinarie. This Viceroy hath within this towne his Councell, his seat of justice, his Chancerie, and his Iudges after the maner of Portugall, and for this cause he decides all suits and controuersies in the name of the king of Spain, to whom notwithstanding they may appeale in ciuile causes which are of great importance, and this is the onely point that is reserued. As for criminall causes, no man may appeale from the sentence that is giuen at Goa, vnlesse he be a gentleman; and the [ D] Viceroy is therein restrained, that ••e cannot put a gentleman to death, but must send him prisoner vnder good guard into Spain, vnlesse the king doe otherwise prouide. The Viceroyes Palace is guarded by souldiers who are entertained to that end. This dignitie continues vntill the arriual of another Viceroy who must suc••eed him, and being come to Bardes, or into some other port of the Indies, he presently sends his deputies to take possession. The Viceroy vpon this Summons quits the Palace to him that comes, and doth vnfurnish it of all the mouables, leauing nothing but bare walls, the which are pre∣sently hung with tapistrie, and the rest in few daies richly furnished. The precedent Vice∣roy returnes in the same ship wherein his successor comes. This great authoritie is ne∣uer [ E] giuen but for some famous ••ecompence. The Indians say commonly, that they can∣not hope for a better fortune at the Indies, whilest that this custome of sending Vicerois for three yeares shall be maintained. For the first yeare, the Viceroy doth looke into and discouer the manners of the countrey: the second, he seekes to gather wealth: and the third, he sets euerie thing in good order, least the successor surprise him. This may make them coniecture that this commaund will be lasting, seeing that no man can promise vn∣to himselfe a longer time to settle his affaires, and by this meanes it preuents the negli∣gence of such as deferre them from day to day.

The booke wherein they write the names of such as goe from Portugal to the Indies, is sent to one that hath the particular charge at the Indies, & this office is for three yeres [ F] like vnto the rest. When as Sommer comes at the Indies, and that necessitie doth force them to send an armie to sea, to assure the nauigation (which they of Malabar sworne ••nemies to the Portugals, doe hinder and trouble by all meanes) euerie yere about the m••neth of September, they make a proclamation by the sound of the drum, That all such as will serue the king, should come and receiue their pay. Then the Viceroy makes

a Generall who hath many Captaines vnder him, whereof euerie one commands a ship, [ A] and of these ships some hold one hundred men, and others thirtie. These men haue pay according to their titles, the which they receiue euerie three moneths. A simple souldier hath seuen Pardauues Xerafins, euerie Pardauue being worth three Teslons of Portu∣gal. An honourable person hath nine Pardauues, and so of the rest. The Captaines seeke to draw good souldiers vnto them by presents, beside their pay. The Shippes are well furnished with victualls, and the Captaines eat with the souldiers, and see that they bee well vsed; for that otherwise they would not be obedient. This armie doth guard and scoure the seas vntill Aprill, to hinde•• the courses of the Malabares. About the end of Aprill they returne to Goa, and then they draw their ships a ground: the souldiers being returned, goe where they please, and are no more [ B] entertained. Then the Viceroy protesteth before the Generall of the sea armie, that by his commaundemed••, and in the king of Spaines name••he hath held an armie at sea all that ••ime, and hath kep••pirats from doing any spoyles. If there hath been any worthie exploit performed, he ••••kes along discourse, where amongst other points he sets down, that the Generall hath in regard thereof been at great charge for the kings seruice. The Generall hauing this testimonie and certifia••, doth witnesse the like for the Captaines that haue been vnder his charge. They m••st also haue certificats fr•••• the Secretaries, and from such as haue charge of the Arcenall at the Indies, to be a testimonie that they haue not done any thing which might hinder or diminish their recompence. The Po••tu∣gals returne with these testimonies, hauing alreadie conceiued in their imaginations the [ C] offices which they affect. All officers returne also at the end of three yeares, and it is a great fauour, when as they doe grant to any one a continuation of his place for his sonne in law, who takes the office for the marriage of his wife. Then the letters are inrolled in the great Chancerie, and sent to the Indies to the end the Viceroy may confirme them. They obserue the same laws in Portugal.

[ XII] As for the pepper which they draw out of the Indies, they proceed after this manner. They do not lade any ship but the fiue which they that hire the king of Spains ships must haue re••die. If there be so great aboundance of merchandise, as th••se fiue ships will not containe all, then the farmers of pepper, and the kings officers require that they add some ships to the ordinarie number: the which the farm•••••• are forced to doe, so as there may [ D] be sufficient to carrie away the whole charge: the which if they refuse, then the Viceroy and the kings officers may lade at their pleasures as well the farmers pepper, as any other merchandise that remain••s; to the kings benefit, neither can the farmers of ships pre∣tend any thing: but this may onely be done when as the fiue ships haue their full lading. The farmers of pepper haue a factor in euerie ship, to whom the king giues a place, and entertainment during the voyage. The farme of pepper continues fiue yeres, and if there happen any misfortune at sea, the losse is theirs that fraught the ships; and so is all the charge of lading: and if the money chance to be lost, this losse falls to the farmers share. They are bound to deliuer the pepper vnto the king after the rate of twelue duckats for the Quintall; if it wants in quantitie, the losse is the farmers, and not the kings, who re∣ceiues [ E] the pepper into the Indian house, being drie and clean, with an assured gaine, and without any feare of losse. Finally, these farmers haue their rights and priuiledges so well confirmed, as they cannot be infringed.

There is not any other that may ••ell pepper vpon paine of death, and this law is rigo∣gorously obserued. They may not diminish the summe of money which is prepared for the buying of pepper, nor take any part of it, for what cause soeuer, be it neuer so necessa∣rie. There is no man may gi••e any hinderance when as they lade the ships with pepper, yea they lay aside the kings affaires at that time, and the Viceroy with the other captains at the Indies haue no other care, but giue them assistance when they demaund it. The [ F] Bhare of pepper is sold most commonly at the Indies for 28 Pagodes, and the Bhare con∣taines three Quintalls and a halfe of Portugal; so as a Quintall is worth twelue Xerafins Pardauues and foure Tangas, and the Quintall weighs one hundred twentie eight pounds. They giue a certaine quantitie of siluer to the king of Spaine, if the ships arriue

[ A] safely: besides, they are bound to transport, and seed the souldiers for nothing. In the end if any ship chance to be lost, the king looseth not any thing, but some money which they giue him for his right, and for that he hath not the pepper which he should haue at a certaine price. Hence it growes that they that haue the charge of matters concerning the sea, care not how few men of defence they put into these ships, whereas the kings of Portugal had a speciall care, for that all the pepper did belong to them.

¶ The Religion.

[ B] AT Goa they haue libertie of conscience, where there is to be seene among the Portu∣gals, [ XIII] Moores, I••wes, Armenians, Gusa••ates, Ba••janes, Bramins, and other Indians, which liue there after their owne manner, and according to their owne religion, but that they are not suffered to burne men dead or aliue, nor to celebrat their marriages, or to make shew of their deuilish superstitions: whereof the Bishop hath a speciall care, for feare of scandalizing the new Christians. But if any one after he hath bene baptised re∣turnes to Paganisme, he is put into the Inquisition, to be punished according to the In∣quisitors sentence. There are many Arabians, Persians, and Abyssins, which do partly fol∣low the Christian religion, and partly that of the Moores, who obserue the pernitious law of Mahomet. The Moores eat all things indifferently, except hogs flesh, and they are [ C] buried after the manner of the Iewes. Some among the Decanins, Gularates, and Ca∣narins abstaine from eating of beefe, or the flesh of Bugles. Many worship the Sunne and Moone, yet they acknowledge one onely God, creator of all things. Finally, there are many churches and monasteries at Goa, but there is not any one of religious women, for that there is no meanes to persuade the Indian women to chastitie. There is an Arch∣bishop, who hath vnder him all the Bishops of the East Indies, and there is also an In∣quisition as in Spaine.

¶ The auncient profession of Christianitie at the Indies.

[ D] SOme writ that saint Thomas the Apostle (after that this part was fallen to him in the di∣stribution of the world) transported himselfe first into the Island of Socotera, where [ XIIII] hauing made many Christians, he past to Cranganor, from thence to Colan, and so to Choromandel••. Hauing then planted the word of God in all these places, being mo∣ued with a fame of the greatnesse of China, he went thither to preach Iesus Christ. After that he had laboured there a while, he returned into the realm•• of Choromandel to re∣uisit the Neophites, and to confirme them in the faith. Malipur was then the chiefe towne in this countrie, which the Portugals at this day cal, Saint Thomas: who going about to build a Church (wherin king Sagam and the Idoll Priests did crosse him what they could) there fell out an accident which did much auaile to manifest the power of Christ and the [ E] truth of the gospell, to these Barbarians: The sea had cast a pe••ce of timber of extra∣ordinarie greatnesse vpon the shoa••e, which was then ten leagues from the towne; the king was very desirous to imploy this timber for his building, but he could neuer moue it, neither by the meanes of men and instruments, nor by the force of Elephants: they say that the Apostle made offer vnto the king, that if he would giue him that timber to build a church vnto the true God, he would draw it presently to the towne, without the helpe of man or engine: the which the king granted, and laughed at him. Saint Thomas hauing then tied his girdle to a little sprig which grew out of the bodie thereof after that he had made the signe of the crosse, he drew it without any difficultie within the walls, to the great amasement of all the people. Then hauing set vp a crosse of stone, hee [ F] foretold, That when the sea should come thither, they should see white men come from afar countrie, to plant the doctrine which he had preached. This prophesie was verified at the comming of the Portugals to the Indies; for that a little before, the sea had ap∣proached neere vnto this marke. The reputation of saint Thomas increased continually, with his miracles: whereat the Bramins being discontented, for that they saw their cre∣dits

〈◊〉〈◊〉 gaine to faile one of them seeking to ruine him, slew his owne sonne, and accu∣•••••••• [ A] the Apostle of this 〈◊〉〈◊〉. The Apostle being brought before the king to purge himselfe of this impu••••••••••, said, that there needed no other iustification, than the te∣stimonie of the dead; requiring, that it might be lawfull for him to question him: his ad∣uersarie could no•• refu••e it, and they all being amased at this proposition, and attending the successe, the dead child was brought into the kings presence: ••lint Thomas then tur∣ning himselfe vnto the bodie, said vnto him, That in the name of Christ, whom he prea∣ched for the God and Sauiour of the world, he should declare who was the author of his death: at the name of Christ, this bodie spake, and did witnesse, That saint Thomas 〈…〉〈…〉 of the true God, and that his father ••ad slaine him, for rage and enuy which he 〈…〉〈…〉 the Saint. The king who had some inclination to the law of Christ, [ B] 〈…〉〈…〉 seeing this miracle. But the Bramins (although conuicted of their 〈…〉〈…〉 the Apostles•• proc••edings, with the ruine of their Idols, ••e∣sol•••• 〈…〉〈…〉. There 〈…〉〈…〉 without the towne, whether saint Thomas after the 〈…〉〈…〉 of Christ did vse to retire himself•• to medi••ate and pray; in this place he first 〈…〉〈…〉 with a stone, and a wound with a dart; and in the end he was slaine with 〈…〉〈…〉 this bodie was taken vp by his disciples, and buried in a church, where they did also put a pe••ce of the launce which had pierced him, and a staffe with an iron which he vsed in his iournies to support him, and a vessell full of the earth where his bloud had fallen. Some hold that the miracle of the timber was not done at Malipur, but at Cran∣••onor, and that king S••gams successor put him to death at Calamine, and that his bodie [ C] was transported by the Christians to Edessa a towne in Mesopotamia. Notwithstanding, Iohn the third, king of Portugal, according to the common opinion, enioined Edward de Meneses his lieutenant at the Indies to do what he could possibly to find out the bodie of saint Thomas vpon the coast of Choromandel, and to haue a care that his holie relicks (which some hold are all in Mesopotamia) might be laid vp in some place to be kept, with reuerence: Meneses gaue this charge to Emanuell Fria, who went to Malipur with some Priests, and an Archi••e••••. There among ••he ruines of the ••owne, they found the markes of a stately church, where there was not any thing standing but a little chappel with ma∣ny crosses, printed within and without▪ 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the countrie said that the Apostles bo∣die was in that place; and there they found a stone ••••hereon was written in an old lan∣guage [ D] (as they learned of some that vnderstood it) that this church was built by saint Thomas, and that king Sagam had giuen the tenth•• of m••rchandise which came into his townes, for to entertaine it. They found vnder this stone (as they of the countrie assured) the kings bodie: but digging deeper, they ••ame vnto a place which was com∣passed in, first with a wall of earth, and then with st•••••• nine foot high, with diuers coue∣••ings, they said that the Apostles bodie was ••nder it Whereupon two Portugals (who confessed themselues and communicated before) opening this place, found certaine bones verie white mingled with lime and sand, a tron••hon of a launce, a trauellers staffe, and a vessell of e••rth▪ so as they knew by these markes that it was the bodie of the Apo∣stle: and the rather for that the bodie of king Sagam, and of another disciple of saint [ E] Thomas was neere vnto it▪ but these two were d••formed and fearefull, as the colour only did distinguish the Apostles bones from the rest. The Saints bodie was afterwards put into one sh••ine, and those of his two disciples into another, and the keies of the place 〈◊〉〈◊〉 brought vnto the Viceroy and deliuered into his hands. Two yeares after, the said 〈◊〉〈◊〉 were hidden by two Portugals vnder the Alter of the Chappell, and in the end 〈…〉〈…〉 transported vnto ••oa by a religious man of the order of saint Francis, whenas D•••• ••••••anti••e of Braganc•• was Viceroy at the Indies. There are at this day Christians at the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which are called of saint Thomas: it is ••rue that they haue diuers errors, be∣ing borne 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the heresie of Arr••••••, and partly in that of Nestorius. This mischiefe [ F] ••••ept in a••o••g•••• them, for that these poore people hauing great want of Priests and ••••••lats to instruct them and to administer the s••craments, after a long deliberation, they resolued to send forth so•••• among them to seeke some and to bring them to the Indies, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 soeuer they found them: these deputies after a long and painful iourney, came into

[ A] Assyria, where they intreated the Patriarke of Babylon to furnish them with what they desired. This Patriarke gaue them certaine Priests and Prelats, who went vnto the In∣dies, and in stead of the pure and true doctrine, did sow the cockle of diuers heresies, and these heresies haue continued vntill our time. Notwithstanding they retaine many of the Apostles traditions, they haue the Sacrament of the Altar in great veneration, and receiue it vnder both kinds. They keepe Aduent and Lent, sing Psalmes ordinarily, and celebra•• the Feast of Iesus Christ, and of his Saints, but especially the eight day after Easter. These people dwell at Cranganor and thereabouts, and they hold them to be about threescore and ten thousand. There are also a great number at Negapatan, and at [ B] Malipur: And moreouer, in the countrie of Angamala, fifteene miles aboue Cochin to∣wards the North. There remaines the Archbishop, who depends of the Patriarke of Ba∣bylon. They doe by little and little acknowledge the Catholicke religion by the means of Iesuits, who haue a Colledge at Vaypicota: for they confesse themselues vnto them, and they bring their children to be baptised, and their Priests learne to say Masse after the Roman manner. In the yeare 1583 the Archbishop held a Synod, whereas two Iesu∣its did assist, and made many decrees conformable to the Romish religion. In the yeare 1587 the king of Portugal built a Colledge at Malipur, with the helpe of the Chri∣stians of Saint Thomas, and a Seminarie for the instruction of youth. I haue set downe these miracles of Saint Thomas according to my Author, not as an autenticke authority, [ C] leauing euerie man at libertie to beleeue it if he please.

¶ The new profession of Christianitie at the Indies.

THe first which past vnto the Indies to preach the Gospell, were the religious of the order of S. Francis, whereof the first was Frier Henrie, since Bishop of Senta, who [ XV] went with the armie that was led by Peter Alua••o Capral, in the yeare 1500, with some Priests, but neither he, nor his companions could make any great profit of their tallents, by reason of the continuall wars. Afterwards there went Frier Anthonie Petroine, and soone after Frier Anthonie Laurere, who stayed at Socotera, and there did some good. Finally, Lopes Sequeyra Viceroy at the Indies built a Church at Goa vnder the name of [ D] S. Francis, and a Conuent for the religious men of that order: the which he did to the ••nd they might haue meanes to imploy themselues in those parts, for the seruice of God, and the conuersion of the Indians. So as from that time they made few enterprises ei∣ther of peace or war, where they did not assist. For Anthon••e Petroine was the first that sayd Mas••••, and preacht at Daman in Cambaia, and Frier Anthon••e Casal was at the suc∣cour of Di•• with D. Iohn de Castro, and there did his duetie. The first Bishop at the In∣dies was one Frier Fernandes of the order of S. Francis, who went in the time of Nugnez d' Acc••g••a; he in administring the Sacraments, preaching to the Portugals, and drawing the Gentiles to the faith, did execute the office of Bishop commendably, and it is cre∣dible [ E] that the faith was much aduanced at that time. But there was nothing which wri∣ters did lesse care for in those daies: for as they were few, so they busied themselues to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the deeds of armes, and the voyages of fleets. Fernandes had for his successour Iohn of Albuquerque of Castille, of the same order of S. Francis, who came vnto the Indies with D. ••••rzia of Norogno; and brought with him one Frier Vincent fit to teach the do∣ctrin•• o•• Christ; and Iames of Borba a Portugal, & a famous preacher. But vnto that time, there w•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 seene in the Portugals an ardent desire to aduance the Christian religi∣on at the 〈◊〉〈◊〉, than any effect of importance: for that the gouernours and captaines were bu•••••• in the building efforts and making of ships, to gather together souldiers for the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the sea, and to inuade the enemies countrie: and the religio••s of S. [] 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••••••ding that they had a good Conuent at Goa) were so busied day and 〈…〉〈…〉 ordinarie exercises, and to burie the dead, as they had little leasure to 〈…〉〈…〉 the Gentiles to conuert them. At that time when as Stephen de 〈…〉〈…〉 at the Indies, which was in the yeare 1540, some good men, 〈…〉〈…〉 Michaell Vaz, Vicar generall of the Indies, and Iames of Borbe with

••word Annia, instituted a Seminarie of yong men of diuers Nations, to the end they [ A] might by their meanes plant the faith of Christ in diuers parts; and they assigned vnto them the reuenews of their Idoll Temples, ruined by Michael Vaz: and they called this Seminarie, The Colledge of the holie faith, and afterwards of Saint Paule, by reason of a Church so named. They intended to bring vp in the Colledge a good number of yong men of all Nations and to in struct them in the doctrine of Christ, to the end they might be afterwards fit to preach, and to reduce their countriemen to the truth of the Gospell. At that time there was a goodly purchase made vnto the Church by chance. They call those people Paraues, which dwel ne••re vnto the Cape of Comorin, who are simple and of a good disposition, liuing for the most part of the fishing of pearle; so as the coast [ B] where they dwell (which is in length from the said Cape vnto the Island of Manar, about fiftie leagues, in which tract they doe number about fiue and twentie townes and villa∣ges) is called. The fishing. This people hauing beene ruined by the Mahometans, and being red••ced as well by this meanes as others, to ex••reame miserie, after a long 〈◊〉〈◊〉 being persuaded by one Iohn de la Croix, (who had been conuerted some yeres ••••fore and did trafficke in those parts) they resolued to send their chiefe men to Cochin, to demaund succours, promising to imbrace the Christian faith if they were releeued. Their deputies being come to Cochin, the better to assure the Portugals, they caused themselues to be presently paptised. The Portugals thought it not fit to contemne their demaund, nor their offer, so as hauing armed a good number of ships, they not onely [ C] chased the Mahometans out of that countrie, but also reduced the Paraues to a better condition, and made the fishing more profitable. There went certaine Priests in the same ships, who did catechise and in few daies baptise all the people. But those few Clergie men were not sufficient for the instruction of them that were catechised, and the confirmation of the conuerted. That which did also hinder them, was the commerce and conuersation they had with the Infidels, full of libertie and dissolution: so as it was easier to corrupt the old Christians than to helpe the new. King Iohn being aduertised hereof, spared neither cost nor paines to remedie it; and that which did incite him much thereunto, was, that he knew well he could not leuie the tenths of the countrie, nor the taxes, nor yet make war against the Gentiles, to maintaine and augment the glorie of God and the preaching of the Gospell, if the Gentiles opposed themselues in the begin∣ning. [ D] But the Kings forces were not answerable to his good desires, for to effect this dessigne he had need of a great number of men of good life, full of wisedome, learning, charitie▪ of great courage, and strong of bodie; and Portugal had not many such at that time: for their Preachers were for the most part strangers, and the Portugals which gaue themselues to learning transported themselues to Alcala, or Salamanca. The Vniuersi∣tie of Coimbra which he had erected, was yet new and brought forth nothing but bit∣ter fruits and the necessitie of the Indies was vrgent. The companie of the Iesuits began then to flourish, the king being aduertised thereof, he writ to D. Pedro Mascarogne, his Embassador at Rome with Paule the third, to obtaine of father Ignasius founder of that [ E] Societie, some of his Fathers. The Embassador demaunded them & he obtained but two, which were father Symon Rodrigues a Portugal, and Francis Xauier a Nauarrois, to whom there afterwards ioyned Paule of Camerin in Italie, and Francis Mansilla in Portugal. Of these, Rodriguez remained afterwards in Portugal, and Xauier went to the Indies. They parted from Rome in the yeare 1540. Being in Portugal, and the King infor∣••ed of the vertue of father Xavier he did him much honour, and hauing recommended 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him with great affection▪ the aduancement of Christian religion at the Indies, he 〈…〉〈…〉 a Briefe from the Pope▪ by the which he was made Nuncio to the holie See, with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 power at the Indies. He ar••iued at Goa the sixteenth of May, in the yere 1542, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 he was receiued with great honour by the Bishop and began presently [ F] to set hand to worke, instituting the Catechisme▪ He went euerie day throughout the streetes, and with a little bell gathered many people together to come to Church. There, both he and his companions taught the Christian religio••. He spent the winter 〈◊〉〈◊〉 this manner, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Camerin, had the charge of the colledge of saint Paul

[ A] where there were many young men. But the Father hauing heard speake of the late con∣uersion of the Paraues, went thither in the spring, leading with him Mansilla to instruct and confirme them, and to this end he learned their language with much paine. He was forced often to encounter the Bramins, who could not indure that he should take from them their, followers and their reputation, and discouer their vanities and deceipts. He staied no longer in any one place than was needfull: but he made choise of the Neo∣phi••es who had more vertue and better wits, and left them in his place to haue ca••e of the rest. Being come to the end of one prouince, he returned to the other, and demaun∣ded an account of those things which he had taught, especially of those whom he had [ B] made maisters of others, who are there called Canacapoles. He obtained for them a cer∣taine summe of money which the Indians were wont to giue for the queene Portugals buskins, to whom he did write that she could not ascend vp to Heauen with better bus∣kins than the praiers of the Neophites. He spent aboue a yeare to instruct and confirme the Paraues, at the same of whose conuersion the Macoes a neighbour people which belong vnto the realme of Trauancor, and dwell vpon the East of the Cape of Como∣rin sent messengers to the Father intreating him to go and baptise them, the which he did, and in one moneth conuerted aboue ten thousand to the faith: Whilest he was thus attentiue in the conuersion of the Macoes, they of Manar (which is an Island betwixt Caromandell and the last Cape of Zeilan) sent messengers vnto him to demaund bap∣tisme: [ C] he sent some vnto them, who did catechise them of Manar, whilest that he labored in the worke that he had begun: the which the king of Iafanapatan (whose subiects they were) vnderstanding, being full of wrath, he slew some, and tormented others cruelly: some which had escaped his hands came by, land to Goa (which was two hundred leagues) to demaund baptisme. Whilest that Father Xauier was busied in these good exercises, they sent vnto him to assist him Iohn Beyra of Ponteuedro, Nicholas Lancelot of V••bi••, and Anthonie Criminell of Parma, and in the yeare 1548, he had Gaspard Berze, and Anthonie Gome, with eight other companions, and at the same time there arriued at Goa twelue religious••men of the order of saint Dominicke, whereof Iames Bermude was the ••••ie••t, and there they built them a faire church in a short time, with a commodious [ D] cloiste••. Father Xauier hauing left the charge of the church of the Paraues to father An∣thonie Criminell he gaue him meanes to die gloriously; for the Bramins and the Ba∣dagues s••ew him.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 these accidents the king of Tanor caused himselfe to be baptised. Tanor is a towne some foure score leagues distant from Goa towards the South. This king being in∣formed of our faith, by father Vincent of the order of saint Francis and by Iohn Suares, who went often vnto him, in the end he caused himselfe to be baptised. The Queene and two great personages of the realme did the like soone after, but secretly, and the king himselfe, after his baptising, carried about his necke (for feare of sedition) the three strings, according to the custome of the Bramins of whose sect he had beene. Afterwards he had [ E] a d••sire (for the confirming of a stricter league with the Portugals) to come to Goa, where hee was receiued very magnificently: the Archbishop, the Viceroy, and many others persuaded him to leaue those markes of the Bramins, and to make open profes∣sion of Christianitie: but he alleadged the daunger of a reuolt of his subiects and bro∣ther ••••••••eating them that they would not aduise him to precipitate himselfe, adding that he did 〈◊〉〈◊〉 much affect religion and the glorie of Christ, as he would not let passe any oc∣casion to ••••crease it, but he must proceed therein wisely: he remained ten daies at Goa, during the which he was confirmed by the Archbish. The Portugals hauing not onely augmented but also setled their Empire at the Indies with a peace which followed: the [ F] na•••• of Christ was also much extended: they did ruine many temples of the Idols, 〈…〉〈…〉 they built stately churches. To allure the Gentills the more, they made 〈…〉〈…〉 that were baptised, and did procure them charges and offices, where 〈…〉〈…〉 honour and profit, exempting them from all impositions, and suffering 〈…〉〈…〉 and such like. It cannot be imagined how glad the new Christians 〈…〉〈…〉 king of Spaine did of late yeares make two of them commaunders of the

order of Christ. They haue built many houses for catachising, and eight Seminaries for [ A] ••he instruction of youth. But the faith did neuer increase so much at the Indies, as when Don Constantine of Bragance was Viceroy there, who imployed for the conuersion of Infidels not only the kings reuenues, but also his owne. He did assist himselfe at bap∣tismes, honored the baptised, and gaue them meanes, and to conclude, he shewed him∣selfe a father in all occasions to the Neophites. With this kind of proceeding he did not onely aduance religion, but did strengthen the Portugals commaund at the Indies. Du∣ring his gouernment; in the yeare 1557, the Iesuites alone baptised one thousand and eight hundred persons, and in the yere following somewhat more: but in the yere 1559, they baptised three thousand two hundred and sixtie, and in the yeare 1560, there were [ B] twelue twousand seuen hundred fortie and two baptised: so as these fathers, or they of the order of saint Domi••icke, and saint Francis, conuerted in a manner all the towne of Goa, which is of the bignesse of Genoa: so as the yeares following they did not bap∣tise so man••••▪ ye•• there hath searce past any yeare, but they haue baptised one thousand or more either within the towne or neere unto it. In the yeare 1587 (for that the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vpon the coast of Malabar being prest with hunger and extreame want, sold 〈◊〉〈◊〉 children, and set price of themselues) there were two good decrees made for the ••••••••ase of the faith: the one was that such as were put to sale, should not be bought but by Christians: and the other was, that such as had beene alreadie bought by the Gentils should be set at libertie if they became Christians. The conuersion of Gentils doth also [ C] aduance much at Basain, whereas the Iesuites haue permission from the king to take or∣phans, and to catechise them, and in the yeare 1581, the king did assigne two hundred and fiftie crownes rent for them that were catechised. The ordinarie number of them that are conuerted euery yeare at Basain, is about two hundred, and they do account as many at Colan, and a hundred at Zane; and some few lesse at Daman and at Chaul. Ban∣dor••, a land neere vnto Goa is alreadie wholie Christian, and so is the little Island of Co∣••••••. In the Island of Salsette, in the yeare ••583, they slew three Iesuites, for that they rui∣••••d their Idols and Idolatrie; 〈…〉〈…〉 yeare 1587, there were one thousand one hun∣dred and fortie persons, and afterwards foureteene whole villages conuerted. Vpon the coast called The fishing, there are about fortie thousand. Christians, and at Manar they do [ D] euerie yeare baptise about six or seuen hundred persons. Vpon the coast of Trauancor which is seuentie and fiue miles long, they can hardly entertaine the preaching of the word for the pouertie of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ and the crueltie of Pagan princes, and Mahome∣taines: yet 〈…〉〈…〉 about ten thousand Christians. At Cochin they haue not preuaded so well, for that the king both made an Euict, by the which his subiects which become Christ•••••• loose all their goods: yet there passeth no yeare but there are aboue one hundred conuerted.

The 〈…〉〈…〉 gethere, whereas they teach grammer, humane sciences, 〈…〉〈…〉 great number of schollers: as also at Chaul, whereas the worke of conuersion is in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hands of the religious of saint Francis, and also at Nagapatan. [ E] Finally, in the yeare 1587, and the yeare after, they did baptise in the hither part of the Indies, eight thousand persons: and in the yeare 1588, there were nine thousand cate∣chised, and fiue thousand baptised.

We haue 〈…〉〈…〉 such places of the Indies as were held by the Spaniards: ••et vs now passe to the new found world, and in passing let vs take view of some places and Islands subiect to the king of Spaine.

¶ 〈…〉〈…〉, Septa••or Seuta.

THe 〈…〉〈…〉 townes are in the realms of Fezin the countrie of Elabat. Arzilla is a [ E] reason 〈◊〉〈◊〉 towne, distant from the straight of Gibraltar about seuentie miles. Tanger is a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a ••ncient towne ••eared vpon the Ocean, and thirtie miles from the Straight of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Seuta is a verie great ••••vae at the mouth of the Straight, and ••••••••times the chief•• of all Maurita••ia. These three townes are subiect to the king of

[ A] Spaine, who hath also in this realme in the Prouince of Garet, two good townes, Me∣dele and Chesase.

[ B] ¶ The Island of Saint Helene.

THis Island carries the name, for the Spaniards discouered it on the one and twenti∣eth 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of May, being S. Helens day. It contains sixteene miles, and is halfe a degree 〈…〉〈…〉 all towards the Antartike Pole, and fiue hundred and fiftie leagues 〈…〉〈…〉 Cape of Good hope, and three hundred and fiftie leagues from Angola.

¶ The Qualitie of the Countrie.

THis Island is ••••••••ie; and the wood which growes the••e is not fit for any thing but for ••he, it is so burnt; which shews that there are vaines of fire in this Island. The soyle 〈◊〉〈◊〉, & in some places there is a substance of sulphure. Before the comming of the Por∣tugals, there were no beasts, neither did the trees beare any fruits, so as all that it could yeald was fresh water, which falls from the mountaines, and Howes aboundantly in the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 neere vnto the Chappell, & from thence it runs into the sea by torrents. The Spa∣nia••ds or Portugals water the••e, and was•• their linnen. They haue also by little & little brought all sorts of beasts, and haue planted fruit trees in the valleis, so as there is at this [ C] 〈…〉〈…〉 number. There is great store of fallow deere, goats, wild boares, partridges 〈…〉〈…〉 euerie man may hunt at pleasure: they may kill them easily with a staffe or a stone, there is such aboundance. There are figs of Portugal, pomegranets, oranges 〈…〉〈…〉 such aboundance as this Island seemes an earthly Paradise, and the trees doo•• 〈…〉〈…〉 beare continually, for that the raine doth water them euerie day six or 〈…〉〈…〉 followed by a warme Sun, so as this mixture makes the Island 〈…〉〈…〉 is also great store of fi••••▪ so as in a short space they may take 〈…〉〈…〉. The mariners drie this fi••••, which is of beter tast than any other. The 〈…〉〈…〉 are couered with ••alt, which suffiseth for their necessarie vses: so 〈…〉〈…〉 his Island was placed there to refresh the ships of Spaine.

[ D] 〈…〉〈…〉 vse to lea••e their sicke then in this Island, with rice, biscuit, oyle, and some 〈…〉〈…〉 and ••••esh they haue store; for when as the ships go away, 〈…〉〈…〉 retired into the rockes and mountaines returne into the valleys, 〈…〉〈…〉. The sicke men continue there vntill the next yeare, and then they 〈…〉〈…〉 ships that passe: for the most part they are soone cured, by reason 〈…〉〈…〉 of the ayre, which is alwaies constant in this Island.

〈…〉〈…〉 hath made an Edict, by the which they are forbidden to build and 〈…〉〈…〉, least this common vse thereof should be lost, for that it were to be feared that the inhabitants would make it priuat vnto themselues, and appropriat that 〈…〉〈…〉 and profitable to so many. Some yeares past there was an 〈…〉〈…〉 [ E] himselfe to haue a care of the Chappell, and to ••••ue there with more 〈…〉〈…〉 that they found that he killed goats, and made profit of their skins, he was carried backe into Portugal. Moreouer, two Negros of Mozambique, and a man of 〈…〉〈…〉 two slaues, hid themselues in the rockes and mountaines, being slipt from the 〈…〉〈…〉 men being multiplied to the number of twentie, spoyled the Island when as 〈…〉〈…〉 were gone, and did much hurt to the fruits, and whilest the ships were neere 〈…〉〈…〉, they kept themselues close in caues which they had in the rockes, and 〈…〉〈…〉 whereas the Portugals had neuer beene: When as the marriners had 〈…〉〈…〉 they sought to take them, but it was in vaine, by reason of their retreats 〈…〉〈…〉 to others. In the end, by the kings expresse commaundement, [ F] 〈…〉〈…〉 into Portugal: and since that time there hath not any 〈…〉〈…〉 the Island but sicke men, who make little cabbens vnder trees, like to 〈…〉〈…〉 of trees is great, and these lodgings make a shew like a towne. 〈…〉〈…〉 these sicke men 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to kill f••esh: euerie man goes a fishing, gathers fruits, 〈…〉〈…〉: And moreouer, they goe in procession singing hymnes.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 are the names of many grauen in the barkes of sigge trees, and these names doe [ A] 〈…〉〈…〉 grow exceeding great.

¶ The Island of S. Thomas.

THis 〈…〉〈…〉 that the Portugals discouered it on S. Thomas day; it is 〈…〉〈…〉 is of a round forme: it hath in Diameter for∣tie miles 〈…〉〈…〉 it was full of great trees whose branches gr••w 〈…〉〈…〉 the plague. The ayre is hot and sound, yet there are few Christian•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 liue to the age of fiftie yeares, and it is a wonder to see any one with a [ B] white 〈…〉〈…〉 the Negros and they that are borne in the countrie come vnto a hun∣dred and more. The daies and nights are equall. In March and September it raines con∣tinually, and in the other 〈◊〉〈◊〉 there fa••••s a thicke mist. In the middest of it there is 〈…〉〈…〉 a cloud, which doth so moisten the trees (whereof this 〈…〉〈…〉 of water, which doth refresh their fields of 〈…〉〈…〉 no wheat, vines, or any trees whose fruit hath hard stones: 〈…〉〈…〉 cucumbers, pompions, figges, ginger, and especially sugar: so as 〈…〉〈…〉 accustomed to lade fortie ships of sugar yearely in this Island, for the which they gaue in exchange wine, cheese, wheat, hides and other things necessarie: but this aboundance hath ceased, since that certaine wormes haue gotten into the roots of [ C] their sugarcanes: so as at this day, they doe not lade yearely aboue six ships with sugar. This Island doth also beare millet, rice, barley, lettice, cabbage, parsley, and all other kind of small hearbes. There grows also in this Island an ••earbe which the inhabitants call Ignaman, they hold it for excellent, to be of great vertue and necessarie for their liues; it is blacke on the out side, and white within, and is long like vnto a great turnup, and hath many braunches in the root: it hath the ta••t of a chestnut, but it is more deli∣cat and pleasing: they eat it most commonly rosted in the ••mbers, and sometimes raw. The Spaniards which dwell there 〈◊〉〈◊〉 transported oliue trees, peaches, almonds, and other trees which make a faire she•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 haue neuer carried any fruit. There are in this ••••land a kind of Cre••••ces, which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the earth like vnto moles, which turne vp the [ D] ground and eat eue••iething. There 〈◊〉〈◊〉 also found in this Island great store of partridges, black birds, starli••gs, and parr••t••. The sea about this Island is full of fish, and it is a won∣derfull thing to see the 〈…〉〈…〉 of whales which are towards the maine land. They that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 newly, are surprised with a feauer which continues verie dangerously for twentie daies, so as they draw bloud without reckoning the ounces. The inhabitants are some white, some blacke▪ and as for the blackes, they say they are wonderfully tor∣mented with fleas, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and punei••e••; whereas the white men haue not any one in their be••s.

The Portugals when they discouered this Island, found it desart: There is now a Co∣lonie, and they 〈…〉〈…〉 a towne which they call Paucasan, in which there are about [ E] seuen hundred 〈…〉〈…〉 the Bishop and Clergie men. It hath a verie good port, and a little riuer of excellent water.

¶ The Island of Madera.

THis Island is the Queene of all the Islands, in the Atlanticke Ocean. It is so called, for 〈…〉〈…〉 when it was discouered, which was in the yeare 1420, being before desart, it was 〈…〉〈…〉, the which were set on fire to make the land fit for tillage•• it is hillie as Si∣cile 〈…〉〈…〉 as they began to sow it▪ it did yeeld threescore for one: and for a time the 〈…〉〈…〉 did amount to three••core thousand Arrobes, euerie Arrobe being 25 [ E] pound 〈…〉〈…〉 ••unces a peece, but at this day it is no•• halfe so much. The middle of this Island 〈…〉〈…〉 degree of Northerly latitude, and three degrees and a halfe of lon∣••••ude. This 〈…〉〈…〉 good store of Come and excellent wines, and in like sort 〈◊〉〈◊〉 good fruits, 〈…〉〈…〉 of ho••e and war, but their suga•• i•• most esteemed, and

[ A] transported into other countries: there is great store of cattell, and the mountaines are full of wild boares: this Island wants no wild peacocks, stockedoues, quailes, and other birds: there are excellent fountaines of water, and eight riuers: the aire is hot and tem∣perat, and neuer very cold: the Cedats grow very high there, whereof they make ta∣bles, chest••, and such like: the Archbishop (Primat of the Indies) remaines in this Island in the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Funciall, which is the chiefe.

[ B] THE ISLANDS OF THE ASO∣RES OR TERCERES.

The Contents.

[ C] THe beginning of the word Asores, and why these Islands were so called. II. Description of the Tercere, and other Islands of the Asores. The chiefe townes and boroughes. III. Singularities of the fruit which they call Batates, and of a plant whose roote serues in steed of feathers to fill their beds: Of Wo••d, Canarie birds, of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of hot waters, wherein they may seeth eggs. A fountaine which turnes wood into stone 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of an incredible beautie called Teixo, which no man may vse by the king of Spaines Edi••t 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Diseases peculiar to the countrie. V. Whereunto the Inhabitants of these Islands 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and their manner of keeping wheat, which corrupts in a yeare. VI. Forts of the Islands of Ter••er•• kept by Spaniards. VII. Angra the chiefe towne of all the Islands whereas the gouer∣•••••••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉, who forbids strangers to go about the Island, or to view their approaches.

[ D] THey do number seuen Islands of the Asores, or Flamands, that is to [ I] say, the Tercere, saint Michaell, saint Marie, saint George, Gracio∣sa, Pico, and Fayall. Flores and Corues are not comprehended vn∣der the name of Asores, notwithstanding that at this day the nine Islands are put vnder one gouernment. They were called Asores, of the multitude of goshaukes that were found there in the beginning, for that Açor in Spaine signifies a goshauke: but at this day there are not any of them to be found. They haue also beene called the Flemish Islands, for that the Flemings dwelt first in the Island of Fayall, where there are yet some families [ E] whose 〈◊〉〈◊〉 resemble Flemings in their haire and complexion, and they call a Torrent 〈…〉〈…〉 well Ribera dos Framengos, that is to say, the riuer of Flemings.

The chiefe of all these Islands is the Tercere, called commonly the Island of Iesus [ II] Christ of Tercere: it containes about fifteene or sixteene miles, and hath not any Port 〈…〉〈…〉 to defend the ships: yet the sea bending like a halfe Moone before the towne of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 makes a kind of Port, and hereof comes the name of the towne, for that the 〈…〉〈…〉 ••all this forme of the Moone Angra. Of the one side whereas it stretcheth out like 〈…〉〈…〉 there are two mountaines called Bresijl, which aduance into the sea in such 〈…〉〈…〉 off they seeme separated from the Island. Moreouer they are so high as they [ F] 〈…〉〈…〉 fifteen miles when as the skie is cleere. There are two Pillars of stone, from 〈…〉〈…〉 is in guard, giues notice of the comming of ships; for he markes those 〈…〉〈…〉 from the West and South, that is to say, from both the Indies, from Bresil, 〈…〉〈…〉 and Cape Verd, by the pillar vpon the West side, setting vp certaine flags, 〈…〉〈…〉 aboue fiue in number, he lets them know it, by their principall flag, and a 〈…〉〈…〉 sounds: from the pillar of the East side they discouer the ships which

〈…〉〈…〉 Portugall, and other places of the East or North, by meanes of the flags [ A] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 he sets vp, the which are seene throughout all the towne by reason of the height of these pillars. The chiefe ••••wne of this Island i•• Angra, which is also the chiefe of the Island of Acores: ••hree mil•••• from thence is the towne of Praye, which is to say, the downe vpon the shore, it hath ••ood wall••, but it is not well peopled. The Tercere hath also the B••roughs of saint Sebastian, saint Barba, Altares, Gualue, Vil••••noua, and others. The Island of saint Michael is almost twentie miles long, and hath many boroughs and hamlets: the chiefe towne of this Island is called Punta del Gada: there is not any port 〈…〉〈…〉 ••angerous, than about the Tercere: but the ships haue 〈…〉〈…〉 to hinder them at the comming of any storme, to [ B] put to 〈…〉〈…〉 the danger, the which is not allowed at the Tercere; for which 〈…〉〈…〉 stri••s 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••o••monly go to ••aint Michael. The Island of saint Mary hath 〈…〉〈…〉 is inhabited by Spaniards. Gratiosa containes about fiue or six miles: they 〈…〉〈…〉 which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 there. The Island of saint George is twelue miles 〈…〉〈…〉 broad. The Island of Fayal containes seuenteene or 〈…〉〈…〉 of greatest note next to the Tercere and saint Michaell. The Island of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 containes seuen miles: about 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from then••e lies the little Island of Coruo, the which is two or three miles in circuit. The Tercere is in the nine and thirtieth degree of height, and lies from Lisbone Westward two hundred and fiftie Spanish leagues.

¶ The Qualitie of the Islands. [ C]

ALl the Island of Terce••e beares store of wheat and wine; but their wines cannot be transported far, by reason of their weakenesse, for which cause, rich men vse Made∣ra, and Ca••••rie wines: the Island hath fish, flesh, and other things necessarie to suffice. They 〈◊〉〈◊〉 o••ely oyle that comes from Portugal▪ and it also wants salt, pots, dishes, and 〈…〉〈…〉 ve••sell, and such like; i•• beare•• aboundance of peaches, of diuers sorts, but there 〈…〉〈…〉 cherries, 〈…〉〈…〉. There is reasonable good store of apples, ••eares, oranges, 〈…〉〈…〉 f••uit, and the ground doth heare cabbages, tur∣••ups, [ III] and all kindes of hearbe•• in their season. The chiefe fruit of this Island grows vn∣dergro••••d [ D] like 〈…〉〈…〉 of this plan•• are in forme like a vine, but their l••••ues 〈…〉〈…〉 they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••ese fruits Batates, which are of a pound weight, and 〈…〉〈…〉 price•• it i•• 〈…〉〈…〉 food the people haue: they are much more estee∣med in 〈…〉〈…〉 doth hinder the estimation there. There is ano∣ther kind of 〈…〉〈…〉 vnto wheat, which grows round in some, almost like vnto a pease, they 〈…〉〈…〉 this fruit hath a pleasing tast, but the skin is harder than that of a pease▪ they 〈…〉〈…〉 e••••eeme it in other countries, but in the Island they ca••t it to their hog••. They 〈…〉〈…〉 find in the same Island a plant of the height of a man, which beares 〈…〉〈…〉 do••h it yeeld them any profit, but that the root being ten∣der and 〈…〉〈…〉 by the inhabitants, wherewith they fill their mat∣teresses [ E] and 〈◊〉〈◊〉, ••••stead of feathers and wooll. The Island hath not many foules in it that m••k•• their prey. There are many of those, which they call Canarie birds, so as many bu••i•• ••h••mselues to take them to sell. There are many quailes, with store of cockes and hens of Af••i••ke. In Sommer they take much fish, but in winter the Sea will not suf∣•••••• them: for in Ianuarie, Februarie, March, and Aprill, yea and in September they are neuer in a manne•• without stormes. The countrie is hillie, and there are rocks 〈◊〉〈◊〉 my sides, the which sticke vp like pointed Dyamonds, able to cut the soles of any 〈…〉〈…〉 shall passe ouer them: but yet these rockes are full of vines, with whose 〈…〉〈…〉 all couered in Som••••r▪ 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a•• it is a wonder to see this plant take root there. 〈…〉〈…〉 no vines in the Cha••pian countrie: but the plaine countrie abounds [ E] with 〈…〉〈…〉 ••oad, especially neere vnto the towne of Praye. But it is an ordina∣rie thing, 〈…〉〈…〉 wonderfull, that wheat, and other fruits of this Island, should not continue good 〈…〉〈…〉. This Island is verie subiect to earthquakes, and to the brea∣••••i••g ou•• of fire: and 〈…〉〈…〉 Island, and also in that of S. Michaell, there are places from

[ A] which there ascend fuming vapors continually, and the ground is all burnt there. There are fountaines to be seen in which the•• may boyle an egge, as if it were on the fire. Three miles from the towne of Angra there is a fountaine, which in time doth turne the wood which is 〈◊〉〈◊〉 i••, into storie. The Island of Tercere hath such store of Cedars, as they vse 〈…〉〈…〉 ships, and also for their ••••ing. There is another kind of wood, which they 〈…〉〈…〉, which is of the colour of ••••oud, and verie beautifull. There is also ano∣th•••• 〈…〉〈…〉 wood, which is white and yellow, whose colours are verie liuely. In the 〈…〉〈…〉, there grows a tree called Tri••o, which is of such greatnesse as the people ar•• ••orbidden by the king of Spaines Edict to touch i••; the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is onely allowed to [] the king of Spaines officers: it is exceeding hard, red within, wa••ed▪ and of an admirable beautie, the which doth increase with time.

The ayre is generally good, and there are verie few disease•• pecu••iar to the ••ou••trie, [ IIII] amongst the which is that which the Portugals call 〈…〉〈…〉 which makes a man weake and benui••med of all his bodie, or of some one of his members. The•••• is also another dis∣ease which the Portugals call the bloud, the which doth cause certaine apostumes of bloud to breake forth about the eyes, or else in some other part of the bodie. These are the two chiefe inconueniences, which proceed from the stormes, humiditie of places, and the great windes, the whi•••• are such, a•• in time they blead downe the stones of houses, and consume yron: for there hath beene seene barres of yron as big as a mans arme, in the [ C] house where the kings treasure lies, the which in six yeares grew as little as a straw, and the verie walls were eaten and consumed to nothing in the same time. Wherefore, they are all in a manner accustomed, to put in the forefro••t of their houses certaine stones which they gather vpon the shore from vnder the water: these last longer against the violence of the winds. The Island of Gratiosa hath store of diuers fruits, whereof they send much to Tercere. The Island of S. George hath many forrests and mountaines, and some 〈◊〉〈◊〉 woad; there are also many Cedars. The Island of Fayal yeelds all things ne∣cessarie for the life of man, it abounds in fish and cattell, which it sends to the Tercere. The Island of Pico hath store of all sorts of fruit, and many Cedar trees, and Teixo which i•• so much esteemed. There is store of cattell, wine sufficient, and excellent fruits, among [ D] which, there are Oranges whose tast is exceeding pleasant. The Island of Flores hath much ca••tell, and verie good places to feed them.

¶ The Manners.

THe ••••••••••itans of Tercere are either Portugals, which liue after the manner of their [ V] cou••••••••e 〈◊〉〈◊〉 borne in the Island, which follow the manners of the Portugals and Spaniards which rule ouer them. They are not giuen to hunting, for that the countrie hath no•• any beasts, but some few conies. The first inhabitants of the Island of Fayal were Flemings, so as they retaine something of the humor of the Flemish Nation, whom [] they doe affect aboue all others. The inhabitants of the Tercere are laborious, and gi∣ue•• to ma••ure the ground; so as they make vines to grow vpon the rocks, which seeme nothing fit for that vse. They are accustomed, for the preseruing of their corn, (which cor∣rupts within the yere) to hide it vnder the ground for the space of foure of fiue moneths. All the inhabitants, of the towne of Praye especially, haue a great round hole in a certain 〈…〉〈…〉 which a man may enter, and vpon the top of it there is a couering with the 〈…〉〈…〉 Maister: Euerie man puts his wheat into this hole after haruest, which is in Iulie, an•• ••••aues it so couered vntill Christmas: then the inhabitants take it forth sound and vn••••••••••pted, yet some draw it forth but as they spend it, and leaue the rest: hauing beene thus kept in these holes or wells during the said time, the rest of the yere they pre∣serue [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 coffers, hauing no need of stirring. They are accustomed to giue a name to 〈…〉〈…〉 ••hich is taught to know when his maister calls him. There are many artizans 〈…〉〈…〉 themselues to make many prettie toyes of wood; but they work not so neatly 〈…〉〈…〉 in Germanie. The labourers of Tercere imploy themselues 〈…〉〈…〉 of woad. They of Sancte Maria are giuen much to make earthen vessell.

¶ The Rich••••▪ [ A]

THe English, Scot••ish and French▪ ••ra••••••cke much for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the Isl••••d of Tercere, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for, th•• which 〈…〉〈…〉▪ T••e inhabitants doe also make some••••oney 〈…〉〈…〉 ••r••at numbers, which other pro∣uin•••••• 〈…〉〈…〉 this countrie which 〈…〉〈…〉 an•• other i•• Europe o•• ••he inhabi∣tants 〈…〉〈…〉 Ioyners 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and other woodden 〈…〉〈…〉 West Indies bu•• as they passe to sell it [ B] afterwards in Spa••ne.

[ IIII] 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••ituation to receiu••all the rich ••••eets that come from 〈…〉〈…〉 of that th••y like, leauing there also some of 〈…〉〈…〉 b•• which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 they make this Island rich, like 〈…〉〈…〉 o•• that which is good. The Englishmen 〈…〉〈…〉 to liue in tho••e seas, and to spoyle all ships that bent their 〈…〉〈…〉 so as many did a••oid these Islands▪ fearing to meet with 〈…〉〈…〉 great hinderance of the Isla••der•• and ship••. The Island of Fayal is common∣•••• ••••equen••ed by English mercha••ts, who trafficke there yerely for woad. The inhabi∣••ants of Flores and Co••o are poore by reason of pirats which annoy them, and spoyle [ C] them daily lying betwixt these two Islands.

¶ The Forces of the Islands.

[ VI] THe Island of Tercere is strong of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 selfe, by reason of the rockes which do inuiton 〈…〉〈…〉 sides▪ like vnto a wall▪ a••d at the ••nd of these rockes is a good Fort. The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Angra is compassed 〈…〉〈…〉 a reasonable good wall. At the foot of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Bresil, there is 〈…〉〈…〉 doth aunswere dia••••trally vnto another, for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••fence of the h••rb••r, so 〈…〉〈…〉 can come in or go 〈◊〉〈◊〉 without the permissi∣••nd these 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Th•• king 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••aine doth commonly entertaine fourteene compa∣nies [ D] in the Island of Tercere. In former times there were none but Portugals for the guard of these Islands: but since the last troubles of Portugal, they haue put a garrison of Spaniards into the Tercere, with a gouernor of the same Nation. This garrison re∣maines continually in the Castles or Forts, and do no displeasure vnto the Portugals, for 〈…〉〈…〉 the ••ou••d 〈…〉〈…〉 ••orbid 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to go abroad, a••d therefore a man may go throughout the Island with great ••••fetie. There is a companie of Spa••i••••d•• in garrison at Punta del Gada. In the Island of Saint Marie, there is not any garrison; for that being enuironed with••rockes, it may be easily kept by the Inhabitants. The Island of Gratiosa is also with∣out souldiers, for that it is not able to beare the charge of a garrison. In the towne of Dortain the Island of ••••yall, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is a Fort, bu•• not very good, and for that the Inhabi∣tants [ E] did once complaine of the great charge of the garrison, and of the trouble they had by it, promising to guards themselues, the king of Spaine retired his souldiers. But the Earle of Cumberland an English Nobleman, comming thither with a fleet, after some little resistance, and a debate which fell among the Islanders, tooke the Island, ruined the Castle, and carried away the Artillerie, with some Carauells; so as the king of Spaine 〈◊〉〈◊〉 forced to send souldiers againe thither in garrison, after that he had punished the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 authors of all this mischiefe.

¶ The Gouernement. [ F]

[ VII] THe 〈…〉〈…〉 of all the Islands is Angra, whereas the Gouernour makes his resi∣dence, 〈…〉〈…〉 there is a seat of justice, which hath authoritie ouer all the rest. All strangers are forbidden to go about the Island, or to view the approaches: The Por∣••••••••ls Edicts doe expressly forbid i••▪ and in former times there was a certaine street ap∣pointed

[ A] in the towne of Angra, for merchant strangers where they should sell their mer∣chandise, and out of which they might not go, but when they were readie to depart: but at this day they haue more libertie, so as they may walke vp and downe the towne, and into the fields, but they may not go about the Island.

¶ The Religion.

THe Inhabitants of these Islands are Romanists, and nothing giuen to the reformed religion, nor infected with Mahometisme. There is a Cathedral Church in the town [ B] of Angra, whereas the Archbishop makes his aboad.

A generall consideration of the Islands described, and places which the Spaniards hold in Africke, Asia, and at the Indies. Of the profit, riches, and forces of these Estates. Of the Islands of Philippines. Of Princes which are friends and Tributaries to the king of Spaine, and neighbours to this countrie, and of his great enemies which pretend.

FIrst the Islands of Açores are so important for the crowne of Spaine, in regard of their [ C] scituation, as without them the nauigation of Aethiopia, the Indies, Brasil, and the new world, could not be continued: for that the fleets which come from the said countries to ••euille or Lisbonne, must in a manner of force touch there, that is to say, those of the West to follow their course, and those of the East to recouer those windes which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••ourable vnto them. After this (besides Seuta and Tanger, which the king of Spaine 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vpon the Straight of Gibraltar, and Mazagan without the Straight) he hath 〈…〉〈…〉 ••oas•• Africke, from Cape d'Aguerro vnto Gardasou two ••orts of Estates: for that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 are immediatly vnder him, and others are in the power of his Allies. Hee 〈…〉〈…〉 him the Islands of Madera, Porto Sancto, Cape Verd, the Canaries, Aeguin, Saint Thomas, and others neere adiacent: these Islands maintaine themselues with their [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••uall•• and prouisions, whereof they send some into Europe, especially sugars 〈…〉〈…〉, whereof the Island of Madera doth chiefely abound, and also of wine: and the Island of saint Thomas doth also impart great store of sugars vnto other coun∣••rie••▪ 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Estates haue beene much troubled by men of war, both English and Dutch, 〈…〉〈…〉 ••ost part haue not passed the Island of Cape Verd. The Portugals haue two 〈…〉〈…〉 I••lands of Arquin, and of Saint George de la Mine, and two places like 〈…〉〈…〉 they traffick with the neighbour nations of Guinee and Libia, 〈…〉〈…〉 Mandinque and other neere places. Among the princes his Allies, the 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••werfull is the king of Congo, who doth possesse the most temperat, and 〈…〉〈…〉 realme in Aethiopia. The Portugals haue two colonies there, the one in the [] 〈…〉〈…〉 Sauiour, and the other in the Island of Loande. They draw great riches 〈…〉〈…〉 thi•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ but the chiefest is that of fiue thousand slaues which they haue 〈…〉〈…〉 sen•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to the Islands and the New World: they are bound to pay a certaine 〈…〉〈…〉 ••o••ey to the king of Spaine, for euerie slaue that goes forth. They may passe 〈…〉〈…〉 realme, to that of Prester Ian, for that they hold it not to be far off: and it 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••ephants, and of all sorts of victualls and other necessaries, as it were verie 〈…〉〈…〉 for this enterprise. Congo confi••es with Angola; with whose king, Paul 〈…〉〈…〉 contend touching certaine mines of siluer.

〈…〉〈…〉 had as much esteemed things that were neere them, as they did those 〈…〉〈…〉, and had imploied their forces, with the which, hauing passed the Cape of 〈…〉〈…〉 they arriued at the Indies at Malacca and at the Moluccos; if I say they had 〈…〉〈…〉 them to the enterprise of Africke they might with more ease, and lesse charge 〈…〉〈…〉 treasures: for that there is no countrie in the world richer of gold and 〈…〉〈…〉 realme•• of Mandique, Aethiopia, Congo, Angola, Butuë, of Toros, 〈…〉〈…〉, Monomotapa, Caphati, and Monoemugi: but the couetousnesse

of man esteemes another mans more than his owne, and things afar off seeme better [ A] than those which are neere. The Portugals haue, betwixt the Cape of Good Hope, and ••••rdafou, the forts of Cefala and Mozambique; with the one they maintaine them∣selues masters of the trafficke of the countries thereabouts, which abound with gold and Iuorie; and with the other they make their nauigation to the Indies easie, for that their armies in passing doe some times winte•• these, and sometimes but refresh themselues. They haue on this side the king of Melinda for their great friend, and them of Quiloa and their neighbour Islands for their tributaries. To conclude, the Portugals want no∣thing but 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ for besides the other Islands, which remain al••ost abandoned, they leaue that of Saint Laurence, which is one of the greatest in the world, or it may be the grea∣test [ B] (for that it is one thousand and two hundred miles long, and foure hundred and eigh∣tie broad) in a manner vnmanured, the which is fit to beare any thing, for the goodnesse of the ••oil••▪ and nature hath giuen it good riuers, good pores, and verie co••modious 〈◊〉〈◊〉. These estats of the crowne of Portugal, haue no cause to dread any thing but ar∣mi•••• 〈…〉〈…〉, which cannot come but from the Turke: but the continuall going and com∣••i••g of the i••••leets assure them; for in the yeare 1••89, they tooke neere vnto Monbazze foure galleis and a galion of Turkes which had come into those parts.

As for the Estates of Asia, they are diuided into them of Persia, Cambaia and the Indies. The Portugals haue in Persia the realme of Ormuz, and in Cambaia the Islands of Diu, of Daman, and Bazain. At the Indies they hold Chaul, the Island of Goa, with others [ C] that lie about i••▪ the sorts of Co••hin and Colari, the Island of Ma••••r, and the Port of Colomban in the Island of Zeilan; but the principall is Goa▪ whereas the Viceroy re∣maines, with the forces of the Indies. Ormuz and Diu ••re ••••ch esteemed for the com∣maund of the sea, and the trafficke of the gulphes of Persia and Ga••baia Cochin and Colari are commended for the aboundance of ••epper which they lade there: Manar for the fishing of pearles which they vse in that sea. Daman and Bazain for the bountie of the neighbour countries▪ by reason where of Iohn the third, king of Portugal assigned this countrie to old souldiers. G••a is of very great importance for the commoditie of the ••••ituation, together with the fertilitie of the soile. The king of Spaine hath here also some Princes his friends, and some others that are his tributaries. The first and the richest [ D] is he of Co••hi••▪ at the first he wa•• vass••ll to the king of Callicut, and was of n•• great power: but now by the friendship and trafficke of the Portugals, he hath gotten so great rich••s and is of such force as the neighbour kings doe enuie him. The king of Colan is also a friend to the king of Spaine, who hath ••or••s of importance in both these realmes. There is also the realme of Mallacca, which extends two hundred and seuentie miles, but it is not well peopled: notwithstanding the towne which is so called vnites all their traf∣ficke, yea in a manner all the voiages▪ which are made in that great sea, from the mouthes of the red sea vnto the Cape of Liampo; and hither comes all the riches of the firme land, and of many Islands, all which together do not yeeld in greatnesse to Europe. Mal∣lacca hath two mightie enemies, the kings of Yo•• and Achen, wherof the first is mightie [ E] by land, and the second by sea: it hath beene twice besieged, and brought to great extre∣mitie: but with the succours that came vnto it from the Indies it was alwaies relieued, with great losse vnto the enemies. Last of all Paul de Lima defeated the king of Yor, and took from him a sort which he had made neere vnto Mallacca, where among other things he found nine hundred peeces of brasse ordnance: yet this Estate is in great danger for that the king of A••hen is so powerfull, whose only desire is to ruine it.

As for the Philippines they belong vnto new Spaine, not that they are comprehen∣ded within the co••fines of the New world; but for that they were discouered in the yeare 156•• by Michael Lopes of Legaspe, who was sent to discouer them by Don Lewis of Velasco Vi••eroy of New Spaine. Some thinke that in this sea (which extends it selfe [ F] betweene New Spaine and Sumatra) there are one thousand and one hundred Islands as well great as small▪ and although the Spaniards comprehend them all vnder the name of Philippines, yet this name agrees more properly to them that lie most Northerly: Of these they haue alreadie conquered about fortie with a million of Inhabitants. These

[ A] Islands abound generally with gold, victualls, and synamon, whereof they carrie a great quantitie into new Spaine, and so into Spaine it selfe. The king of Spaine hath caused bulls, kine, horses and mares, to be carried thither for to multiplie. The number of Spa∣niards which haue conquered, and which defend these countries amount at this day to one thousand six hundred, and of these there are not aboue nine hundred souldiers. These estates are of greater importance than is thought; for that besides the aboundance of victualls and gold which they find there, the scituation is verie fit to subdue the neigh∣bour Islands, and to bring in a trafficke betwixt them of this sea and of new Spaine, and to make easie the commerce betwixt China and Mexico, all which are of great impor∣tance. [ B] But that which imports more is, that they haue begun on this side to curbe the Mahometans, who sought by little and little to make themselues maisters of the Islands and of the coast of Asia. This enterprise is more easie for the Spaniards by new Spaine, and by Perou, than for the Arabians by their countries; for that (besides that the first are the stronger) there haue been ships which in two moneths haue come from Peru to the Philippines, (the distance from Acapulco and Salisco is lesse) whereas a ship cannot come from Arabia in halfe a yere: not only for that the first is neerer than the later; but also, for that the generall winds doe much more fauor the nauigation of the Spaniards than of the Moores; for that the one goe by a direct line, and the other by an oblique. Moreouer, the first goe the voyage at one time, and the others make many voyages; for [ C] that at the Cape of Comorin they find the sommer changed into winter, & the like doth in a manner happen vnto them at Malacca, where they are forced to stay. Moreouer, the Spaniards faile alwaies with a forewind, and in a calme sea, but the Arabians enter into a sea where for the great number of Islands they find a thousand dangerous currents, and diuers winds which surprise them, and moreouer, many pirats which incounter them. We must add hereunto, that the Portugals and Spaniards being vnited at this day, will ma••e a great resistance in those countries; and therefore the Chinois stand vpon their guard, and feare the neighbourhood and forces of Christians.

The force of the Spaniard in these estates consists in two things, the one is, the strong scituation of places, the other, the number and bountie of armies: For as for scituations, the Portugals knowing that they could not for their small number imbrace any enterpri∣ses [ D] of importance within a countrie, nor resist the power of the Persians, Guzarates, of the princes of Decan, Narsingue and others, were carefull to possesse themselues of such places as they thought fittest, to make themselues maisters of the sea and trafficke, for that few men might make defence there against great armies. And for that they are mai∣sters of the ports and seas, they haue meanes to draw together so great forces by sea, as there is not any one able to oppose himselfe: and their ships are such, and so well furni∣shed, as one of theirs will not dread three or foure enemies; and all that they may feare is the furie of the Hollanders, if they breake againe with them. And to make it in some sort appeare what they may doe at the Indies, Francis of Almeyda with one and twentie [ E] ships or few more did put to rout the Mamelus, neighbours to Diu▪ Alphonso of Albu∣querque assailed Callicut with an armie of thirtie great ships, he tooke Goa with one and twentie, recouered it with foure and twentie, and tooke Malacca with three and twen∣tie ships; he entred into the red sea with twentie, and recouered Ormuz with two and twentie. Nugno of Acugna went to the enterprise of Diu with three hundred saile, where there were three thousand Portugals, and fiue thousand Indians, besides seruants that were armed, of which they were accustomed to haue great numbers. D. Constantine of Bragance had at the enterprise of Onor one hundred and sixtie saile, and as many at that of Ionesapatan.

Besides the Princes which are freinds and tributaries to the king of Spaine, he hath [ F] verie mightie enemies neere vnto these estates. The Sophi of Persia pretends vpon Or∣muz, which was sometimes one of his vassals; the king of Cambaia vpon Diu, which did belong vnto him, and to other lands which (as we haue said) were his: the Nizzama∣l•••• and the Idalcan (the Portugals doe thus terme two mightie Princes of the realme of D••••an) and the kings of Callicut and Narsingue. But the king of Persia and he of Nar∣singue

haue neuer attempted any thing against the Portugals, for that they haue had al∣waies [ A] to doe with greater enemies. The others had made great attemps to recouer Diu, Chaul, Goa, and other places, but they could not preuaile in any other enterprise of importance; for that the scituations of places are wonderfull commodious to receiue succours by sea: and although that these enemies haue made their enterprises in winter to hinder their succours, yet their pollicie hath preuailed nothing, for that the Portugals were so couragious, and their ships so good as they feared no daunger: so as the besie∣ged and their countriemen striuing, the one to vanquish with patience, and the other to endure all the daungers of wind and sea to succour them, they haue made their enemies attempts frustrat. But the Spaniards haue none so great an enemie as the Turke, who [ B] hath often attempted by the red sea, with the commoditie which the towne of Aden giues him, to chase them out of the Indies, being inuited thereunto, sometimes by the king of Cambaia, and sometimes by his owne ambition. The greatest armie which he hath made was of sixtie foure vessells, which he sent to Diu, but it was shamefully put to flight, and another of seuen and twentie great ships which he sent to the enterprise of Ormuz: They haue no other thing in the Island of Zeiland, but a fort called Colombo, for that the king, who was their tributarie, was dispossest of his realme by a Moore cal∣led Singa Pandar, and now he maintaines himselfe with the aid which the Portugals giue him. [ C] [ D] [ E] [ F]

[ A] THE NEW WORLD.

[ B] The Contents.

1 TWo notable difficulties which haue hindred the Ancients to discouer the New world, and which of the two were greatest: and the reasons which made the An∣cients beleeue that there were but three pares of the world, Asia, Africke, and Eu∣rope. II. The sea compasse inuented by a Neapolitan for the vse of Nauigation, in the yeare 1300. III. Qualities and description of the burning Zone. IIII. A com∣parison of the New World (taking as it was discouered) with ours; and the difference of our He∣misphere [ C] to that of the New World: and the aduantages it hath ouer ours. V. Whence the In∣habitants of this New World came, and their foolish opinion touching their beginning. VI. Di∣uision of these New Lands into two parts, America, and Magellanica, and their description. VII. Description of the places and countries which the king of Spaine holds at the New world, and first of the Fortes of Saint Hellene, and three others in Florida. VIII. Of the Gulph of Mexico. IX. Noua Hispania. X. New Gallicia. XI. Th•• Prouinces of Mecouacan and Mexico. XII. Gasteena. XIII. Iucatan. XIIII. Guatimala. XV. The firme Land. XVI. Nicaragua. XVII. Golden Castille. XVIII. The New kingdome of Grenado. XIX. Bresil. XX. Chile. XXI. Peru, with the chiefe townes and prouinces. XXII. The towne of Saint Croix du Mont. XXIII. Tucuma, a realme whereas the Spaniard hath fiue [ D] Collonies. XXIIII. Paraguays. XXV. Hispaniola. XXVI. Cuba or Ferdinand. XXVII. Iamaica. XXVIII. The Islands of Canibals or Caribes. XXIX. Discourse in generall of the New World: of the forces and gouernment as well ciuile as ecclesiasticall. XXX. Of the knowledge which these people had of God. XXXI. Of their idolatrie to the dead. XXXII. Of their idolatrie towards images. XXXIII. Of their Guagcos or Tem∣ples. XXXIIII. Of their Priests and religious persons. XXXV. Of sacrafices both of men and beasts. XXXVI. Of sacraments resembling in some sort ours, brought in among the people by the Diuels pollicie. XXXVII. Dispositions at the New World to receiue the gospell of Iesus Christ. XXXVIII. Of certaine predictions of future preaching of the Chri∣stian faith in these Newfound Lands. XXXIX. Prodigies which went before. XL▪ What [ E] made the conuersion of the Indians easie, and what did hinder it. XLI. Of the diuersitie of the Barbarians: and of the manner of preaching the Gospell. XLII. Of the difficul∣ties they had in the conuersion of the Americans. XLIII. Of the remedies of the said errors.

THe other part of the king of Spaines Estates consists in the New world, where he hath all that he list, for that there is not any one that will contradict him. These Estates are diuided into Islands and fume land. The Islands of the North Sea, are so many, as they can∣not [ F] be yet numbred (for that the Lucayes onely exceed the num∣ber of foure hundred) and some of them are so great and rich, as one of them would make a good realme. Borichin is three hun∣d••ed miles long, and sixty broad: Iamaica is almost as great: Cuba hath three hundred leagues in length, and twentie in breadth: and Hispaniola hath one thousand and six hun∣dred miles in circuit. As for the firme land, the king of Spaine is actually Maister of all

that goes coasting along Florida, Noua Hispania, Iucatan, and also that great Southern [ A] Peninsula vnto the Cape of California, yea vnto Quiuire, for that the Spaniards haue discouered so far, and farther. The coast of Noua Hispania (which beginning at S. Hele∣na, and passing by Panama, goes vnto Quiuire) hath in length about fiue thousand miles, whereunto adding the confines which are within the countrie towards the North, they shall find in all nine thousand miles. After this Peru beginning from Panama, hath vpon the coast twelue thousand and six hundred miles, whereof there are three thousand miles of riuer, betwixt Maragon, and the riuer of Plata or Siluer, the which belongs (vnder the name of Brasil) to the crowne of Portugal. But before I proceed any further, I must say something touching the discouerie of this New World. [ B]

Two reasons moued Aristotle and some others, to persuade themselues that there were no other people in the world but the Inhabitants of Europe, Asia, and Africke: the first was the vastnesse of the Atlanticke Sea, which made them thinke that men could not passe such great waters, by any force or industries, and this moued Saint Augustine to de∣nie the Anti••odes: the other reason which deceiued the auncients was that they belee∣ued that the burning Zone was inhabitable by reason of the excessiue heat, as the Poles were for their insupportable cold. But the first of these two reasons had much more force than the second, for that they held this great passage at Sea to be impossible: but on the other side, we must vnderstand that the auncients had some knowledge of the burning Zone, for that Hanno of Carthage, according vnto Plinie, did coast alongst Africke, [ C] from Gibraltar vnto the Red Sea, and one Eudoxus on the other side, from the Red Sea to Gibraltar: so as they were forced to passe twice vnder the Equinoctiall, and to crosse all the burning Zone. Moreouer the auncients had knowledge of Aethiopia, the Indies, and the golden Chersonese, all which Prouinces lie within the bounds of the burning Zone. Plinie makes mention of Taprobana which is vnder the Equinoctiall: and the ex∣perience of our Zone might teach the Auncients that the burning was habitable: for although that the sunne doth generally heat and drie with the neerenesse of his beames, and the more when they are perpendicular; in like manner as by his distance, and the ob∣liquenes of his beames, he giues way to cold & moisture, as the day and night, with Win∣ter and Sommer doth shew; yet this generall rule doth many times faile by reason of [ D] the diuersitie of scituations: for the vertue of general causes in the production of effects is limitted, and in a maner restrained by the qualitie of the substance; and this is the reason why the predictions of Astrologers doe many times proue vaine: so we see that winds grow strong and vehement in valleis, and decrease vpon plaines: the heat of the sunne doth increase vpon concaue looking glasses, and disperseth it selfe vpon those that are plaine. And to come to our purpose, the heat and coolenesse of the Ayre and countries receiues a thousand diuersities from places that are high or low, vpon a plaine, or eleua∣ted, turned towards the North or South, the East or West, neere or far from the sea, lakes, woods, and riuers, or such places as are subiect to winds or not. We see that Eng∣land is farther from the Equinoctiall than France, and yet by the report of all men, it is [ E] more temperat: and by the same proportion, Zeland is lesse cold than Mont Atlas. There is no greater effect of the neerenesse of the sunne than in Sommer, nor of his far distance than in Winter. But what shall wee say, if in the same distance of the Equinoctiall and course of the sunne, wee find that the seasons change at the same time? Gata is a moun∣taine which comming out of great Caucasus runs along the Indies vnto the Cape of Comorin; at the same instant on this side the mountaine, Winter begins at the entring of Aprill, and Sommer on the other side of the mountaine at the same time: on this side there is aboundance of raine with cold and stormie windes, and on the other side, they haue cleere and pleasing weather: on this side the sea growes so high and troublesome, as sea men are scarce secure in their harbor, and on the other side they passe through the [ F] gulfe of Bengola in assurance, and trafficke in all parts: Finally, the mount of Gata workes greater effects than the Equator, seing that in so small a distance it doth change the seasons of the yere. If then we find the difference of Winter & Sommer in the same height, it shews that the degrees of heat and cold, of drought and moisture, do not who∣lie

[ A] depend of the neerenesse, or remotenesse of the Sun. Wherefore, it may be coole and fresh when the Sun is neere, & moist when his beames are most straight: by which means the burning Zone cannot be without pastures, as Aristotle and some others did beleeue. But the other difficultie seemed to the Ancients without helpe, for that in their nauiga∣tions they had no other guides but the Sun and Moone, the two beares, and other sta••s. When the heauens were couered with clouds, which tooke from them the light of the Sun and Stars, then they gouerned themselues by the quallitie of the winds, and by the coniectures of the way which they had gone; wherein they were verie skilfull by reason of their short nauigations, and their continual voyages. The Tapo••bases, for that they saw [ B] not the North Star, carried many birds with them, and according to occasion first let flie one and then another, and for that birds doe willingly seeke land, they did houer before at the prows of their ships. But if the skie were darkened, and the seas troubled with di∣uers winds, the Ancients could not comprehend where they were, for that the heauen and the sea being in this case in the like estate, there was no reason which should per∣••uade them to go sooner on the one side than on the other. But God meaning to make [ II] easie the preaching of the Gospell, to them that had liued so long in idolatrie, discouered about the yeare 1300 to one Fla••io of Amalphi, in the Realme of Naples, the secrets which are in the Adamant or Loadstone, and the propertie it hath to cause yron which is toucht therewith to bend towards the North, and to point at it; yet there is some diffe∣rence, [ C] for that in some places the needle which the marriners vse, being toucht with the Adamant lookes directly towards the North, and in other places it bends a little towards the East, and sometimes towards the West; so as they must carefully obserue the varia∣tion, if they will not faile in their voyages. The North Starre is distant from our Pole about 3 degrees and a half. By means of the Adamant from which yron receiues the ver∣tue to shew the pole, seamen may with assurance crosse great seas, and seeke new Islands and remoat countries: for that when as they know where the Nor••h stands, they are also assured that turning their faces to that part, they haue the East on the right hand, the West on the left, and the South behind them. And herein we may see how much God is pleased to doe wonderfull works by small & base meanes, for that a needle of yron toucht [ D] with an Adamant stone, hath nothing pretious in it, & yet the greatest enterprise, and the most admirable art that man doth practise (which is nauigation) depends thereon.

Now that we haue shewed the difficulties in the discouerie of the New world, & haue [ III] seene which of the two was greatest, I must now speake something of the quallitie of the burning Zone. We must first of all presuppose, that the Equinoctiall is an imaginarie circle in the firmament, which doth inuiron all from the East to the West, and is equally distant from the two Poles: It is called Equinoctiall, for that when as the Sun passeth through that line (the which it doth twice a yeare, that is, in March and September) the day and night are equall, either being of twelue houres: the which is called Equinox. After which they call Tropikes two imaginarie circles in the firmament, by the which [ E] the course of the Sun is limited; and they are called Tropikes, for that when as the Sun is come vnto one of them, he returnes backe againe. That which is beyond the Equino∣ctiall towards the South, is called the Tropike of Capricorne, and that which is of our side, the Tropike of Cancer. The other is three and twentie degrees and a halfe Southerly from the Equator: and this is three and twentie degrees and a halfe Northward. They call the space which is betwixt the two Tropikes, the burning Zone: and this Interuall, or space, containes seuen and fortie degrees, the which doth answer to a thousand foure hundred and ten French leagues at land, after thirtie leagues for a degree. This founda∣tion being laid, we must confesse that the burning Zone abounds with water of all sorts, for it raines and snows when the Sun is nearest: and then it raines most aboundantly, and [ F] the raine begins at noone day. Moreouer, there is not any place vpon the earth where there are greater riuers, for that in the Southerne Peninsula of the New world, leauing many other great riuers of Brasil and Peru, they find that of Magdalene, which is seuen leagues br••ad at the mouth: Moreouer, there is that of Orillane, which is seuentie leagues broad; that of Plata, fortie; and Maragnon, which is one of the greatest riuers in

the world, with infinit others. Moreouer, there are the lakes of Tiquicaca (this is eigh∣tie [ A] leagues in circuit) Paria, and Bombom, and there are few mountaines without lakes, from whence most of the riuers of these countries doe flow. In the Peninsula vpon the North part, there is the lake of Guatimala which is 150 miles long, and that of Nicara∣gua of three hundred, that of Mexico containes one hundred, that which is called the Caphalique sea, hath one hundred and fiftie in circuit: And after all this, the Realme of Mechoacan is full of lakes, riuers, and fountaines. And to leaue the New world, where are there greater riuers and lakes, than in Aethiopia vnder the burning Zone? There are two, the one whereas the riuer of Nil hath her spring, the other by which it passeth, either of which hath 200 miles in diameter. There is another equall to these, betwixt the r••alm [ B] of Angola▪ and M••••omotapa: There is also the lake of Aquelonde, and that of Coluc, which are very great, and moreouer, there are great riuers in Aethiopia, as that of Coante and Niger, which hath for her branches, the riuers of Senaga and Gambea. There is the ri∣uer of Zai••e, which is 20 miles broad at the mouth; and most of the said riuers, not con∣tent with their own bounds, do euery yere ouerflow the fields. The Island of S. Tho. and of Suma••ra which are vnder the Equinoctiall, are altogether mois••: that of S. Thomas hath a high mountaine in the middest of it, the which is continually couered with a thick cloud, the which yeelds so much water, as the fields are aboundantly watered: that of Su∣matra is generally full of marishes and riuers, whereof the greatest part grow from a ve••ie great lake, which is vpon the top of a high mountaine in the middest of the Island, and na∣ture not content with the water of the aire, and of the land to moisten the burning Zone, [ C] doth produce as wel in Quito, at at the Molucques (countries which are vnder the Equi∣noctiall) certain great Canes wherein water is preserued. We must not forget that vnder the burning Zone, there is much more sea than land, as in our Zone there is more land than sea. Moreouer, it is most certain that in the burning Zone the rain & waters increase, when as the Sun draws neere the line, and contrariwise, when it retires towa••ds the Tr••∣pikes they faile. This doth shew what effects the equallitie of the day & night doth work for the increase of water, for as in our Zone they haue greatest showers at the equinoxes, so haue they vnder the burning Zone, Besides, the burning Zone is not only moist, but al∣so temperat, touching hea••, and in some parts of it, it is much more cold than hot, as at Pa∣sto, [ D] Collao, and Potosi, and the mountaines are alwaies couered with snow and yce. The general cause of this temperature is the length of the nights neere vnto the line, whereas they are continually equall with the day: but the farther off you go, the daies grow longer and the nights shorter, and for this cause the daies in sommer are longer in England than in Italie. The shortnesse of the day is the cause why the Sunne cannot produce so many degrees of heat vnder the Equinoctiall, as farre from it: and in effect, sommer is more vi∣olent in Estremadura in Spaine, and in Pouillia in Italie, than at Quito or Collao, for that the continuation of the working of the efficient cause, doth import much to the per∣fection of this effect. But what shall we say of the differences which we see in the same burning Zone, whereas one part is hot and another coole? This question is not particular to the New world, but generally to all prouincs, and we haue already giuen the solution [ E] , saying, That the heat of the Sun receiues a thousand differences by the diuersitie of scitu∣ations. But to speake something, we must consider that the New world is full of high mountaines which refresh the ayre, and with their heigth (for that high places do partici∣pat more of cold than the lower) and the snow which doth neuer abandon them, & lakes which are exceeding cold, and the riuers which flow from them, whose water growing of snow and yce, is wonderfully cold and raw, and with the violence and swiftnesse with the which they run from the mountaines and crosse the plaines, doe wonderfully refresh the ay••e and earth. Moreouer, the said mountaines being verie high, they must of neces∣sitie make a great shadow, sometimes of one side, sometime of another; and this sha∣dow being added to the length of the nights, imports much to temper the burning Zone [ F] . Besides this, we must consider that these fresh winds do blow continually there: for first of all at sea, the sommer wind raignes continually, and at Peru and Brasil they h••ue a Sou∣therne wind, which riseth at noone day, and on the other side an Easterly.

[ A] Let vs now compare one world with another, considering the new in the East, where∣in [ IIII] it was when it was first discouered. Wee haue some aduantages in regard of the Heauens, some others for that of the Earth: in regard of Heauen, the one is, that our Hemisphere hath more stars and lightes than that which is opposite: for ours hath the North star within three degrees and a halfe of the Pole Artike, with a great number of other stars which do accompanie it; whereas the Antartike Pole hath not any star with∣in thirtie degrees. The other aduantage of as great importance, is that the sunne shines seuen daies in the yeare towards the Tropike of Cancer, more than towards that of Ca∣pricorne, as the Equinoctiall and Sol••i••es do witnesse: from these, two things proceeds, [ B] the coldnesse which is found greater in the other part than in ours, for that the other doth lesse enioy the light of the sunne, and ha••h sewer stars. As for the land, we haue also two aduantages; the one is, that ours extends more from the West vnto the East, and is consequently more fit for the life of man, than the other, which restraining it selfe from the West to the East, enlargeth it selfe wonderfully from the one Pole vnto the other: for the land goes from the West vnto the East with more equallitie, and is alwaies equal∣ly distant, from the coldnesse of the North, and the heat of the South, and the daies and the nightes go alwaies alike: but going towards the Pole, they must of necessi∣tie find▪nights which continue a whole Moneth together▪ and in the end halfe a yeare. The second aduantage is, that our land is more fauourable by the sea, which makes it fit∣ter [ C] for trafficke: for besides the Ocean, which is common to vs and the New World, we haue the Mediterranean sea, which doth water Europe, Asia, and Africke, and is com∣modious for these three parts in diuers sorts. What shall we say of the Caspian and Bal∣••ike sea, whereof the one is very beneficiall to Asia, and the other to Europe. Let vs adde hereunto that our land is more equall and plaine, and by consequence more fit for traf∣ficke both by land and water. As for those things which the earth brings forth, the New World did yeeld vnto this, first, in the perfection of creatures, for that they had neither dogs, sheepe, goats, hogs, cats nor asses, and that which doth more import, they wanted oxen, horses, camels, moiles and elephants. As for trees, there were neither Cedars, orange trees, Lemmons, Pomgranets, Figs nor Quinces, but aboue all they wanted Oliue [ D] trees and Vines. It is true that we had not greater aduantage in regard of beasts, than of fruits; for that touching the last, we did surmount them in bountie and diuersitie; and in the first, in bountie only. As for graine, they had neither wheat nor rie, nor any of our kinds of corne, nor yet rice, neither melons for the beautifying of their gardens. As for artes and matters of industrie, there was no comparison, for that the inhabitants of the New World vsed no iron, which is necessarie and profitable for the life of man; and they had as little vse of fire, the vniuersall instrument o•• i••dust••ie. They had no know∣ledge of artillerie, printing, letters and learning: their nauigation extended no further than their sight; and herein I speak of ••hose people that were most industrious and ciuile, as they of Mexico and Peru. Our world doth also exceed the new in the multitude of [ E] people. There are many great mountaines, moores, and high woods and forrests which make great countries inhabitable; and that part which is inhabited, is not so well peo∣pled as ours, for that these were sooner peopled, yea were altogether peopled whenas they began. Moreouer, here were found arts to maintaine life, as tillage; and to preserue it, as architecture and building, and to make it more commodious; so as the multiply∣ing of mankind was assisted here both by nature and industrie; and there, as a man may say, by nature alone. Also vnto this day a great part of Brasil liues after a sa••age manner, and in new Spaine there is a great tract of countrie held by the Chichimeques (a people without law, without head, and without aboad) who liue of hunting and of the fruits of [ F] the ea••th. They of Florida and of the Paraguais liue in a manner after the same sort, and when the Spaniards came into Peru, notwithstanding that they found many places peopled, yet there was not any that had the forme of a towne, but Cusco: but at this day the New World is lesse peopled than euer, partly by reason of the Spaniards ciuil wars; for that they hold that in the wars (which were betwixt the factions of Pizarro and Al∣m••gra, and betwixt the Partizans of Pizarro and the kings men) there died a million and

a halfe of the naturall inhabitants; and partly by the cruelties and disorders of the Spa∣niards [ A] in the beginning, not onely murthering them most cruelly, but also toiling the people infinitely, transporting them from one place vnto another, far from their country aire, which was the death of many, and that which did also hurt them, was the vse of meates which had beene transported from Europe: they did not eat so much flesh, nor so grosse and nourishing, neither had they any wine, whereas now at Peru they haue aboun∣dance: and for that the princes did sometime imploy them to build ••ambes, sometimes to make waies and such like things, they had no leasure to gormandise and to become drunke as they haue at this day, for they so abuse their libertie, as they abandon them∣selues to Idlenesse, whoredome, & drunkennesse which consumes them miserably. Diuers generall diseases haue also consumed many, as the pox, and the Cocoliste in new [ B] Spaine; many infants and young people died of the pox at Peru in the yeare 1567, and more females than males, the which they that had passed the age of thirtie yeares escaped. They did also particularly obserue that such as were borne in Europe were not toucht with thi•• dis••ase; ••o as for the foresaid reasons, that part of new Spaine which lies vpon the sea is at this day in a manner desart. In the Islands of the gulfe of Mexico there are scarce any Indians remaining, no more than in the countrie of Paria and the plaine of Pe∣ru. But to shew the adua••tages which the new World hath ouer ours, i•• seeme that Io∣seph Acost•• would infer, that America exceeds our countrie in temperature, for that nei∣ther cold no•• heat are offensiue in many places: but this is common to those parts of our World which are vnder, or neere the Equinoctial, as Aethiopia, the Indies, and the golden [ C] Chersonese. Next he will haue the New World exceed ours in aboundance of waters and pastures; and truely as touching waters, it is most certaine that there is more sea, and that the riuers of Plata and Maragnon are two of the greatest in the world: he giues it also an aduantage ouer vsin greatnesse of woods and diuersitie of trees and roots, wher∣of those people liue in many places (as in the Islands of Barlouent and Brasil) the which hath great shew of trueth, for the coniunction of moisture and heat which raines there continually. Last of all, he puts it out of all dispute that there are more Mynes of gold and siluer than in our parts, the which is hard to decide, at the least quantitie for quanti∣tie: For I know nor whether the mynes of gold of Peru exceeds those of Aethiopia, Mo∣nomotapa, [ D] Nandingue, Sumatra and Lequi••; or whither the mynes of Potosibe richer than those of Cambebes in Angola. He adds also, that New Spaine is one of the best countries in the world, the which may well be graunted without preiudice. But taking the New world as it is now, in my opinion it exceeds ours, not in multitude (for that it is not so well manured) but in diuersitie of beasts and fruits, for they haue in a manner added all ours to those which were priuat vnto the Countrie: and it hath this aduan∣tage, that our seeds grow better in America, than those of America doe with vs.

[ V] The question is now, to know from whence the inhabitants of this New world came. We must ••••rst vnderstand that these people haue a foolish opinion of their beginning: The Guanches dwelling in the valleis of Xauxe, hold for their first parents, a man and a woman come out of Guaribilque, a famous fountaine amongst them. The people of An∣dabayle [ E] (a valley subiect to Cusco) say, that they are issued out of the lake Sogdocoque. They of Cusco draw their beginning from the great lake of Tiquicaca. Others say, that after the deluge makind was restored by six persons which were saued in a certaine caue. But leauing all these follies, we must confesse that all men are come from Adam and Eue, & then from those which were saued in the Arke, & that by co••sequence the inhabitants of the New world are descended from vs. It is a hard matter to find out where they pas∣sed: wherein nothing can satisfie vs better, than the neighborhood of places: but this wil not auaile vs, for the little knowledge we haue of the extremitie of the earth. Vopelius saith, Th•••• towards the North, Groenland ioynes with Estotiland, and is a firme land; [ E] in which ca••e it is likely that they of Lapland and Norway, continuing their multiplica∣tion and dwellings, haue by little & little gone thi••her: which may well be coniectured by the inhabitants of Lapland, Norway, Estotiland and Baccalaos, and their manner of li••ing: for that all dwell in caues, or in hollow trees: all weare s••ale skinnes, or those of

[ A] wild beasts, all liue of fish, or of the fruits of the earth, and they do not much differ in co∣lour. Towards the South, if it be true (as many hold) that the land opposed to the st••ait of Magellan is firme land, we must confesse that some part of the inhabitants of America came that way, for that this strait in some places is not aboue a league ouer; by reason whereof the passage was easie. We haue no knowledge of the extremitie of the East and West; only we see that the colour of the people of the New world doth more resemble the people of the East, than of the West, for that they haue a colour like brasse, and there are degrees of this colour, as of white amongst vs: for it is more obscure in some places, as at Peru and Brasil; and in others more cleare, as in Paria and the new Realme. There [ B] are some people found blacke, as in Careque, a countrie lying betwixt Sancta Martha, and Carthagena: by reason whereof wee may say that these men came by some tempest, either from Guinee or Aethiopia. It seemes there haue not any past from the ciuiler parts of Europe, before Christopher Colombus, for that they found not in all these countries any markes of learning, or of any thing of Europe: besides, it is not aboue two hundred yeares that the greatest part of the Islands which are betwixt our firme land and the New world were inhabited, as the Açores, Madera, the Islands of Cape Verd, Saint Thomas, and others of that sea. Let vs then conclude that the New world was first inhabited by people who continuing the habitation of Europe and Asia (as for Africke, it seemes it could not haue any part in this) and searching continually for more com∣modious [ C] and safe dwelling, are by little and little arriued there, and that it hath also bin peopled by some others which haue beene driuen thither by tempests.

¶ Diuision of the New world.

AFter that Colombus had discouered these New lands to them of Europe, they haue [ VI] alwaies continued to go on in diuers expeditions: but notwithstanding that many f••ll of courage and singular valour, as well of Italie, Spaine, and England, as of Po••tugal and Fran••e, haue imployed themselues in this search, yet could they neuer attaine vnto a perfec•• knowledge, especially of the farthes•• bounds towards the North, West, and South. For my part I will follow them of most authoritie which haue written thereof, [ D] leauing discourses full of impertinencie. This continent of land the which is called the New world (I speake of the firme land) is diuided into two parts, that is, into America and Magilanica: America is againe diuided into two verie great Peninsulas, ioyned by an Istmus, or ••ongue of land which is seuen leagues long, betwixt Nombre de Dios and Panama: for as for the eleuen leagues which they doe commonly make more betwixt these two places, is by reason of their turnings, in seeking to find out a more easie and conuenient passage. We will name one of these Peninsulas the Northern, and the other the Southern.

As for the Northern, they giue it sixteene thousand miles of circumference, and foure [ E] thousand miles in length from the East vnto the West: the bounds towards the Nort•• are not yet knowne. I••mes Cartier discouered it in the yeare 1535, vnto the fiftieth de∣gree: Gasper Cortere••lis a Portugall vnto sixtie six, and Sebastian Gabo•• an Italian to sixtie seuen, as some write, but he could passe no farther by reason of the cold. Of late yeares Sir Martin Frobi••ber made three voyages for the discouerie of this North West pas∣sage to the Molucques, but he could not passe on by reason of the aboundance of yce, since his time this voyage hath been continued by others, and it is yet, with hope of good successe. This Peninsula is bounded on the other sides partly by the Northern sea, and partly by that of the South. That part which turnes towards the East containes three great countries, that is to say, Estotiland, Labrador and Norombegue, which are in a [ F] manner opposit to Norway, ••ngland, France, and Spaine. Estotiland is the most Nor∣therly Region that is knowne, and it was discouered long before Colombus by certain Fishermen of Friesland, afterwards found out againe in the yeare 1390 by Anthonie Ze∣••o a Venetian, by the commaundement of Zichim king of Friesland: this countrie of E••••otiland ends at the riuer of Negeuse, which hath sixtie degrees of eleuation of the

P••l••, and there begins the land of Labrador, which extends it selfe to the riuer of Saint [ A] ••aurence, which some te••••e the Strait of the three brethren, and others the riuer of Ca••ada. Leauing the Strait of the th••ee brethren, they enter into a gulfe which is ••••••led Ca••re, almost eight hundred miles long, and in a manner stopt vp with diuers Islands (Ver••zan and others ••umber them to be thirtie and seuen) which lie towards the East. This countrie is called the ••and of Baccalaos, of a fish which doth so multiplie there as it is incredible. The neighbourhood of the aforesaid Islands make the sea seeme to be diuided into many armes and gulfes: and for this cause there are many good and safe ports. As for the Southren Peninsula, which stretcheth to the Magellan Strait, they hold that it hath sixteene thousand miles in circuit, and foure thousand in length: the bredth [ B] is diuers, for that betwixt Nombre de Dios and Panama, it is but seuen leagues; betwixt ths gulfe of Vraba, and that of Saint Michaell seuentie and fiue; betwixt the Cape of Saint Augustin and Cape Blanke, one thousand; and at the Strait of Magellan one hun∣dred thir••ie and foure. It is crost in a manner with very high mountaines (and by conse∣qu••••ce with an infini••e ••umbe•• of valleis) from the which spring many riuers; but those wh••ch fall into the North sea are greater than the others: the which is, by reason of the mountaine•• which crosse Peru in such so••••, as they are alwaies within the sight of the South sea▪ so as the riuers which come from them are presently lost in the sea. You must not thinke that my meaning is at this present to describe all the New world, my desseign ••••ing onely to shew the Monarchie of Spaine; so as I will make no stay, but at such pla∣ces [ C] whereas the Spaniard holdes something, hauing an intent to speake of other Prouin∣ces in their places.

¶ The Fort of Saint Helene, and the three of Florida.

[ VII] TO begin then vpon the North side, the Spaniards haue a Fort at Saint Hellens Cape, which is vpon the farthest bounds of Norumbega or Arambec. The French haue planted Colonies in this Prouince, wherefore I hold it needelesse to describe it. As for Florida, it hath for bounds towards the East, Bahaman and the Islands of Lucayes, to∣wards the West Mexico, and towards the South Cuba and Iucatan, and vpon the North [ D] Canada, Virginia, and Noua Francia. It is foure hundred miles long, and aduanceth into the sea with a point, and it hath in bredth eightie miles. The coast is rough, and the sea full of rockes, especially against the said point where the rockes lie, the which is cal∣led the Martires. It i•• vnder the same Paralelle that Mauritania, and hath in the middle part fiue and thirtie degrees of eleuation. The Spaniards for many vnfortunat accidents which haue befalne them, haue in a manner abandoned the enterprise of this conquest, notwithstanding that they doe partly know the riches thereof. Vpon the bankes of Saint Helene, at the point of Florida, is Rico Secco, or the drie riuer, the Cape of Croix, that of Saint Augustine, and Cannaueral. But in Florida the king of Spaine hath three pla∣ces in which he entertaines garrisons, Saint Iames, Saint Augustine, and Sa••nt Philip: [ E] and of this side vnto the Cape of the New found land, or France Antarctike, their vessels are small and go with oares, for that the sea is shallow in those parts. Many haue beene of opinion that there is some strait in these countries by the which the North sea ioynes with the South, of which Mele••des was one, who attempted it first, for that there were certaine peeces of China ships found in the North sea; and secondly, for that vpon a flat w••ich doth run three hundred leagues into the land, there came Whales at a certain time of ••he yeare from the other sea. And some others haue held, that maister Candish who to••ke a ship comming from the Philippines at the Cape of Calinfornia in the yeare 1587 p••st ••hat way. Stephe•• Gomes seeking this passage went many miles vpon the riuer of Saint A••thonie which is in Florida, and some others haue gone by that of Saint [ F] Laurence, but without successe.

[ A] ¶ Qualitie of the Countrie.

THis Prouince abounds in many things, it hath diuers fruits and many kindes of beastes. There is great quantitie of gold and siluer, which the Inhabitants gather to∣gether, cutting the riuers with lit••le ditches. The land would carrie any kind of graine if it were sow••n, and it is also capable of all sorts of fruits. There hath beene pearles, tur∣quoises, and Emeralds found there. The kine of this countr••e haue haire like vnto hor∣ses, and a bunch vpon their backes like to a cammell.

[ B] ¶ The Manners.

THe Inhabitants are of a colour like brasse, the reason is, for that they annoint them∣selues with a certain ointment, & the heat of the sun, notwithstanding that they are born more white. They are actiue and light, which is by reason of their continual exercise in going a hunting, and their food, which is for the most part of wild beasts. They haue three kindes of stags, from one of which they draw milke as we do from our kine. They doe arme the points of their arrowes with fish bones, or flint stones. They vse cockle shels for coine, but they are handsomely trimmed af••er their manner: it is not lawfull for [ C] any to vse them but great lords, no more than among vs to coine money. Their noble∣men weare garments of sables, but the rest go hal••e naked. They are cunning and craf∣ty, and do naturally loue war and reuenge; for they alwaies are in war one countrie a∣gainst another, killing all the men they can take, but the women and children they pre∣serue. They haue great care of their victuals, and sow rice in March and Iune, the which they gather three monethes after when it is ripe, and put it into common storehouses to distribute to euery one according to his estate and necessitie. They fight continually against the Crocodiles, and stand continually vpon their guard, as if they were enuiro∣ned with enemies. When they want victuals they wil eat serpents, spiders, coles, and other filthie things like to the Auanares their neighbours. In this countrie they find many Her∣maphrodites, whom they vse as beasts to carrie their luggage, putting them to all slauish [ D] drudgerie.

¶ The Riches.

THe Inhabitants hauing gathered vp gold and siluer in the water, as I haue formerly said, carrie it to the sea side to sell, and this is the chiefe trafficke of that countrie.

¶ Forces.

THe Spaniards hold the foresaid three places of saint Iames, saint Augustine, and saint [ E] Phillip: and they say that, that of saint Augustine hath beene newly fortified since it was ruined by sir Francis Drake. Those which stan•• are reasonably strong, and haue suffi∣cient garrisons and artillerie.

¶ The Religion.

THe Inhabitants of this countrie beleeue the immortallitie of the soule like vnto vs, but otherwise they are Idolaters.

¶ The Gulfe of Mexico.

[ F] THis gulfe, which is also called the sea of Cortez, hath as it were two ports, the one by the which the tide enters with a violent streame, and this is betwixt the farthest part of Iucatan, and the Island of Cuba: the other by the which the tide goes forth, with the like force; and this is betwixt the point of Florida and Cuba. It doth water in a manner ••wo thousand miles of Coast betwixt the said Florida and Iucatan, and this is the coast

of new Spaine. This sea is very tempestuous, and hath sew ports that are safe, except that [ A] of the Hauana towards the North. Their chiefe port is that of saint Iohn de Lua, the which hath been wonderfully well fortified by the Spaniards, for that the fleets of Mex∣ico and Spaine lie safely there, being couered with an Island, which hath a league in circuit.

¶ New Spaine.

[ IX] ALl the countrie which extends from Florida vnto the sea of California they containe vnder this name: on the South pa••t it confines with Guatimala and Iucatan: It was subdued by Ferdinand Cortez in the yeare 1518. This Spaine containes some famous regi∣ons, [ B] the which are new Gallicia, Mechouacan, Mexico, and Guastecan.

¶ The Quallitie of New Spaine in generall.

THe aire (especially towards Mexico, which answers to that of the burning Zone) is temperat there: in the moneths of August and September it raines euery day after noone. The soile is verie fertile, and abounds in a manner with all sorts of fruits, except wine and oyle; and yet there is sufficient of wine, and good store of oliue trees: both which where they grow, do much increase the king of Spaines reuenues. They haue in a manner all kind of beastes, as well those of the countrie as of Europe. The Spaniards [ C] haue more affected this countrie than any other of America. It is true that although they which are naturally borne of the countrie liue reasonably long, yet the Spaniards (I meane those which had Spaniards to their fathers) do seldome passe sixtie yeares, and if they exceed it, it is not much: and such as come out of Spaine being alreadie of good yeares, liue longer than such as come thither in their youth.

¶ Noua Gallicia.

[ X] THe Inhabitants of this Prouince did formerly call it Xalisque, whereas Nugno de Guzman (who conquered it) caused the townes of Compostella, Saint Esprit, Saint [ D] Michael, and Guadalajara to be built. That part which is inuironed by the riuers of Pi∣astle, and Saint Sebastian, is called Couliacan. The Metropolitane towne is Couliacan, whereas the Spaniards haue planted the Colonie of Saint Mi••hael. Then leauing coun∣tries little knowne vpon the right hand, for that they haue not seene of their gold nor siluer, they come vnto the red sea, or of California, by Sibole and Grenado: hitherto the Spaniards trade, & the countrie is inhabited. Francis Coronado came to Sibole by the com∣maundement of Antonie de Mendoza in the yeare 1579, but finding small profit, retur∣ned with his souldiers to Mexico.

¶ The Quallitie. [ E]

MInes of gold are aboundant in this countrie, and it is fit to beare all sorts of fruits. They take much fish in the sea that is neere it, and they haue many wild beasts in their forrests. But the countrie for the most part is rough and stonie.

¶ The Manners.

THey that dwell vpon the sea shoare liue only of fish, the rest are sauage and go con∣tinually a hunting: they are poore people which goe naked, and lie downe in the forrests whereas sleepe or the night surpriseth them. They say that many times they doe [ F] not forbeare to eat mans flesh. They do not acknowledge any man, and liue at libertie, but now they are vnder the dominion of the Spaniards.

[ A] ¶ M••chouacan.

THis Prouince is some fiftie leagues from Mexico, and hath eightie in circuit: in it [ XI] is the towne of Saint Sinsonse which is great and well peopled, whereas the kings of Mechouacan made their abode. There is also the towne of Pascuar, whereas the Bi∣shop did first remaine, & that of Valladolid whereas he now makes his residence. There passeth through this countrie a swift streame, which goes alwaies turning, and hauing re∣ceiued other twelue riuers into it, enters into a lake called the Cephalique sea, the which [ B] hath one hundred and fiftie miles in circuit: going out of this lake, it doth sodainly fall into a verie deepe valley, and so continuing her course with a thousand turnings, she en∣ters with great aboundance of waters (which ingender Crocodiles) into the the South sea: but returning a lit••le backe neere vnto the sea, they discouer Sacatule, and within the countrie, Colima, with a towne called the Purification, and vpon the sea shore are the ports of S. Iames, of the Natiuitie, and S. Anthonie.

¶ The Qualitie.

THis countrie is one of the best of New Spaine, for that the Mahiz and diuers other [ C] fruits doe ripen twice in the yeare; the which yeeld such increase, as Francis of Tora∣zas did reape six hundred quarts of graine, for foure which he had sowne. There are also many Simples, among which one is famous, the which they call Mechouacan of the name of the countrie. There is aboundance of cotton, cutchaneale, mulberrie trees, and silke. There is store of gold and siluer, but it is base. There is also much honie, wax, blacke amber, salt, and fish: by reason whereof it is called Mechouacan, which signifies a place of fishing.

¶ The Manners.

THe Inhabitants are tall, strong, and actiue; they seeme to haue good wits, the which doth appeare by their workes which they make of birds feathers, or that are cut in [ D] canes, or such like things which come from thence: but this may be better conceiued by their language which is copious and full of words, and so figuratiue and artificiall as they that vnderstand it preferre it before the Latine. They are of a good complection and long life, and some hold that they are descended from the seuen Races which came out of the Northern parts to people Spaine.

¶ Mexico.

THe prouince of Mexico is the most pleasing and fertile in all the New world, yea, ac∣cording [ E] to the judgement of Ioseph Acosta, one of the best of all the world. It is so called of the chiefe towne, which is a hundred degrees from the Fortunat Islands. It was taken by Fernando Cortez in the yeare 1521, the thirteenth of August. This Spanish cap∣taine led to this enterprise two hundred thousand Indians, others write but one hundred thousand, nine hundred Spaniards, eightie horse, seuenteene pieces of small ordnance, thirteene brigandins, and six thousand Canoes, which are like Gondoles or Wherries. This towne stands in a great plaine inuironed with high mountaines, on which there lies snow con••inually, and it may haue about seuentie leagues in compasse: but there are three and thirtie of them in two lakes, whereof the one is of fresh water, and the other of salt: The water which commeth from the fresh lake enters into the salt and becomes [ F] salt, in the bottome whereof they find Saltpetur. The towne which was vpon the salt lake was ruined by Cortez, & then built againe, not in the water but vpon the firme land. It containes about six thousand houses of Spaniards, and sixtie thousand of Indians which dwell in the suburbes. They say that there are foure beautifull things at Mexico, tha•• is, the women, their apparrell, their horses, and the streets. Vpon the banks of these

lakes, there were neere fiftie good towns, among the which, Tescuto did ye••ld little vnto [ A] Mexico. Mexico hath in it Printing, a Mint, and a most flourishing Vniuersitie. There is moreouer in this realme, the towne of Anges, with a wonderful fertile soile, distingui∣shed [ IX] into valleis, little hills, and plaines, where there is to be seen many troupes of sheepe and horned beasts, wi••h great aboundance of corne and fruit. On the other s••d•• stands Tlascala (which sig••i••••es a towne of bread) vpon a little hill hauing a goodly plaine ter∣ritorie, the which is abo•••• s••xtie miles in circuit: there were in old time three hundred thousand soule•• in ••his ••owne, but at ••his day you shall scarce find fi••tie thousand. The Ci∣••i••e•••• ••••e ••ll ••oble, and ••••ee from taxes, which priuiledge they obtained for their seruice done ••o the crowne of Spaine in the conquest of Mexico, yet euerie man paies a little [ B] ••••an••i••i•• of corne in signe of subiec••••on, and of late yeares the gouernors haue laid some ••xtraord••••ar••e ch••rges vpon them. T••e other townes of most note are Tulle, Tuluca, and ••owards ••h•• ••ea (besides the towne wh••••h is called the True Crosse) Zempoalan, with a c••••••trie abo•••• i•• ••••ound••ng in waters: ••hen Tauasco, a great town (whose Bishop doth a••so cal himselfe Bishop of Capaz) which had as some say fiue & twentie thousand houses buil•• of lyme and a fat earth, and some of wood couered with straw and a certain kind of stone. It seemeth the greater, for that the ho••ses s••••nd scattering one from another, for feare of fire. The riuer of Aluarada runnes by these places, and enters afterwards into ••he Sea by three mouths. Within the countrie stands Vlathan a great towne, hauing a co••ntrie full of fruits and well inhabited, in which there are mynes of Alume and [ C] Bri••s••one.

¶ The Qualitie of the Co••ntrie.

ALl this countrie is exceeding temperat, and beares great aboundance of fruits, and all co••modities nece••••a••ie for the life of man: There are many mulberrie ••rees with whose leaues they do feed great store of silke wormes. In the fresh lake of Mexico, there grows a verie good heatbe which they cu••euerie Moone; and as for the salt lake, they did in former times draw great store of salt from thence, but now it failes; yet they draw forth much S••••••iter, and the Indians doe ••oyle earth with dung, wher••with they make a cer∣••aine kind of ••••lt, w••••••h is not wor••h ••ny thing. They do now feed many horses, asses, and [ D] ••roupes o•• ••he••pe •••• ••••is countrie, and they haue some mines. There is such aboundance of victuals, as e••ght and ••wentie pound weight of beefe is not worth aboue halfe a Royal or three pence, and a hog two Royals, or three at the most.

¶ M••nners of the Ancie••ts.

THe inhabitants of this countrie, were in former times eaters of men, and Idolaters, and had many wiues. The king of M••xico did neuer succeed by right of bloud, but by the choise of Electors which were six in number. They made choise of youngmen, which were actiue, lustie, and wel disposed of their persons, and fit for war, yea the Mexi∣cans [ E] did kill one of their kings for that he was a coward. There was a soueraigne Coun∣cell consisting of foure degrees of Nobles, and officers, without whom he could not exe∣cute any thing of importance. They had not any thing in greater commendation than the breeding vp of children, and they did not esteeme of any thing but religion & war. There was a man of note among them, called Tlacaellel, who was so valiant, as he conquered a good part of the estate of Mexico, and was so generous, as he refused the Realme, saying, That it was more conuenient for the commonweale that another should be king, and ••hat he should execu••e that which was necessarie for the state, than to lay the whole bur∣then vp•••• his backe, and that without being king he would not leaue to labour for the publike, a••••••ell as if he were. Their kings liued with great maiestie and state, as well in [ F] their dwelling•• as seruices. They extended their dominions, of the one side vnto T••g∣nan••pec, which i•• two hundred leagues from Mexico, & on the other side to Gualimela, which is three hu••dred leagues off, and vnto the North and South seas. It is true they could neuer subdue them of Mechouacan, Tlascalla, nor Terpeat, and the hatred which

[ A] was betwixt the Mexicans and the Tlascallans opened the gate vnto the Spaniards, and made the conquest of this empire easie. The Mexicans came into these places diuided into seuen tribes or linages, from a Northren region, whereas of late they haue disco∣uered a rich and well peopled prouince, which the Spaniards call new Mexico: their chiefe honour consisted in armes, by the which they made themselues noble. Mot••zuma (who was the last king) instituted certaine orders of knights, where of some were called Princes, others Lions, some Eagles, and some Leopards: these were allowed to weare gold and siluer, to be clothed in cotton, to weare breeches, and to haue vessell painted and guilt, which none of the meaner sort might vse.

[ B] ¶ The Manner at this day.

THe Mexicains are wittie and industrious: they are full of courage, and thinke that the greatest glory of a man consists in valour. In their cumbates they vse arrowes, and slings with the which they cast stones, and they can now vse the harquebuze since the Spanairds came among them. The people are very sober and giuen to trafficke, which is in great request in that countrie. Euery man is giuen to feed silkewormes, and the handy∣crafts men make a thousand pretty toyes both of wood and fethers. They haue accusto∣med themselues for the most part to the Spanish fashions, since they receiued baptisme.

[ C] ¶ The Riches.

THe he••be which they draw euery yeare out of the fresh lake, is not worth lesse vnto ••he Inhabitants of Mexico than twentie thousand crownes. Finally, if Peru exceeds this countrie in aboundance of gold and siluer which is exceeding fine, this may also vaunt that it is richer than Peru in fruits and cattell, and that it exceeds it in arts.* 1.3 As for cattell, there is some one that hath aboue fortie thousand oxen and kine of his owne par∣ticular, & some other hath aboue a hundred and fiftie thousand sheep. In the fleet which came in the yeare 1587 there were brought sixtie four thousand cow hides into Spaine, [ D] and besides this merchandise which doth amount to aboue six scoare thousand pounds yearely, they carrie a great quantity of siluer, some in ready money, and the rest in wools, sugars, silkes, and cochenille, which is a worme they sow vpon the leaues of Indian fig∣trees, where it doth grow couered with a certaine delicat cotton: they gather it with great care, drie it in the sunne, and so send it into Spaine, and this commod••tie yeelds not lesse than three hundred thousand crownes a yeare: the figtree that hath this seed, carries no other fruit that yeare but these wormes. New Spaine doth also trafficke with China. They bring from thence flax, brasse, tin, white wax, white taffetas, gold for merchandise, paper, with many delicat toyes, which are transported to Per•• at easie rates, and siluer is the chiefe merchandise they send backe into China, whereas the earth yeelds more gold [ E] than siluer; but it doth not exceed nineteene carats, and it is refined at Mexico to two and twentie.

New Spaine doth also vent into Peru for a million of crownes, in wollen cloth, silks, linnen cloth, and tables. They haue not yet found out the art to make glasses nor paper, and it may be more through the error of the workemen (especially in regard of Gl••sse) than of the matter. The paper is of an oliue colour, and is good for any thing but to write on, and the glasse is obscure and grosse. The Indians pay vnto the king and to the feudataries twelue rialls for euery head, and nothing else.

[ F] ¶ Gouernment.

FOr that I referre it to the end of my discourse to treat of the gouernment of America in generall, and of the forces; I will onely say, that the king giues to them that con∣••••er, and to souldiers of note, not the gouernment of the Indians, but the vasselage a••d the right of the tax which should be due to him, and this continues but for the life of the

conqueror and his sonne, with a bond to performe that which the king should: that is, to [ A] maintaine preachers of Christs doctrine, and priests for the seruice of God, and to fur∣nish the churches. But the Iustice and gouernment depends wholy of the kings courts and officers. The Viceroy and the Archbishop remaine at Mexico, where the soueraigne court is for New Spaine. Tlascalla is gouerned like a common weale vnder the prote∣ction of the king of Spaine, with a Spanish gouernor, and another of the countrie.

¶ Gastecan.

[ XII] IN conquering the New World, the Spaniards haue beene carefull, not to people it [ B] with any plantations, but vpon the sea coast, or neere vnto riuers, vntill that being growne the stronger, they extend their dominion far into the countrie. Coasting then along New-Spaine, they found the mouth of the riuer of Palmes, to the conpuest wher∣of Aruaro de Naruaez in the yere 1527 led six hundred Spaniards and one hundred horse, who were in a manner all lost and could not find it, and some of them were so prest with famine as they did eat one another. Twentie miles beneath this riuer is that of Panuco, whereas Francis Garai was ill intreated by cruell and barberous people, who slew about foure hundred of his men, and did sacrifice and eat some of them, hanging their skins dried in the temples of their Idols. This countrie was afterwards subdued by the captains of Cortez: They called it Gastecan, or the riuer of Panuco, and there is a place called Zi∣matao, in whose territorie there is to be seene at the foot of a mountaine two fountaines, [ C] whereof the one is of blacke pitch, and the other of red, and very hot. To this purpose I will tell you that in the Island of Wolues neere vnto Lima, there is a fountaine of Bitu∣men which is like vnto pitch, the which at Peru they call Copoy; and another at S. He∣lenes point, with the which they do calke their ships exceeding well. About thirtie and nine yeres since, there was a certaine rebellion in this Prouince, the which was followed by a war, whereby the whole countrie was made defart. Then followes the red Cape, the riuer of Aulnerie, Ville-riche, or the rich towne, so called for that it is a port by the which all the trafficke doth passe betwixt old Spaine and new, and Don Anthonie de Mendoza caused a goodly way to be made from this place to Mexico, to make the commerce ea∣sie, [ D] and to conduct their merchandise. But the trafficke was afterwards transported to the True crosse for more commoditie, the which lies a little lower against Saint Iohn de Lua. The Spaniards haue two colonies here, that is to say, Panuco, and Saint Iames of the Valley.

¶ Iucatan.

[ XIII] IVcatan (which they of the countrie call Maiathan or Maiapar) is a great Peninsula, the which is nine hundred miles in circuit, & is in the one and twentieth degree. The more it aduanceth into the sea, the more it doth extend and inlarge it selfe with two Capes, [ E] wherof that towardsthe North is called Cape Rouge or the Red Cape, and that of the South Cotoque. This land was first discouered by Francis Hernandes de Cordoua in the yere 1517, it lies opposit to the Island of Cuba.

¶ Qualitie.

MAny desart places are in this countrie, and it is poore in gold and siluer, but in ma∣ny places rich in corne, fruits, honie, wax, geese, hens, capons, hares and stags. And although there be no riuers that water it, yet the land continues alwaies fresh and in good estate, for that two or three foot vnder the ground it is stonie, from vnder the which there [ F] flowes springs of water and little brookes.

[ A] ¶ The Manners.

THe naturall inhabitants of Iucatan, are somewhat warlike and generous, and they liue longer than the rest of New Spaine: They did sacrifice their enemies taken in war, but they did not eat them, abhorring the Mexicanes for that cause: They vsed bows and targets, they did arme their heads with wood, and had corselets of cotton, and did paint their faces and bodies blacke: They seemed at their first discouerie to be more ciuile than the rest of the Indians, for the Spaniards found a great towne, where the hou∣ses [ B] were artificially built of stone and lime; they had goodly Temples and faire Market places: They liued vnder laws, and did trafficke together with great sinceritie, by ex∣changing their commodities without money: They frequented their Temples much, and were great Idolaters: They vsed circumcision, but not all in generall: They did worship the Crosse to obtaine raine. Some write, That the Spaniards when they came, found Crosses amongst them, which (they said) a beautifull man had left with them for a re∣membrance.

¶ Guatimala.

IN this countrie which lies betwixt Iucatan and Nicaragua (besides the towne of Gua∣timala [ C] or of S. Iames) you may see Chappa, Saint Sauiour, and Saint Michaell, Co∣lonies [ XIIII] of Spaniards.

¶ The Qualitie.

THe aire of this countrie is sweet & pleasant, and the soyle fertile, hauing both moun∣taines and valleis which yeeld store of fruit. The chiefe towne (which beares the same name) is in a pleasing valley, the which is alwaies full of hearbes, and pleasing fruits. Among other fruits it abounds in Cacao, the which is like vnto an Almond, but it is round, and this fruit serues the Indians for meat, drinke, and money, especially in many parts of New Spain; twentie thousand Cacaos, which make a charge, are worth one hun∣dred [ D] and twentie Ryals in Guatimala, and two hundred in Mexico. This tree flies the Sunne, and loues the water; so as to the end it may grow, and carrie aboundance of fruit, they plant in the water, vnder some other tree that may shadow it, and keepe it from the Sun beames. The towne was first built at the foot of a certaine hill, which did vomit forth flames of fire, and is called at the Indies a Vulcano. But for that in the yeare of our Lord 1540, on the six and twentieth day of December, a lake hidden in the bowels of this mountaine, brake forth in diuers places, and did ouerflow (with a fearefull violence) and ruine the greatest part of the towne, it was transported two miles from thence into a better scituation, and with it the kings Councell and the Bishoppes See. But in the yeare of our redemption 1581, there was so great an irruption of fire out of another [ E] Vulcano some two miles from the towne, as it seemed all would haue beene consumed. The day following, it cast forth such aboundance of ashes, as they filled the valley, and had almost buried vp the towne. But this was not the end of the feares and miseries of Guatimala, for that the yeare following, this Vulcan or Montgibel did cast forth such aboundance of fire, as running for the space of foure and twentie houres like a furious tor••ent downewards, it did burne stones and rockes, and did so heat fiue small riuers or streams, as no man could passe them, yea, some write that it dried them vp. In the meane time they did heare fearefull thunders, and they saw lightnings and flames of fire wauing in the ayre, which did strike a wonderfull terrour. There is a Lake in this countrie which [ F] is one hundred miles long, and twentie broad.

¶ The Gouernement.

THe gouernour of the prouince makes his residence in the towne of Guatimala, or of Saint Iames, where his authoritie is verie great, for he disposeth of Comandaries

that are void to whom he pleaseth: the which neither the gouernor of Mexico, nor he of [ A] Peru may doe. There is also in this place a president with the kings Councel, which hath all power in matters which concerne justice. This towne hath also a Bishop which re∣••••ines there.

¶ The Firme land.

[ XV] THis name comprehends that part of firme land, which was discouered by Columbus after the Islands, and containes all that which is betwixt Paria and Iucatan, that is to say, vpon the North sea, Fondura, Beragua, part of Golden Castille, Carthagena, and Vene••zole•• whereunto they haue since added Nicaraga, with the rest of golden Castille, [ B] which is vpon the South sea. And the better to vnderstand the scituation of the said Pro∣uinces, you must know that the countrie which retires it selfe from the Southern Cape of Iuca••an, almost with a straight line betwixt the West and the South, aduanceth it selfe againe right against I••cata••, and leauing a great gulfe in the middest, makes two Capes, whereof the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is called the Cape of three points, and the other of Camaron; there is al∣so another which is called the Cape of the grace of God, which answereth vnto this. Be∣twixt Iucatan and the three points, the gulfe of Higueres inlargeth it selfe: betwixt the three points and Camaron they see Trugille; & betwixt Camaron and the grace of God, [ IIIIX] stands Cartagon. In Fondura or Hondura (the chiefe place which the Spaniards hold) is Trugille, and of the Originaries Comaiaqua, with their Bishop. In this countrie is Al∣gateque, a place of some note; and a lake with many smal Islands, & the valley of Olance, [ C] which is wonderfull pleasing. In Beragua there is nothing more remarkable than the ri∣uer from whence the countrie takes his name, and the Disaguadero.

¶ Ni••aragua.

[ XVI] THis Prouince lies next vnto New Spain towards the East and South: it extendeth it selfe from the mynes of Fond•••••• towards the South sea. There are many places well ••••••pled in this prouince; but they are small, among the which they hold for the best townes those of Leonard Granad••. [ D]

¶ The Qualitie.

SOme write that the prouince is so fertile, as the Spaniards called it Mahomets Para∣dise, for the aboundance of all things. It is not great, but is sandie, and therefore in sommer it is so burnt vp with heat as no man can in a manner trauel by day, but by night. It is no lesse distempered and vneasie than Pouilla, Arragon, or Estremadura. From May vnto October, they haue great and in a manner continuall showers, especially in the Af∣ternoone, [ XII] which they want in the other six moneths. In some places there growes cer∣taine trees whereof one may ••t••nd in stead of many; for they are so great as six men are scarce able to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 them. There are some trees of so strange and delicat a nature, as a [ E] man cannot touch any one of their braunches, but it withers presently. In those places where this 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hath any riuer or br••ok••, or any kind of water, it is as fertile as any man can desire, such is that part which extends it selfe from the port of Succours vnto ••ondura and Granado, the which for the aboundance of all things carries the name of the Rich Coast. About fiue and thirtie miles from Leon, there is a Vulcan or fierie hill 〈◊〉〈◊〉 flames may he seene ••erie far in the night. Some write, That the hole out of which 〈…〉〈…〉, in 250 yards d••••pe: A g••eedie Frier thinking that this burning substance 〈…〉〈…〉 gold, caused a long chaine o•• yron and a Kettle to be made, and let it down into 〈…〉〈…〉 vault, hoping to draw forth gold, but the fire consumed his instrument, [ F] and had 〈…〉〈…〉 burnt him and his companions with the irruption. This prouince is as much annoyed with parrets, as ours is with crows and rookes, they flie in great flocks, and would 〈…〉〈…〉 vnlesse they kept it. The wealth of Nicaragua consists for the most part in a lake, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 they say is ••00 miles long: it comes within 12 miles of the

[ A] South sea, and yet her waters fall into the North sea, which is far off. Many hold that cutting the said Channell, and making another from the lake vnto the South sea, they should open a happie Nauigation from the West vnto the East. Others say, that they should make a channel from the gulfe of Vraba to that of saint Michael, which is 70 and fiue miles. Others make a proiect in the riuer of Crocodiles, which takes his spring from Ciag••••••, and falls into the sea neere to Nombre de Dios: others will haue it in the riuer which goes from the True Crosse to Tecoantepec. But it seemes that God doth not like of such discourses, for that king Nicanor could neuer finish the channell which he had proiected from the Caspian to the Euxin sea: nor the kings of Egipt (the vndertakers of [ B] admirable workes) the channel from Nile vnto the Red sea, & from the Red sea vnto the Mediterranean: nor all the power of the Romans could neuer open that interualle of fiue miles which is betwixt the Ionian sea, and Ionia going into Morea: I leaue the diffi∣culties and great charges of such an enterprise. We must add hereunto that imploying the people of the countrie in this worke, they should loose those few which remaine. The Negros of Angola and Guinee do scarce suffise for the mines of gold and siluer. Moreouer such a channell would make the nauigation so easie from Peru and new Spaine to the Molucques, Philippines, China, and to all that Archipellagus, as they would soone leaue the paineful nauigation which the Portugals make, coasting along Africke, beyond the Cape of Good Hope, and euery man running towards the West, would abandon [ C] the South, which should remaine a prey to Pirats.

¶ The Manners.

THe Inhabitants of Nicaragua are of a good stature, their complexion inclines more to white than to an oliue colour. Before they were conuerted to the Christian faith, [ XVII] they had a certaine forme of Iustice: a theefe was adiudged to be his slaue whom he had robbed, vntill he had made him satisfaction. There was no punishment ordained for him that should kill the Cacique or Prince, for that they said such a thing could not happen.

[ D] ¶ Golden Cast••lle.

I Will here begin the Southren Peninsula. This countrie extends from Nombre de Dio•• and Panama, vnto the gulfes of Vraba and saint Michael. The most famous pla∣ce••, and of greatest concourse are Nombre de Dios and Panama, where of the one stands vpon the North sea, and the other vpon the South, with two notable ports, for that all the trafficke which is made betwixt Spaine and Peru, must of necessitie passe there.

¶ The Qualitie.

[] THe aire is not good neither at Panama nor at Nombre de Dios; but if wee make ••omp••rison of these two places, we shall find Nombre de Dios worse than Panama, for 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it is wholly infected; by reason whereof they do commonly call it the Spaniards 〈◊〉〈◊〉. The king of Spaine seeking to remedie it, ordained in the yeare 1584 that they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ransport the towne of Nombre de Dios vnto a place that was lower, where the aire 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••asonably good, and that they should giue it the name of Saint Philip. 〈…〉〈…〉 also in an vnwholesome aire, and the heat is insupportable: it is in the eight 〈…〉〈…〉 ••leuation towards the South. And to speake generally the trueth of all this 〈…〉〈…〉 is little inhabited, both by reason of the bad aire which proceedes from many [] 〈…〉〈…〉, as also by the bad gouernement of them which first discouered it, who 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••ny men to their ends, as they haue done in other places. Finally, wheat doth 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ripen there, but maise growes aboundantly, and the sea yeelds much fish as well as the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 wherein there do also ingender monstrous huge crocadiles, for that there are 〈◊〉〈◊〉 fiue and twentie foot long. The riuer of Ciagra comes within fiue leagues 〈…〉〈…〉, and by it they transport their merchandise which comes from Spaine, the

which is afterwards carried by land to Panama: they trauel from hence to Peru, in Ianu∣••ri••, [ A] Februarie, March, and also in August and September, but not so commodiously. The martiners (going out of the port of Panama) discouer the Islands of Pearles. I may not passe ouer with silence that our plants and seeds, which become better in many parts of new Spaine and Per••, diminish both in bountie and greatnesse at Nombre de Dios and Panama, so as coleworts and lettices being sowne the third time, do in a manner change their kindes and become nothing worth.

¶ The Riches.

ALl the marchandise which is transported from Peru into Spaine, or from Spaine in∣to [ B] 〈◊〉〈◊〉, comes into these countries; for what commodities soeuer they carrie from Peru into Spaine they must be vnladen at Panama, and so carried by land to Nombre de Dios▪ 〈◊〉〈◊〉 they are ship•• againe to be transported into Spaine: and whatsoeuer is 〈…〉〈…〉 Spaine, i•• must first be vnladen at Nombre de Dios to be conducted by 〈…〉〈…〉 and then shipt againe for Peru.

¶ The New Realme of Granado.

[ XVIII] VPon the South of Cumana, and the neighbour countries in the new realme of Gra∣nado, whereof the chiefe townes are saint Foye (an Archbishops seat, and a court of [ C] Iustice) then Tungia, Velez, the Trinitie, Muscoli••a, Palma, Toque, Mariquite, Bague, Victoria, our ladie of Remedies, Pampelona, Merida, and saint Christopher; we see a Cape aduance into the sea, almost of a triangular forme with a Basis ioining to the firme [] land: the Western Angle is called the point of Arania; and the Eastern, the point of Sa∣lines, betwixt both, is that which is called the Three points.

¶ The Qualitie and Riches.

THis new realme of Granado is for the most part full of pleasing valleis, which beare [ D] much fruit: it is wonderfull strong of scituation by reason of the rockie mountaines which ••n••iron it, and therfore they haue verie narrow passages. In some places they make salt of pal••e trees and of v••ine. Neere vnto Tungie there are mines of gold and eme∣ralds, and ••e••re vnto the Cape of the Three Points, they find store of pearles: they con∣sum•• many men i•• the fishing of them; for that the sea water (whereas the oisters in which pea•••••• ••o grow, and are tied to rockes) is exceeding cold, and sometimes the fishermen must continue a quarter of an houre vnder water and hold their breaths: wher∣fore their maisters suffer them to eat little, and keep them from women, and the meat they eat is very drie. The pearles grow in the fish of oisters, and it seldome happens that they find two tha•• are like by reason whereof the Latines haue called them Vniones. The [ E] price is much aba••ed, by reason of the great quantitie which they of the New World haue s••nt into Europe: for in the fleet of the yere 1587 there came for the king of Spain seuenteene markes, besides three chests; and for priuat men, one thousand two hundred sixtie and foure markes, and seuen small sackes of pearle by the ounce. In former times they tooke much in the Island of Cubaque; but they hold that the oisters haue beene consumed by the perpetuall fishing, or whither that being terrified with the noise of ar∣•••••••• they haue changed their place of being, or that they haue abandoned the enter∣p•••••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••son of an Earthquake which did ruine a good part of the towne, where there 〈…〉〈…〉 course of people▪ it 〈…〉〈…〉 abundance as there was wont to be 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••meralds, the price is 〈◊〉〈◊〉 fallen, by reason of the great store they draw [ F] here, and 〈…〉〈…〉 about Mante, and at Po••••ueil.

[ A] ¶ Brasil.

THis Prouince was discouered by chance, by Peter Aluares Cabral in the yeare 1501, [ XIX] it begins at the riuer of Maragnon, and extends vnto that of Plata or of siluer, with vnc••••••in bounds towards the West. According to the computation of some, that which con••••••es the crowne of Portugal in those parts, runs one thousand fiue hundred miles from North to South; aboue fiue hundred miles from East to West; and almost three thousand miles along the coast: but the Portugals hold but one thousand foure hun∣dred. [ B] The chiefe places of Brasil are these which follow: On this side the Cape of Saint Augustine, is Pariba, which is also called the Citie of Snow, and then Parnabuco, a good towne: The Island of S. Alexis, which is not inhabited, but is somewhat commodious for Seafaring men: Then followes the Cape of S. Augustine, which hath eight degrees and a halfe of height of the Southerne Pole; and this part is neerer vnto Africke than any of the New world, for they hold that it is not aboue a thousand miles from the one vnto another. The fleets which go from Portugal to the Indies come thither to stay for a wind, and to know their course, and for that they cannot sometimes passe, they returne backe againe. Then you may see S. Christopher, and the mouth of the riuer of S. Fran∣cis, and after that S. Sauiour, or the Baye of all Saints: This towne is feared vpon a port, or rather a gulfe, which is three leagues broad at the mouth, and is thirtie in compasse, [ C] whereas whales doe enter and sport themselues at pleasure. Here the Bishop remaines, and the Gouernour of the prouince. Fourescore miles from thence stands Igleos, or S. George; and in the seuen and twentieth degree and a halfe is Puerto Seguro, or the safe port, famous, for that Aluares Cabral arriued there, when as driuen by the winds he disco∣uered Brasil. Certaine rocks which haue the forme of a wall, and against which the waues doe breake, couer it. After which they discouer the riuer of the Holie Ghost, and Baya Her••osa, and Cape froid, or the cold Cape, which is in a manner an Island, it hath two hundred and eightie miles in circuit, and is in the two and twentieth degree and a halfe. Afterwards they come to Santos, and to Paratininga, which lies within the countrie, and th••se ••••••es are reasonablie good. Betwixt S. Sebastian and S. Vincent stands Buenabri∣go, [ D] which is vnder the Tropike of Capricorne, and the line drawne by Alexander the sixt. But the last Colonie of Portugals in these parts, is it of S. Vincent, and for that it is a remo••e place, they condemne such thither as haue deserued the gallies, or some such like pu••is••ment: This place was ruined by the English, on S. Stephens day, in the yere 1591, but since it hath beene repaired and made better. In the eight and twentieth degree stands Cape de Patos, so called of a great number of birds which are blacke and without feathers, hauing the bill of a Rauen.

¶ The Qualitie of the Countrie.

[ E] THis countrie of Brasil is so called of a red wood which grows there aboundantly, the which they transport into Europe for the vse of dying: but by the first discouerer it 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the land of the holie Crosse, for that he had erected a Crosse there. This 〈◊〉〈◊〉 good and wholesome, by reason of the hills and valleis, and the pleasing winds 〈…〉〈…〉 there: yet for that it is something moist, it is more fauourable to old than you•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ons. Along the coast two houres before noone there are certaine fresh winds which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from the South, the which doth much good to the inhabitants. At Sea they 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••••rly winds which raigne halfe the yeare, and they of the North the other 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••••son whereof the nauigation is in a manner equally diuided. They doe [] 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••••ously from Lisbone to Brasil in September, October, and vnto March; 〈…〉〈…〉 by diuers waies at all seasons. The countrie is full of mountaines, riuers, 〈…〉〈…〉▪ distinguished into plaines and hills, alwaies pleasant and greene, with many 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••arie••ie of creatures which are vnknowne to vs of Europe. Among the plants, 〈…〉〈…〉 Co••iba, whose barke being cut casts forth a balme; the which euen the

bea•••• know, for finding themselues bitten with serpents, and other beasts, they haue re∣course [ A] vnto this remedie; so as many of these plants are in a manner without barke. The Cedar is also an ordinarie tree there (as also in new Spaine, and at Barlouent) and there [] a••e many other kinds of incorruptible wood: They make boats of the barke of a tree, able to containe fiue and tw••ntie persons, or more. The cucumbers and melons of Europe grow exceeding fai••e and good there. Among the beasts, there is the Talusie, which the Spaniard•• 〈…〉〈…〉, of the bignesse of a hog, all couered in a manner with scales; out of the which he puts forth and pulls backe his head like the Tortoise. The Cerigons haue two purs••s vnder their bellies, where they carrie their young ones, and hide them when the•• ••••e in any dau••ger, and that necessitie doth presse them: They do also find of [ B] these beas•••• in the Islands of the Molucques. There is a deformed kind of beast as big as a fo••, which the Por••ugals all Paresse, it is so slow of pace, as it will scarce go a stones cast in four••h 〈…〉〈…〉 blowes, nor ••awning, cause him to mend his pace. The 〈…〉〈…〉 but his nailes are exceeding long: He ••eeds of ants, and 〈…〉〈…〉 ••ith his nailes, he thrusts in his tongue, and drawes it forth full: 〈…〉〈…〉; and so thicke with haire, as he hides his whole bodie vnder it. The 〈◊〉〈◊〉 called Antes haue something resembling to ••••les, but they are not so big: they haue the nether lip like vnto a Trumpet, round eares, and a short ••aile: they rest in the day, and feed in the night. The Haute or Gay is a little beast, like vnto a Cat, which was neuer seene to eat or drinke. The diuersitie of birds and fishes both in the sea and fresh [ C] waters is incredible. In the countrie neere vnto S. Sebastian, whear doth neither grow nor ripen altogether, for when as one eare doth graine, another doth bloome, and when as one grows yellow, another is greene. Before I leaue my discourse of the quali∣tie of Brasil, I will tell you that of la••e yeares, about the Baye of all Saints, one slue a monster of a huge greatnesse, and horrible aspect: it had the face of an Ape, the feet of a Lion, and all the rest of a man, the neck•• yellow, and sparkling eyes, and to speake in a word, it was so hideous, as the souldier which flew it with his piece, fell downe dead.

¶ The Manners.

ALthough the aire ••e delica••, and the countrie pleasing, yet it cannot be spoken how [ D] bru••ish and barbarous the people be. The greatest part of them liue with cut know∣ledge of learning, religion, or law, neither doe they acknowledge any princes. When they go to the war, the Brasiliens follow him onely whom they hold to be most valiant. They doe generally go naked; the rich••r ••ort, or the noble, were garments made of birds feathers of diuers colours, which couer them from the nauell vnto the knee. The men shaue the for part of their heads vnto the crowne. They eat all kind of beasts, Apes; Li∣zards, Serpents, and Rats. They make their bread of a•• admirable fashion: They haue an hearbe as big as Purcelaine, whose root is venemous being eaten raw, and not prepa∣red it kills them sodainly: they take the said root, and beat it speedily, and then presse it, that there may no part of this mortall juice remaine in it; they drie it afterwards in the [ E] Sun, and beat i•• againe, and then make meale of it, and afterwards bread, which is not so toothsome as wholesome. They doe also make a drinke of the same meale, like vnto beere, with the which being drunke, they grow more subtile and malitious than of cu∣stome. They are much giuen to southsaying, and are accounted verie great sorcerers. They loue no labour, but affect idlenesse, sports, feasts, and dauncing. They vndertake 〈◊〉〈◊〉 not to extend their limits, but for honour, when as they thinke that their neighbors 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ronged them. They 〈◊〉〈◊〉 them they take in war, and make solemne feasts. They pu∣nis•• 〈…〉〈…〉 but murthe••. In their language they vse not the letters F. L. and R. They build 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••ses of wood, and couer them with the lea••es of trees. Many families liue together 〈◊〉〈◊〉 one ••oofe; and for feare of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 beasts they s••eepe in the aire in nets. [ F] They liue with 〈…〉〈…〉 of the future time, and almost in common. They swim so well; as they remaine sometimes whole houres vnder the water▪ with their eyes open. They doe easily endure toyle and 〈◊〉〈◊〉; and on the other side, they spend whole nights in glut∣••••nie and excessiue drinking▪ When as the women are deliuered of child, they presently

[ A] go about their houshold businesse, and the husbands keepe their beds, and haue broths made them, and are visited by their neighbours, and finally, they do all things that wo∣men in that case are accustomed to do. Neere vnto Igleos there are a people which fight against the Aymures, who are more like beasts than men; for that they open the wombs of women with child, and pull out poore infants whom they lay vpon the coales in the presence of the mothers, and eat halfe raw; an vsuall thing among them of Popian. Neere vnto the riuer of S. Sebastian there are men twelue foot high, which most com∣monly eat raw flesh.

[ B] ¶ The Riches.

OVt of Brasil they draw great riches at this day, which consist in cottons which are ve∣rie fine, and excellent sugars, and there is not any thing transported into Europe that is more beneficiall to the owners. There haue beene some yeares whenas the sugar which was brought from Brasil to Portugal hath exceeded the quantitie of a hundred and fiftie thousand arobes. The Portugals are much giuen to this trafficke, and haue built diuers places where to boile and refine their sugars: and they entertaine a great number of slaues which are brought from Guinee and Congo.

[ C] ¶ Chile.

COmming out of the Strait they coast Chile, which is so called of a principall valley: [ XX] it begins from the South going towards the North, at the height of fiue and twentie degrees and a halfe, and extends vnto the seuen and twentieth degree: but from the East vnto the West it is not aboue a hundred miles, hauing the sea of the one side, and the great Cordeliere on the other: it is bounded in on the South side by Chica, the ri∣uer of Plata on the East, Charcas and Callao on the North, and the South sea on the West. They call it Chile of the nipping cold, for so that word doth signifie. In the thir∣tieth degree is the famous valley of Arauco, which defended it selfe for many yeares [ D] with great furie, and maintained her libertie. The Spaniards haue diuers Colonies here, as S. Iames vpon the riuer of Parais in the valley of Mapoco: the Conception, in the lit∣tle valley of Penco, with a port: the Confines, in the valley of Angola: Valdiuia, neere vnto a port, where there is a great lake: the Imperiall, one of the best colonies of this countrie, which before the warre of Araugues had three hundred thousand men of ser∣uice, and Valdiuia had a hundred thousand. It was called Imperiall, for that whenas the Spaniards entred into this prouince, they found eagles with two heads made of wood set vpon their doores and houses. There is also Villerich vpon the side of a little lake, neere vnto two places, which at certaine times cast forth fire and ashes. There is Chilo and Chilan, which was built in the yeare 1581, and Cochimbo in the territorie of Se∣••••••••••. [ E] In the yeare 1562 there was such a strange earthquake in that prouince as it oue••∣threw mountaines, stopt the passages of riuers, ruined Arequipa one of their fairest townes, and that of the Conception, and made the sea to go out of her boundes: they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it did ruine three hundred leagues along the coast: it renewed againe in the yere 157•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ouerthrew the towne of Valdiuia. The metropolitan towne is saint Iames.

¶ The Qualitie.

〈…〉〈…〉 ••••ince is held to be like vnto the countries of Europe, for that it is without 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••••••ning Zone: it yeelds store of come and very good wines, and they haue all [] 〈…〉〈…〉 that we see in Spaine. There is this difference betwixt vs and them of 〈…〉〈…〉 whenas we haue Sommer, they haue Winter, and so contrariewise. There is 〈…〉〈…〉 of gold good pastures, many troupes of oxen and sheepe, with good store of 〈…〉〈…〉 the countrie is not well peopled by reason of their wars with them of the 〈…〉〈…〉, mortall enemies to the Spaniard. The riuers of this countrie in the

••••y time run very swiftly, but in the night they are very still, as if the cold and ice had [ A] sta••ed them; for the aire of this countrie is so piercing cold, as men passing through the desarts haue lost some of their members without feeling, or else haue fallen downe so∣denly dead.

¶ The Manners.

THe Inhabitants are very tall, actiue, and full of courage: for their armes they vse bowes and arrowes. They go attired in the cases of wild beasts, and in Seales skins.

¶ Peru. [ B]

[ XXI] FRom the towne of Plata vnto Pasto this prouince extends, or else from the confines of Chile vnto the limits of Popayan, betwixt the South sea and the Andes. But to vn∣derstand the disposition thereof, you must know that Peru is diuided into three parts, differing in scitua••ion, forme, qualitie, and nature, and those be plaines, mountaines, and andes: for that along the sea, the land is plaine and low, but with many valleis: this plain is fiue hundred leagues long, and but ten or fifteene broad. Towards the East, there are two chaines of mountaines, the one in view of the other, which beginning as they say, at the strait of Magellan, run betwixt Panama and Nombre de Dios vnto the firme land: that which is towards the West is called Sierra, which in Spanish signifies a mountaine: [ C] that vpon the East is called Ande, or Cordeliere, and their breadth is not aboue twentie leagues; so as Peru in plaine and mountaine is not aboue fortie leagues broad. There are about fiftie valleis in Peru, whereof the principall are Xauxa, which is foureteene leagues long and fiue broad; Chica, Andaguaila, and Iucas.

¶ The Qualitie.

IT is an admirable thing that in so small a distance as is found in the breadth of Peru, which is not much aboue fortie leagues, and seeing that there is no difference of ele∣uation, it doth neither raine, snow, not thunder in the plaines: and in the meane time vp∣on [ D] the Sierra, the seasons haue their course as in Europe, where it raines from the month of September vntill Aprill; and vpon the Andes it raines in a manner all Winter. It hath beene obserued that whenas the Inhabitants go from the plaines to the mountains, they feele much paine in the stomacke and head, as they do commonly at sea which haue not beene, accustomed vnto it: the which some attribute to the subtilnesse of the aire and to the great windes; others to the diuersitie, for that in the plaines the aire is hot, grosse and moist, and on the mountaines cold, drie, and subtile: vpon the plaines it is alwaies one, for that there neuer blowes any but Southerly windes; but vpon the mountaines it is di∣uers and of different fa••••••ons: there it doth neither raine nor snow, and here it doth both; so as it is no wonder if the complexion of man doth feele of this diuersitie of the [ E] aire, and suffers some a••••eration. The plaines being neuer watered with any raine remaine barren, full of sand, and beare no fruit; the which they find onely in valleis, through the which, riuers (which comes from the mountaines and fall into the sea) do passe: and these va••••eis which are in number about fiftie, are very carefully manured, and well inha∣bited, by reason of the said riuers which water them. One riuer is most commonly seuen ••••••eight leagues distant from another; and sometimes more, sometimes lesse. The tillage 〈◊〉〈◊〉 valleis is not aboue a league of either side distant from the riuers; and although it 〈…〉〈…〉 vpon the plaines, yet in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 (which begins in October and continues till Apri•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 skie is full of certaine 〈…〉〈…〉, from which falls a certaine thin humor which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••arce wet the dust, and yet it is of great importance for the ripening and [ F] bringing of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to perfection which is ••owen: and neere vnto Lima these mists onely without any other 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••o make some countries to ••••orish, the which by this meanes are 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of good pastures. ••here are also some parts of the plaines, where there is not any 〈◊〉〈◊〉 o•• ••••uers, yet we ••ee aboundance of come to grow, and all sorts of fruit, either for

[ A] the humiditie which the riuers put forth, or by the meanes of riuers which are lost in the sand, or by the moistnesse which comes from the sea. The Sierra abounds in pastures and forrests, whereas they feed an infinit number of Vicugnes, which are like goats, and Gua∣nacos, and Pacos, which is a kind of Indian sheepe, the which they vse to beare their bur∣thens. Vpon the Andes there are great store of apes and monkeys of diuers sorts, as also of parrets. There is also great aboundance of a hearbe called Coca, much esteemed in Peru, whereof there is such store sent euerie yeare to Potosi, as it is valued at fiue hun∣dred thousand crowns. The best part of Peru consists in valleis which beare great quan∣titie of maiz and wheat. Their common feeding at Peru is of maiz, the which notwith∣standing [ B] doth not grow well in cold countries, as is a part of the countrie of Pasto, and all Collao, but in stead of maiz they haue other nourishing roots.

¶ The Manners.

ALl the people of Peru, are distinguished chiefely into three sorts of persons, whereof euerie one containes many other people vnder them, which differ in names: These people are different, and their languages are distinct. They were accustomed to make war one against another, before that they came vnder the power of Ginacaue: but when as by his victorie all cause of contention was taken away, the chiefe amongst them, [ C] and the people, gaue themselues to the language of Cusco for pleasure, whereas before, they did justice onely to euerie man in this language, the which they did not practise but in pleading: so as he which can speake the language of Cusco, may easily passe through∣out all the prouince. The women weare a garment of wooll down to their heeles, and the men a shirt to the small of their legs, and a cloake vpon it. And although they weare one kind of garment throughout all the prouince, yet that of the head is much different, for that euerie one according to the custome of his countrie weares bands, some of one co∣lour, some of diuers: and there is scarce any one but differs from the rest in that which he weares vpon his head. Finally, the inhabitants of these countries, are full of simplicitie, yet notwithstanding his manner of rudenesse, they that are neere the Equator are great dissemblers; they conceale their thoughts, and murmure betwixt their teeth, neuer dis∣couering [ D] their conceptions freely. They doe not differ much in their manner of liuing, from the Iewes. They are subiect to loue men, and for this cause doe little esteeme wo∣men, for that they doe not onely make them serue as slaues, but they doe also beat them cruelly vpon any small matter. They that remaine neere vnto the Equator are onely co∣uered to the nauell with a verie fine shirt, leauing the other members bare, yea the priuie parts. They weare bracelets of stone vpon their armes, & they make holes in their cheeks and lips, in which they put Turquoises and Emeraldes. The entries of their Temples to∣wards the East, were onely shut with a curtaine of wooll, and within their Temples there are two idols which haue the resemblance of he goats, before the which they burn a kind [ E] of wood which giues a wonderfull good scent. Among the Caraces, there hath bin seen vpon their doores images of men with a Deacons stole about their necks. The Pazaons doe with wonderfull art and care preserue the bodies of men and children that be dead, from corruption. They did commonly worship Serpents in their Temples, and besides this euerie man had his priuat gods, according to the facultie and trade which he did vse. They were verie ignorant of letters, and also of painting, which they of Mexico vsed ins••••ad of Letters. They haue vsed memorials made of cords of wooll, which they call Qu••••••▪ whereas making knots of diuers colours, they did signifie diuers things, and ••xpresse their minds. Euery prouince hath his notaries, which are called Quipocamayos, who giue the people to vnderstand any thing which hath passed long before, by the [ F] mea•••• of these strings and colours. Their armes are a sword, a pike, an yron naile, a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of siluer with the edge of gold. They know how to aduance, to keep their rancks, to ••••ecour their men, and they do•• not feare death, so as they leaue a good fame behind 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or ••ind meanes to get some recompence from their captaines. The pretext of their 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••efore the comming of the Spaniards, was, that at the Deluge the world was saued

in their Lakes, and that they onely had the true religion, and should teach it to others. [ A] Their chiefe god was the Viracoca, that is to say, the Vniuersall Creator, and after him the Sunne. The Ingua Pacacuti, who inuented the greatest part of their supersti••ions, ha∣uing assigned rents for the Temples of their gods, appointed none for Viracuca, saying, That he had no need, for that he was the Creator of all things. Amongst other remark∣able things which they brought into those countries where they conquered, one was, that they ••••u••ded the land into three parts: the one did belong to religion, and their gods: the second was for the Ingua or King, who therewith did entertaine his person, court, ••insmen, barons, and garrisons, and this part was the greatest: the third part was for the people: yet no man had any thing in particular, but by speciall grace from the [ B] Ingua, neither was it hereditary. These lands of the comminalties were distributed yerely, assigning to euerie one so much land as was needfull for the entertainment of his familie: so as this portion was sometimes greater and sometimes lesse, for the which they payed no tax. They were bound in stead of a tax to manure the lands of their gods and Ingua, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to lay the fruits into great storehouses appointed to that vse, from whence they drew prouision for the people in time of dearth. They did the like of beasts, the which they diuided into three parts as well as their lands. Wherein (in my opinion) they haue much exceeded Lycurgus in the distribution of lands, and the Romans in their law Agraria. And for that it neuer raines in P••ru, the inhabitants care little for houses, and the Spaniards themselues couer not their houses but with certaine mats. Yet the king of Peru made [ C] many great buildings, and among others the Tambes, which were like great Magazins or Storehouses, wherein they did put their victuals, armes, and other prouisions for war. These buildings were set vpon the high waies, in such fort as the one was not aboue three or foure leagues distant from the other. The kings of this countrie haue made two waies fiue hundred leagues long, the one went by the plaines, and the other by the mountains: works in truth ••hich for their greatnesse and profit are to be preferred before those that were most admirable in Aegypt or Rome: For vpon the mountaines they were forced to raise vp i•• a thousand places, and to fill vp deepe valleis: they did cut rockes, vnder∣prop them that were ••uinous, ••ake euen places that were vneasie, support precipices, and vpon the pl••ine•• t•• vanq••ish so many difficulties, as sand is accustomed to bring with [ D] it, in an enterprise of that nature. In many places they had goodly gardens, and trees which gaue great delight and profit to passengers.

¶ The Riches.

THey draw aboundance of gold and siluer out of Peru, besides other merchandise: and of all the riches which comes from America into Europe, Peru doth commonly fur∣nish two third parts, and New Spaine the other: but New Spaine hath richer merchan∣dise, the which together with the Islands among other things doth yeeld great store of cochenille, cotton, sugar and pearles: but among the treasures of Peru there are two ve∣rie admirable; [ E] the one is the siluer myne of Potosi, the which was discouered in the yeare 1545, from which they haue drawne, and doe draw, so great quantitie of siluer as the fift part which belongs vnto the king hath amounted in fortie yeares to a hundred and eleuen millions of Pezoes, euerie Pezoe being worth thirteene Ryals of Spaine, and one fourth part, and yet there is aboue a third part which paies no fift. They refine this ••••••er in 52 engins made vpon a riuer which is neere vnto it, and in two and twen∣•••• ••hich are in the valley of Tarapie, besides diuers others which they turne with horses. 〈…〉〈…〉 draw out of this countrie a good quantitie of gold. The other treasure consists in th•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Guancauelque, whereas they find much quicksiluer. They were disco∣uered in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 yeare 1567, out of which the king draws cleerely euerie yeare about foure [ F] hundred tho••••••nd Pezoes. Before I leaue Peru, I hold it conuenient to discourse some∣thing of her prin••ipall townes and prouinces.

[ A] AREQVIPA, LIMA, TRVGILLO, and others.

FIrst of all appeares Tarapata, with a port, in the one and twentieth degree; then Arica, and the mouth of the riuer and port of Quilca: and within the countrie the pleasing and delightfull towne of Arequipa, which being seated at the foot of a mountain which doth ••••••t forth fire, doth alwaies enioy a temperat and subtile aire, and a soile which is fre•••• ••lorishing. The siluer of Plata and Potosi comes to this port, and there is shipt for 〈◊〉〈◊〉: thither comes much victualls and merchandise which goes to Cusco. There is [ B] moreover the porr of Hacari, which is reasonably well frequented, the point of saint Nicholas, Sangalle, and Collan of Lima. Lima which is also called the towne of Kings ••for that it was begun on twelth day in the yeare 1530•• is scituated vpon a great riuer two leagues from the sea, where the port is called Collao, of an Island which is right against it, and it is one hundred leagues from the towne of Arequipa: it is built with much art, for that all the chiefe streets answere vnto the market place, and there is scarce any house without water, which comes from the riuer: the aire is temperat, and they find it somewhat colder than ordinarie during the foure mone••hs of Europs Sommer. It standes in the twelfth degree and one third part. The Archbishop and Viceroy remaine there, and there is also a seat or court of Iustice, and this is the place for all the trafficke. [ C] of the realme. They do number within the towne of Lima twelue thousand Negroe slaues, and foure and twentie thousand Spanish women, whereby we may easily guesse of the rest.

Passing on, they discouer the port of Gaure, where there is great store of salt, and that of Casnia abounding in wood and victualls: then Santa, and Quanape, from whe••ce they come to Trugillo, which is two good leagues from the sea. This towne is seated in the seuenth degree and two third parts in the valley of Chimo, vpon the bankes of a goodly riuer. Then followes the point of Aguille in the sixt degree, and Payta, a towne of great trafficke: Tumbes in the third degree, saint Hellene in the second, and the Cape of saint Laurence in the first, and neere vnto it, is the old port, and S. Iames: [ D] last of all, the Cape of Paffao vnder the Equinoctiall, which doth bound Peru on that side. Vpon the right hand fifteene leagues within the land is the towne of saint Michael, the first Colonie which the Spaniards planted in those parts. But before I go out of the plain•••• of Peru, I thinke it fit to speake of one or two things which are very strange. Ma∣la is a place fifteene leagues from Lima, where there is a figtree to be seene, of the which, that part which turnes towards the South, brings forth fruit when it is Som••er vpon the mountaines, and the other which lookes towards the sea, brings forvh fruit when it is Sommer in the plaine, which seasons are contrarie. In the valley of Chilca it neuer raines, n••ither is there any riuer, and yet there is aboundance of Maiz, by this inuention; they take vpon that shoare pilchards, and such like fish, then they make certaine holes in the [ E] ••••••und, whereas they sow their maiz, putting a graine in the head of one of these fishes, the which doth multiply beyond imagination.

COLLAO, and others.

BV•• the riches and power of Peru, consists in prouinces which are within the land, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the first is Collao: seated whereas the two chaines of Mountaines or Cor∣deli••rs ••••••••e named inlarge themselues one from another. The Southerne bound is a place ca••led Caracol, and the Northern Ayauire. The chiefe towne of this prouince is [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of ••••••e; but the best peopled of the Originaries is Cuiquito, a great and 〈…〉〈…〉, and immedi••tly subiect vnto the king. There are vnder this iurisdiction, Iuli, C••i••ane, Acos, Pomata, Cepita, Quaqui, Tiaguanaco, and others. At Tiaguanaco they ••••e the tu••••e•• of certaine great buildings: they hold them to be very auncient, and made ••••en of great power; for it cannot be conceiued how they could remoue stones 〈…〉〈…〉 long, f••fteene broad, and six thicke, without engines of yron. In this part of Peru

i•• the lake of Taquicaca thirtie leagues long, and fifteene broad, hauing fourescore in [ A] circuit, and aboue fourescore yards ••e••pe: it receiues ••en or twelue great riuers, with many other waters, which fall into another lake called Augola, or Paria, which is with∣o••t any bottome, wher•• it looseth it selfe, as Iordan doth in the dead sea, or Volgua in the Caspian.

¶ The Qualitie.

ALthou•••••• ai•••• ••e••o ••old there, asmaize doth not willingly grow; yet it is one of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ountries, and b••st peopled in Peru: & therby we may coniecture how much [ B] more•• ••e ••••••••rie of the aire doth import for multiplication and the en••ertainement of the lif•• of man, than the ••bouindance of ••ictuals. In stead of maize there growes (besides other thin•••••• ••ertaine roo••••s which they of the countrie call Papes, which haue a tast like vnto 〈…〉〈…〉 they ••i•• them in the sun•• & ••keepe then for Winter. They haue much 〈◊〉〈◊〉, of p••o••lly••••, ••••••tes, which is a certaine beast like vnto a sheepe, but greater, and ••••••ed lik•• ••••••m••l, but without any bunch: these beasts serue to carrie their burthens, which are somtimes one hundred and fiftie pounds weight, and they serue also to plough their lands: their wooll is very good to make cloth, and the flesh is wholesome and of a•• good tast. Tiquicaca doth produce a kind of ••eed which is good for many vses, it is called Totore, and serues to make houses and barkes, and meat for swine, and in the same lake there is an infinit number of mallards and other soule [ C] .

¶ Chiarque.

THen followes the prouince of the Chiarques, rich for the treasures which are found ••••••re, which are drawn out of the min•••• of ••••••co (which are in the territorie of Pla∣••••) and Potosi: the chiefe ••owne of ••h••s pro••i••ce i•• Chiarque. Neere vnto Potosi, there 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a little mountaine called Guayna ••o••osi, ••hat i•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 say, Little Potosi, at the foot where∣of begin•• the towne of tw•• l••agues circuit, where there is the greatest concourse of people & trafficke that is in Peru: the Spaniards which inhabit there are about four thou∣sand, an•• they of the countrie m••ke fourescore thousand: I do not number them whom [ D] the greedinesse of gaine, or the curiositie to see, brings from far countries, nor those mi∣serable wretches which make their ordinarie aboad in the bowels of this mountaine, which are so many as they would make a good towne.

¶ The Qualitie and Riches.

WE may easily conceiue the riches of this countrie, seeing that the President Guasco assigned in his territorie 100 thousand crownes of rent to Peter of Hiniosa, be∣sides lesser assignations, and there were some of fiftie and fourescore thousand. The mountai••e of Porco hath mines of gold which cannot be drawen drie; and there are ma∣ny [ E] others out of which they do not draw what they may, for that the natural inhabitants do neglect it, and the countrie is too cold for the Negros. That which hath also much di∣minished this great accesse to Porco, is the great treasures of Potosi, which is a mountain i•• the two & twentieth degree of ••eight, like vnto a sugar-loafe, hauing halfe a league in ••••••uit: it contains 4 veines of siluer, which are throughout at the least a foot broad, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 most not aboue six; of these, one, which is called Centena, hath foure and twenti•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and that which is called the rich veine hath seuentie and eight: they do labour in these 〈◊〉〈◊〉 aboue two hundred sadomes deepe by the light of candles; and they that worke in th•••• spend whole moneths and neue•• see sunne. They go downe and ascend by [ F] ladders made of rawe hides, aboue eight hundred steps with their burthens vpon their ba••kes, and cand•••••• in their hands: the toile of these miserable wretches cannot be ex∣prest: many fall downe againe by reason that their heads grow dizie, and many others 〈◊〉〈◊〉 themselues downe through despaire; if any one falls he drawes with him the rest of

[ A] the companie. These mynes were discouered for the king of Spaine, in the yeare 1445, a••d haue ye••lded him an infinit treasure, whereof I haue formerly treated. The siluer which is d••••wne forth is afterwards purged i•• ••euentie foure engins of wat••r, and thirtie, th••t ••o•• ••••••ll horses. In the valley of Tarapaia there is a Lake of hot water, which is so▪ rou•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 •••• seemes to haue beene made with the compasse: and it hath this particulati∣•••••• 〈…〉〈…〉 ••euer swell•• with the spring which boyles continually in the middest, nor 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for the great chanell which they draw from it.

¶ Cus••••••

[ B] THe towne of Cusco followes, being in the seuenteenth degree towards the South: ••t is inuironed with mountaines. There is a Castle built with so great stones, as it seemes rather a worke of Giants, than of ordinarie men, especially for that those people had no beasts to draw, nor the vse of yrons. This towne was the seat of the Ingua, or king of Peru, and the chiefe of the Empire, in the which the••e was not any other that did merit the name of a Towne, either for gre••••nesse or pollicie. It had great streetes, and straight, and ho•• ses bui•••• of ston••s ioyned together with wonderfull art: but their ordinarie houses were of wood couered with straw. There was to be seene in the towne of Cusco the rich Temple of the Sunne, and the kings Palace, where there was an [ C] infinit quantitie of gold and siluer. There was a great voyd place from the which they had drawne foure waies to the foure parts of the Empire. The king of Peru, to people and honour this Towne, ordained that euerie Cacique should build a palace ••here, and should send his children to be bred vp there: and to shew the great∣nesse of their Empire, and the diuers nations that were subiect vnto them, they would ••h••••, eu••ie man should goe attired after his countrie fashion, and carrie a certaine 〈…〉〈…〉 ••pon his head: which was a verie stately inuention. This towne was new built in the yeare of our Lord God one thousand fiue hundred fortie three, by Francis Pi∣z••rre. It hath in it about fiftie thousand inhabitants, and within the compasse of twelue leagues, there are two hundred thousand.

[ D] ¶ The Qualitie.

THe to••ne of Cusco hath a territorie full of pleasant and rich valleys as those be of And••g••ay••a, Xaquisane, Bilcas, and Sucay: This last hath so good and temperat a•• ••••re, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 scituation so pleasing, as it cannot be worth••ly exprest: by reason where-of it is full of ••••••tely houses of Spaniards, and great villages well peopled. Our fruits grow a•• well ••••••ereas in Spaine. At Cusco they eat ripe grapes all the yeare. There is al••o great sto••e of oxen, sheepe, and horses, which they entertaine there, and they mul∣•••••• as w••ll as in Europe.

[ E] ¶ Cassamalca, and others.

THi•• place which is vpon the East of Lima, is the chiefe of a Noble prouince, and is ••••••ous for the rout and taking of Attabalipa, king of Peru, which happened in the year•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉, of whose ransome the vanquishers did inrich themselues more than euer any so••l••iers did, and yet they had but a part of it: for one hundred and fiftie souldi∣•••••• had ••••o hundred fiftie two thousand pound weight of siluer, and a million and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••dred twentie six thousand crownes in gold. The towne of Cassimalca is at [ F] this day of small importance, but the territorie is one of the best of Peru. The townes of Plata, Lima, and Cusco, are the greatest and richest, as well in jurisdiction as reue∣nues, of those which the Spaniards haue built at Peru: But Potosi although it be no 〈◊〉〈◊〉, yeelds nothing in number of people to Lima, nor likewise in wealth. The other 〈…〉〈…〉 so great: yet we may not passe ouer with silence Guamanga, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Fro••••••a, Loxa, and S. Iames of Guajachel. Guamanga is almost in the middest

〈◊〉〈◊〉 L••m•• and Cul••o and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vall••y of Xa••xa and the Andes. Quaila [ A] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 is of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of L••••••, ••••d this, of Cusco) is th••e••cobe leagues from 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and 〈…〉〈…〉 since i•• ••h••••••••e o•• Bilca, fifteene leagues from 〈◊〉〈◊〉; 〈…〉〈…〉 Empire, ••or that they doe 〈…〉〈…〉 was begun in they 〈…〉〈…〉 and earth, the 〈…〉〈…〉 with tyles, and there are many faire and high 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to be ••ee••e. Th•••• follo•••• ••eon of Gua∣nuco, b••ilt 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the same time in a wholesome place, whose soyle is verie good: this towne hath vnde•• is the countries of Conchua, Guayla•• Tamara, and Bombom. After which they enter into Cacapoye, whose chiefe towne is Frontera, which doth also commaund the 〈…〉〈…〉 are ••he w•••••• 〈…〉〈…〉 o•• any of the New [ B] 〈…〉〈…〉 L••xa, 〈…〉〈…〉 was Alp••••nso of Nercadille, in 〈…〉〈…〉 called Z••••i••) 〈◊〉〈◊〉 bank•• of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Ca••amayo•• 〈…〉〈…〉 which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hrough 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••ri••o••ie, which make it pleasing•• 〈…〉〈…〉 The f••elds a••d full of maize, and ••f ou•• c••rne, ••he••r orchards 〈…〉〈…〉 o••••••r fruits, and g••rdens soll of 〈…〉〈…〉 with a•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 numbe•• of 〈…〉〈…〉 ••eigh••our 〈…〉〈…〉.

¶ Qui••••.

IT is now ••iche ••o enter••••to the Prouince of Quiro, which is one ••undred miles [ C] broad, and two hundred long, seated vnder ••he Eq••••••or, ••nd y•••• m•••••• cold than h••••. T••e towne of S••int F••ancis, built 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the yeare•• of our ••o••d 1534 b••••d the chiefe of 〈…〉〈…〉 a ••ow p••ace among 〈…〉〈…〉 seuen leagues from the 〈…〉〈…〉 ••he North, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 leagues from the ••ld p•••••• eightie ••rom Saint Iames, and ••••••••••ny from Saint Mi••hael, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 L••x•• on•• ••••••••red and thirtie, and from Lima and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 three ••••nd••ed.

¶ The Q••••••••••ie.

SOmmer begins there in Aprill, and contin••es vntill Nouember. The inhabitants [ D] (which are of a meane stature) are good for tillage, and know well how to gouerne their ca••te••••, and there is not any countrie at Peru whe•••• ••he fruits and beasts of Eu∣••ope profit be••••e••, especially in regard of fruits, su••••rs, and oranges. Their goats haue three yea som••times fiue kids at a time. Besides ••he ordinarie mynes, they ha••e found one of Quicksiluer, of a yellow colour, which smells like Brimstone when they put it in the fi••e. They find there verie great Canes full of waters Amongst tho••e places which cast forth f••••e ••pon the ••op of these mountaines, there is one verie ad∣mirable, for that it casts forth such aboundance of ashes, as they doe sometime couer the countrie two hundred miles round about, and it thrusts forth so much fire, as it is seene aboue three hundred miles, and the noise of it exceeds that of thunder. The towne of [ E] S. Francis hath vpon the East part a Countrie called Canelle of the Synamon, but this Synamon differs ••rom the ordinarie: the tree hath branches and leaues like 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a Bay, but greater, and the fruit is like vnto an Acome, the barke and lease smell 〈◊〉〈◊〉: this fruit is of a ••awnie colour, inclining to blacke, greater and more hollow 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Acorne: it is hot and cordiall; s•• as they vse it as a remedie for the paines of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 stomacke, and bellie, and th••y carr••e it ••o Quito as other merchandise: they tak•• 〈…〉〈…〉 with some l••quor. In ••he y••a•••• 1587 this countrie was much ruined wi••h ••n ••••••quake.

¶ Saint Croix of the Mo••nt.

[ XXII] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 A••ing described Peru, it re••ts that fo••lowing ••he ••••act of some Spanish Captaines, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 we 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into the heart of this Pen••••ula, and take a view of that which hath beene

[ A] discouered vnto this present: and that which hath made me resolue to discourse thereon, is the towne of Saint Croix of the Mount, which the Spaniards hold. Betwixt the ri∣uers of Orillagno and Plata we see (in the seuenteenth degree Southward) a mountain which is a branch of the Andes, which extends to the stra••t of Magellan, and hath the top alwai••s couered with snow and ice. Hauing past the confines of the ••erigans, they d••soe••d into a countrie which hath beene discouered within these thirtie yeares, where ••here is not any one stone neither vpon the land nor within the water of the bignesse of a nut. Towards the North vpon a little mountaine, the Spaniards haue built the towne of Saint Croix of the mount, seuenteene degrees from the Equinoctiall, and ••oure hun∣dred [ B] miles from Plata. There is one hundred and sixtie ••ouses of Spaniards, among w••ich there are sixtie commanders.

¶ The Qualitie.

THe plaine countrie is subiect to the inundation of riue••••. The ants to the end the wa∣ters do not spoile their haruest make (especially at Vapai) little rampiers about a cu∣bit high, & twelue or fifteene foot in circuit, where they preserue their grain, and of these they make many. Thither do the passengers retire themselues whenas the waters sur∣p••ise them. The riuer of Vapai doth rise and fall as the Nile, and runs with a slow course, [ C] like to the riuer of Saone in France. There are many beasts differing from ours: one is very like vnto a hog, but that he feeds vpon herbes, and sleeps in the water like vnto a fish. There are certain vipers which are a fadome long, and as big as a Spanish pike, which the Spania••ds call sonailles; they haue certaine risings vpon the taile of the biguesse of a nut, the which are hollow and ioined one vnto another like vnto the ioints of a mans fingers, some hold that one of them growes euery yeare: these beasts are so venimous, as w••••soeuer is bitten he dies presently: but they cannot see three yards from them, and ••he noise of their knots, or rather bells, may be heard twentie yards off: there are some of them also in Brasil. The Tocca is a bird as big as a crow, but his brest is white, and his beake i•• of the colour of gold, the which is proportionable to the rest of his body. There [ D] a••e ••ery many oftriges, for the souldiers (marching through the countrie) do many times find heapes of fiftie eggs or more together, which serue them for prouision, for that one egge will suffice many souldiers. The countrie yeelds aboundance of cotton, rice, maize, and diuer•• fruits: but it beares neither wheat nor wine, the which they bring from Peru, and a pipe of wine is commonly sold there for one hundred crownes: but they of the cou••••rie make a drinke of maize and hony. They want no lakes which are full of fish: but Saint Croi•• hath a little riuer which is very strange, it is but two ••adome broad and very shallow, i•• ••uns not aboue a league, for that it looseth it self•• sodenly in the sand; and yet it doth furnish the towne with water, and all kinds of good fish, in such aboundance, as they may ••ake them with a paile, or with their hands: and this fishing continues from [ E] th•• ••nd of Februarie vnto the end of May; the rest of the yeare they see little.

¶ The Manners.

TH•••••• are diuers barbarous people in this countrie, and among others the Cerigans, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Viracans, who are at continuall warre, or else fight against the Spaniards, whose passage they seeke to hinder all they can. Don Francis of Toledo drew together the forces of Peru to subdue them, but in vaine: they eat mans flesh as we do mutton. The To••es their neighbours carrie their enemies (whom they haue taken in war) vpon [ F] their shoulders, and go shaking them whilest they march. The Varays say that they are all ••••uall among themselues; but greater than their neighbours, whom they contemne, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sort as they demanded of a preacher, Whether they would baptise them with the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 wa•••••• they did others, if so be that they became Christians. They haue no certaine 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of 〈◊〉〈◊〉. They practise their it sonnes to armes from their infancies, and their armes 〈…〉〈…〉 a club, or abattell axe: they giue them their captiues in prey, and re∣compence

him that hath slaine any one by some extraordinarie blow: they incourage [ A] ••••em to be furious, giuing them the names of Tigers, Lions, and such like beasts. Some 〈◊〉〈◊〉 these people (to se••me more terrible) paint their bodies, and when it is new Moone or full, they say ••ha•• th••y w••und their bodies with daggers of boane to accustome them∣selues to th•• a••cidents of wa••. Th••y know not what the••t meanes, neither do they sell any thing. Th•••• follow dead 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to their graues with teares, and receiue their friends in like manner 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from far•• l••••enting the miseries which they haue s••ffered; so as they haue teat•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••••aundment. The Originaries about saint Croix manure the land, and pay 〈…〉〈…〉 the Spani••••ds two pounds of cotton spun, for euery head: for their 〈◊〉〈◊〉 se••ues i•• ••tead of mone••, as cacao doth in new Spaine, and coco in Peru: yea more, these people liue long and are healthie: they take delight in hunting and catching of [ B] birds: they eat rosted ants, the tailes of crocodiles, grassehoppers, and vipers hauing taken away the head and liuer. They goe all naked except the women, who weare some lea••e or barke▪ or a narrow girdle of cotton, and that after marriage. But the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ha•••• brought into the towne the apparrell which they vse in Peru. When it is cold (••lthough the countrie be hot by nature, and not subiect to any cold windes) either they goe not ••ut of their lodging, or else they carrie a firebrand in their handes to w••••me their ••tomackes. Their heads are shauen bare of either side, leauing a tust of haire in the middest: some shaue b•••• one halfe, e••ther on the right side, or on the Ieft; and most of them round about, suff••ring the haire to grow in the middest: they say that they haue receiued this custome from one Paic••me, by reason wherof they called the [ C] first religious man that went thither to preach the gospell. P••ic••me. Whenas the women are deliuered of child the hu••band go•• to bed, & doth as we haue written of them of Bra∣sil. They cannot reckon but to soure, & ••o signifie ••i••e they shew the hand, for ten, both hands, and for twentie, t•••••• say my hands and my feet. When as the husband goes a••••oad for any time, he 〈…〉〈…〉 many stickes in the house as he meanes to stay dayes 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and ••a••ries as man•• ••ith h••••, taking away one euerie day, and the woman (or he ••hat remai••es at home) anoth••••, and ••fter this manner they reckon the daies of absence. B••yond S. Croix 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the ••••st, are ••he people called Garays, that is to say, warriers; who te••m•• all ot••e•••• Tap••••is•• that i•• to say, slaues: yet they doe much esteeme the Spa∣nia••ds•• and say they are d••s••••••ded from them. They neuer forget an iniurie. They eat [ D] m••ns fl••sts, of all ••••her n••••ions but their owne. They build high and spacious houses, whereas many ••••mil••es li••e together, euerie one apart, yet without any partition. They pierce the vnde•• lip and h••ng something at it, which they thinke is v••rie handsome. They haue no fo•••••• of ••ustice. Murthers are not punished but by the kinsmen of him that is slaine. Their Caciques haue no charge but to be leaders in warre. They doe not suffer the Spaniards to ent••r ar•••••• in•••• any of their places (whereof one hath at the least f••ue hundred f••milles) or i•• they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 armed, it is in so small a number as they shall haue no cause to feare them: and they reproach their neighbours with their commaund. A hun∣dred and twentie miles from thence remaine the Chiquites, subiects to the Spaniards. It is a remarkable thing that the Varays language extends it selfe vnto Brasil; and Para∣guay; [ E] vnto the countrie of the Garays and their neighbours, which is a great signe that the sayd people haue beene maisters ouer all those countries: For as with the Latine t••••gue, the Arabian, and the Sclauonian, they may in a manners trauell throughout all 〈◊〉〈◊〉 world, so with the V••rays tongue, that of Cusco and of Mexico, they may in a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ouer all the New world.

¶ Tuc••••••.

[ XXIII] THe r•••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Tucuma extends for the space of two hundred leagues betwixt Chile, [ F] Brasil, Para•••• and S. Croix. The Spaniards which went so farre in the enterprise o•• Peru, planted 〈◊〉〈◊〉 colo••ies, that is to say, Salta, S••e••o, S. Michaell, Cordoua, and S. 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ S••l•••• is one hu••d••ed thirtie and six miles from T••lina, which is the last place of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and ••he voyage is ••roublesome, by reason of the want of water: It stands in a val∣ley

[ A] which is eightie foure miles long, and at least thirtie broad. Neere vnto it there is another valley which they call Calchiaqui, which runnes from North to South thirtie leagues, and is full of riuers, and couragious people. The Spaniards haue fought with them ma•••• yeares in vaine; in the end one Iohn Perez reduced the Prince of this valley by f••i••n••••hip to the obedience of the king of Spaine, he making himselfe a Christian:but b••i••g ••fterwards disconten••ed at the bad vsage of Perez, he re••olted with the whole va••∣l••y, ••nd so continued seuen and twentie yeares. In the end Iohn Ramirez with one hun∣••red Spanish foot, fiue hundred horse, and three hundred archers of Peru, made an end of this enterprise. Steco is the chiefe of fiftie places. Saint Iames stands one hundred [ B] and fiftie miles from Steco, the Bishop, and Gouernour of the Prouince, make their a••ode there. Cordoua is in the same scituation that Spaine is, yet the ayre is colder •••• winter, and more temperat in sommer: It is sixtie leagues from Chile, two hundred and fortie from S. Iames, and as much from S. Foy of Pa••aguay.

¶ The Qualitie.

THe cou••••••ie is generally plaine, and the ayre more inclining to heat than cold. It raines much, and the riuers doe easily ouerflow the fields, and the winds are so vio∣le•••• as they turne vp trees by the root, and force the inhabitants to hide themselues vn∣de••g••udn••. [ C] The valley of Salta is full of waters, which abound with fish. The aire is ve∣rie temper••t, ••nd the soyle exceeding good, where they feed much cattell: so as there wants nothin•• ••ut people. The territorie of S••eco abounds in cotton, come, fruit, and cattell. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••alme of Tucuma the coun••rie is so plaine and so commodious as they may easily ••••••ell in caroche for the space of two thousand mi••es.

¶ Paraga••is.

TH•• P••••aguais dwell vpon the confines of Tucuma, along the riuer whereof they [ XXIIII] take 〈◊〉〈◊〉 name. To passe this ri••er, which is verie great and ••patious, it seemes that na••ure ••••th fitly fu••••ished them with a certain kind of trees which they call Zaines: they [ D] a••e great and not high, ••nd haue the root and the top but small, and the bodie big: the hart of it is ••ender, and th•• barke verie tough; so as they may easily make them hollow: and of them they make boats of one peece, able to containe many. This countrie was first discouered by the North sea, by Se••astian Gabot, and by diuers Spanish Captaines: and then by the way of Peru, by Diego Roias, and others. The chiefe towne is Vraye Foy, o•• the True fait••: moreouer, there are the townes of the A••••umption, Saint Anne, Bo∣uair, Saint Esplo••, and Saint Sauiour.

¶ Hispaniola.

[ E] THis Island is called by them of the countrie Hayti and Quisquaia, and by the Spani∣ards [ XXV] Hispaniola, and S. Dominico, by reason of the chiefe towne which they haue built there. It is in cicuit three hundred and fiftie leagues, or one thousand foure hun∣dred 〈◊〉〈◊〉. It is ••••ue hundred miles long, but the bredth is diuers, being in the largest place ab•••••• ••••ree hundred miles. The middest of the Island is about nineteene degrees from th•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or Northward, and the forme is long from East to West. The chiefe town is that of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Dominico from which the whole Island takes her name. There is a Court a••d ••eat 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with a President: and there also remaines the Archbishop. There are s••ne famous mon••••eries in this towne. The other townes are S. Iohn of Megruana, the [ F] Port of Plata, Port Royall, Cauana, Xaragua, and some others which haue not beene b••il•••• by the Spaniards.

¶ The Qualitie. [ A]

THe ayre is v••••ie well te••••••••ed, being neither too hot nor too cold: yet vpon the ton of some ••••gh ••ockes•• the cold is v••rie sharpe. The trees beare leaues continually, fo•• the old 〈◊〉〈◊〉 but the ••ew bud for••h presently. All ••••ees, fruits, and ••earbes which are broug•••• out 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Spai••e grow there and increase wonderfully, but they find by expe∣••ience that whe••••••omes better i•• hill•••• places. This cou••try hath many hauens & riuers, bu•• tha•• which makes it more delightful and commodious for the inhabitants, is the wa∣te•• of foure 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ri••ers, which comming f••om the tops of high mountaines, which are [ B] a••out the mi••des•• of the Island, runne diuers waies, for that Iuna b••nds towards the 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ Atti••••n•••• to••a••ds the West, Iacchie towards the North, and Naibus towards ••h•• South: ••o as the ••••lan•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••••portionably ••iuided into foure. There is to be seene in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••land a caue vnder a high mountaine towards the East, not aboue fiue hundred 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from the ••e••, whose entrie is like vnto the portale of a goodly palace; there they doe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 t••e noyse of violent streames which runne swiftly in hollow concauities for a great ••••ace and the noyse is so great, as it makes him that approacheth almo•••• dease for a time•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 these waters ioine together in a grea•• lake f••ll of dangerous shelfes. Moreouer there is another great lake which the ••ndians call Haguey gabon, and our men ••he Caspian sea: This lake hauing receiued a great number of ••iuers from all parts, looseth i•• selfe in a [ C] gu••fe; so as these ••pungious rocks receiue th•• sea water by certaine con••••its and caues vnder ground, for that they f••nd store of se•• fish there, ••nd th•• water is ••••••t. In the mid∣de•••• of this lake is the Island of Guarizanta v•••••• f••t for ••ishing: the ••••her lakes of this Island, although they b•• s••ss••e, yet are they sal••, There is also the lake of Magnano well knowne by reason of the good water: there is great aboundance of salt, for they draw 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the mountaines like christall. Besides all these lakes, there is a great riuer whose ••••••ers are salt, no••wi••••standing that many small riuers of fresh water do fall into it. This ••••••and doth also 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••old, and ••hey say that the Cab••nie•• mountaines haue mines so [ IIIIXX] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of gold, as 〈…〉〈…〉 ••here is great aboundance of sugar, cassia, ginger, ma∣••••••ke, the wo••d 〈…〉〈…〉 on. Before the comming of the Spaniards there were [ D] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hree kinds 〈…〉〈…〉: but now they haue many ••ame beasts, so as they tran••port an in••i•••••• number o•• ••i••es from thence into Spai••es there is Azur also.

¶ The Manners

THe In••ab•••••••••••• are n••••urally slouthfull and idle, they go all naked, and liue only of their fishing. Before that they had receiued our religion, they did beleeue that there was a first mouer of all things; but otherwise they were full of infinit errors. Since that they brought sugar canes thither, they haue made mills and built shops; so as the inha∣bitants at this day haue great trafficke, and by that meanes grow rich. [ E]

[ VXX] ¶ Cuba o•• Ferd••nand.

[ XXVL] ••VPon the Wes•• of Hispaniola this Island li•••• and that of I••maica lies vpon the South 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of it: it runs th••ee hundred leagues ••rom ••as•• to Wes•• and the greatest breadth is 〈◊〉〈◊〉 fiue leagues, but 〈◊〉〈◊〉 many places it is not ••wen••ie br••••d. There are six townes, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the chiefe is that of Saint ••ames, well knowne by ••••••son of the ri••er and port: 〈…〉〈…〉 that the other towns are not 〈◊〉〈◊〉 well peopled, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Hauana, which is most 〈…〉〈…〉 all the Island. The towne of sai•••• Iames is the Bishops seat. [ F]

[] ¶ The Q••••••itie.

••Bout this Island they ••••nd many dangerous shelfes, for that towards the North there 〈◊〉〈◊〉 great turning of water, and vpon the South part it is full of little rockes. This

[ A] region is hilly and full of forrests and riuers, and it hath many lakes of fresh water, and also of salt. Moreouer there are mines of gold in the mountaines and the grauell in ri∣u••rs is ••lmo•••• a•••• gold. There is a valley fifteene miles from Saint Iames so dou••••ed with great bowles •••• stone, as they seeme to ••aue be••ne set for pleasure, and yet they are na∣turall. Nee•••• vnto the Princes port there is a spring which doth cast forth pitch continu∣ally. The••e are many serpents in this Island.

¶ The M••nner••. [ XIXX]

[ B] BEfore the discouerie of this Island, the In••abitants t••oke delight to ••ame serpe•••• ••hey we•••• naked as in Hispaniola. Th•• people contented themselues ••ith that which n••••ure brou••ht ••orth, and they liued all in common.

¶ 〈◊〉〈◊〉.

AT this day, this Island which they ••all Saint Iames is scituated be••••ixt the [ XXVII] se••en∣teenth and eighteenth degree of ••••titude: on the East it hath Hispaniola, on ••h•• North Cub••, on the South the Islands of ••••in•• Bernard and of Cha••th••na, and v••on the West the land of Iuc•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or Fon••ure: it is ••••ftie leagues long, and about fi•••• and [ C] twentie bro••d, and it ••••th i•• c••rcuit o•••• ••••••d••ed and fiftie: It containes two townes, 〈◊〉〈◊〉▪ uille and O••••s••g••••: Se••ille is the ••hiefe, in which is the Abbey church, whereof Pete•• M••••tir Ang•••••••• Milanois w•••• prelat. D••••••ue sonne to Colombu•• ••••bdued this Island, and ••ade them ••••••••t••ie to the crowne of Spaine in the yeare 1509.

¶ The Qualitie and Riches.

THe ai••e i•• good, and the countrie ••e••till, feeding great numbers of cattell, by reason of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 waters and pastures, hauing many goodly ••ountaines which refresh them. T••ey 〈…〉〈…〉 are mines of gold. They do ••••so gather a great quantitie of cotton and ••••▪ [ D] ••••••. Th•••••• are many good ri••ers and lakes which abound with fish.

¶ The Manners.

THe ••••••••le in their manner of liuing are like to them of Hisponiola and Cuba, and yet some ••ay that they of Iamaica haue beene more cruell.

¶ The Islands of the Cannibals o•• C••ribes.

AL•• thos•• which stretch out in a double ranke from the East to the South of Hispani∣ola [ XXVIII] [ E] in vie•• of the firme land, they cal the Islands of Cannibals. The greatest part is 〈…〉〈…〉, but among those that are peopled, the chiefest is the Island of Saint Iohn, 〈…〉〈…〉 of the countrie call Boriquen, and it lies ne••re to Hispaniola vpon the East: it is 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hundred miles long, and seuentie broad, and it abounds in corne, fruit, cattell, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 also in gold, and there they find very good Gayac. The chiefe towne is Saint Iohn, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 there is a very good port: next to this Island, Cubaga is ••amous for the ••bou•••••••••••• of pearle they find there. The inhabitants of all those Islands are browne, 〈…〉〈…〉 haire they are cruell and eat mans flesh, thei•• a••rowes are poisoned, they 〈…〉〈…〉 of one p••••ce, which they call Canoes to go to sea in.

A DISCOVRSE IN GENERAL [ A] OF ••HE NEW WORLD.

¶ The Forces.

[ XXIX] ••He Estates of the king of Spai•••• at the New world are so great and powerful, as they need not to feare any enemie. The Spaniards haue good places in euery 〈…〉〈…〉 seised vpon the mouthes of riuers, of sea ports, of [ B] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of impo••••••••••••, & in a word of all places fit to command countries, ei∣••her abounding in victualls or rich in mines, or fit to keep warlike people & ••owns of con∣se••••en•••• in awe▪ towards the South, they haue not any enemie that can annoy them: to∣ward•• the Nor••h, they h••ue recei••ed some ••osse ••y the English, who haue lyen vpon that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to surprise their fleets, and to sack their sea towns. The greatest losse they haue 〈…〉〈…〉, whe••as si•• Francis D••ake sackt the town of Saint Dominico in 〈◊〉〈◊〉, & Ca••thagena vpon the firmeland. But this attempt of the English made the 〈…〉〈…〉 to prouide for the safetie of these Prouinces, which seeme to be 〈◊〉〈◊〉 towa••••••he Nor••h by na••u••e; ••irst by a great number of Islands which serue as a 〈…〉〈…〉 d••••en••e fo•• New Spaine, and ••ortifie it with many shelfes which cause di∣••ers [ C] c••••••ents, and among others with one current which is wonderfull swift, whi••h 〈…〉〈…〉 the g••lfe of Paria (where they haue called it the Dragons mouth) then passing betwixt Iucatan and Cuba, ••eturnes backe betwixt Cuba and the point of Florida, with such violence as a ship with all her sailes cannot passe. This current together with the di∣uersitie of windes, and other dangers at sea, will alwaies amase them that shall haue no port of retreat. Moreouer the king of Spaine (making vse of this benefit of nature) hath 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a fort of import••n••e to •••• built in an Isl••nd nere to the True Crosse, a towne 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vpon the ban•••• o•• Mexi••o, ••nd another •••• Hauana in the Island of Cuba right against 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the first 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from 〈…〉〈…〉 to auoid the current, and the se∣cond of meanes to mak•• vs•• ••f i•• ••oreou••r •••• hath caused an excellent good fort to be [ D] built at Saint Dominico, a towne which seemes to be made for to commaund that sea, by reason of the commoditie of the scituation. A••d to conclude, as the scituation of Italie seemes to haue beene made by nature to commaund the Mediterranean sea, so that of Spaine seem•••• to b•• ••ramed to ••ule ouer the Oc••an; and ••xperience teacheth, that the Spaniards are of a compl••ction f••t to endure all ••limats and countries.

¶ The Ciuil•• Gouernmen•• of the New W••rld.

IN all the New World th••re are ••wo Vic••roi••s, the one of New Spaine, who makes his aboad in ••he c••••••e of ••exico; and the other o•• Peru, who hath his residence at Lima. [ E] Of the•••• two 〈◊〉〈◊〉 P••••u ha••h gr••••t••st autho••i••ie; for that besides the greatnesse of pro∣ui••ces which are subiect vnto ••is gouernmen••, he may of late yeares dispose of com∣••••••ndaries that are void: the which the Viceroy of New Spaine may not do: but this is ••••••e to be d••s••••ed for ••h•• neighbo••hood of Spaine, for the beautie of the cittie of Mex∣••••••, and the ci••ili••i•• of the pro••i••••e.

I••stice is wh••••••y ••••••••ged by soue••aigne courts, whereof there be fiue in New 〈…〉〈…〉 Me••ico, Saint D••••••••ico, Gua••imala, Guadalajara; and Panama: Peru hath also 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hat is to say, at 〈◊〉〈◊〉 I••periall of Chil••, at Plata, Quinto, and at S. Foy in the N••w realme. The Spaniards and Indians haue recourse equally to these seates of Iusti••e, fro•• ••he which no man may appeale. The Spaniards (except the Marquis of [ F] Val∣lee, and some others) haue lands or people in fee; but this holds not, but during his life to whom it is giuen (and they be commonly giuen to conquerors) and to their eldest sonns, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••eir wiues sonne••, if they haue not any. These Lords exact from their subiects about 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••rownes for euery fire, and in recompence they are bound to prouide men that may

[ A] instruct the people in the Christian faith, and to serue in their Churches. The Spaniards liue most commonly seperated from the Indians, for that they dwell for the most part in townes, which they haue built, the which are all inuironed with walls of a square for••ie, wi•••• ••reat market places and straight streets: whereas the Indians keepe in the subu••b•• of ••he said townes, or in their ancient boroughs, where they haue a care of their cattell, trafficke, and mynes. When as the Commaunders heire, or his that holds land in fee, is dead, his subiects returne vnto the king; by reason whereof the lands and most impo••••••••••. Commaunderies belong to the crowne of Spain: and it is a thing worthie ob∣seruation that the Commaunders die most commonly poore, and seldome doth any one [ B] attaine to the age of sixtie yeares. They haue often attempted to obtaine these comman∣deries in pe••petuitie, and to this end haue offered great summes of money to Charles the fift, and to Philip the second: but, for that these kings did feare that those conquerors might eat the people to the bone and oppresse them, or else that these conquerors might o••e day reuolt, they would neuer giue care vnto this demaund.

¶ The Ecclesiasticall gouernement.

AT the New world there are foure Archbishopricks, one at S. Dominico, another at Mexico, the third at Lima, and the fourth at S. Foy in the New realme. The first hath [ C] three Bishops vnder him, that is, Port Rico, Cuba, and Iamaica. The second hath ten Bishops vnder him, that is to say, they of Tlascala in the towne of Angels, of Guayata, of Mechouacan, of Salisco▪ of Iucatan, of Gipe, of Fondures, of Guatimala, of Nicara∣gua, and of th•• True Cross••. The third hath nine Bishopricks, that is, of Cusco, of Pla∣ta, of Qui••o, of Popayan, of Panama, of Tucuma, of Paraguay, of the Imperiall, and of the Conception. The Archbishop of S. Foy hath vnder him the Bishops of Carthagena, Sancta Marta, and Margareta. There are at the New world fiue sorts of religious men, that is, of S. Francis, S. Dominick, S. Austine, de la Merced, and Iesuits; and besides these, some Carmelits which goe bare footed, and there are in all about fiue thousand re∣ligious m••n. There are also diuers Cloisters of Nuns. The Cures are for the most part •••• th•• h••••ds of the foure first religions, and they of S. Francis haue more than all the rest. [ D] The Iesuits haue no Cures, as they say, but in the land of Iulie. The Curat makes his aboad in the most commodious place of his iurisdiction, which is most commonly verie great: from thence he sends his substitutes into o••her places, sometimes to say Masse, and sometimes to teach the Christian doctrine; and for that the number of Priests is smal, the Pope hath giuen libertie to say two Masses in one day, in places that lie farre off: and the Curat is no•• onely bound to instruct the people in the faith and Christian manners, but he must also teach the children to read, write, and sing, and he must teach his pari∣shi o••ers to sowe corne, plant fruit trees, build houses, and liue together; so as these people who receiue spirituall and temporal goods from these religious men, do loue and [ E] ••u••••••nce them much. The commaunders, and the king in his land, giue an honest enter∣t••i••ement to the Curat, both for himselfe, and the seruice of the Church. The king giues ••o ••eri•• Bishopricke at the least two thousand crownes rent, but they grow soone rich. The Bishop of Mexico hath foure and twentie thousand crownes rent, he of Lima foure and thi••••ie, the Bishop of Cusco hath 70, he of Mechouacan twentie, Plata seuenteene, and Quit•• eighteene. The Indians are not admitted to the Communion but after long proofe; 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with more difficultie in Peru than at Mexico; and they doe seldome admit ••h••m to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 orders, by reason of their inclination to drunkennesse. They doe not com∣••••nly su•••••••• them to studie Philosophie, and much lesse Diuinitie. There are two 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a•• the New world, the one at Lima, and the other at Mexico. There are also two [ E] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in the same townes. By this diligence they haue made easie the conuersion 〈…〉〈…〉 of the Indians, both in Peru and New Spaine: and in the yeare 1584, 〈…〉〈…〉 of Lima held a Prouinciall Synod, where it was ordained, That they 〈…〉〈…〉 ••orme to instruct the Indians in the Christian faith, to the end that all 〈…〉〈…〉 and by that meanes preuent many errors.

Of the knowledge which the people of the New world haue of God.

[ XXX] THese nations (though barbarous) list vp their eyes to heauen in aduersitie and daun∣ger, and hold, that it is his dwelling place that gouernes all things. But it belongs not, but to the children of light to know that this soueraigne Lord is God alone. This na••urall instinct, and this knowledge of God, is more or lesse cleere in the Gentil••s, as they do more or lesse participat of reason, and of moral vertues. Among the people of the New world, the Chichimeques of New Spain, and certaine people of Brasil were most b••rbarous: these leading a sauage and brutish life, without commanders, without laws, without any forme of ciuilitie, or pollicie, shew not in their actions any discourse of rea∣son, but what they need for their entertainment; Sence in them doth darken the vnder∣standing, and passions blind the judgement: they doe not eleuat their thoughts aboue the earth, and they doe not thinke but of things that are present. So the neighbours to Brasil haue not any knowledge of God, nor of religion. But for that man cannot subsist without a support, it is necessarie that he which doth not relie vpon God, should make himselfe subiect, if not to false gods, at the least to southsayings, and such like vanities; and after this manner these Brasilians (although they do neither worship God not Idols) are as it were tyrannised by southsayers and co••sening Montebancks, and gouerne them∣selues by the prediction of future things. The people of S. Croix of the Mount, although they had no Idols, yet they worshipped the Deuill, not to obtaine any good from him, but to auoid some euill. They talke and treat with him, and presen•• vnto him diuers things, they poure forth their drinke to his honour, and drinke with grea•• ceremonies, not daring to touch the fruits of the earth vntill they haue offered the first vnto him. But there is not any thing wherein they submit themselues more vnto him, than in their hun∣••ing and fishing, which are the ar•••• and exercises wherewith they entertaine themselues. The Varays, their neighbour••, being in a manner mad, at a certaine time of the yea••e, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 furiously into woods and ••olitarie places, and with certain leapes and brutish how∣lings, call vpon one Candi••e, of whom they tell diuers follies, they go with this name in their mouthes, through Precipices and forrests, from wh••nce they can hardly retire themselues; they tread vpon burning coles, and snakes, and haue no harme. They haue knowledge also of seuen sorts of spiri••s, and doe reuerence them for feare of being bea∣ten or slaine, and they are also much giuen to southsayings. They carrie their arrows to southsayers, and according to their judgements, they either hold them for good and happie, and so keepe them, or for bad and vnfortunat, and so cast them away: but com∣ming to those people which are a little more ciuile, they of Cusco, and th•• inhabitants of Peru, confest a Creator of the Vniuerse, and a soueraigne Prince, whom they called Vira∣coca, and Pacacamac, that is to say, Creator of heauen and earth, and they did worship him in lifting vp their eyes to heauen. But they had no word answerable to the name of God, and euen at this day, they cannot say God, but in vsing the Spanish word. These things [] make it easie to persuade them that there is a soueraigne God, but not to let them know that there is not any other. Yet they exceed the auncient Greekes in vnderstanding, and in a certaine shadow of religion; for that although they place a soueraigne God, with a great number of others, yet they do not attribute adulteries, and other detestable vices, to their Viracoca, as the Greekes did to their Iupiter; but contrariwise they ascribe vnto ••im, high and maruailous things, by reason whereof they doe also call him Vsapu, that is 〈…〉〈…〉, Admirable. Next to the Viracoca, they of Peru did worship the stars; and for that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 them, there is not any whose vertue is more manifest than that of the Sun, they giue 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••he second place, and the third to the god of Rain•• and of things which are in∣gendred •••• th•• aire, but principally to the god of Thunder, for the terror he giues to me••. [ F] They did bele••ue that there were in Heauen all kinds of beasts, of whom depended the ••eneration and increase of troupes, and other beasts of their kind; and therefore they ••id beleeue that euery kind of beast had a star which did rule ouer it, the which they did ••orship, to the end that if it were a tame beast it should preserue it, and make it pros∣per;

[ A] and if it were venemous or wild, it should keepe them, and defend them from it. The Varays (with great howlings and strange motions of the body) did wo••ship the New Moone, and when it increased they cut their armes in many places, to the end that they might shoot straight, being their chiefe exercise: & they make incisions vpon their thighs and ••eg••, that they may run more swiftly, which done, they cast on them the ashes of those beasts which they hold to be swift: and in like manner the women cut their faces, thighes, and armes, then they paint them with blew which will neuer out. The Chianes, neighbour people to Saint Croix of the Mount, diuide the yeare into twelue moneths, ouer which they make twelue stars to rule, the which they worship, making certaine sa∣crifices [ B] vnto them, especially to those that rule during the time of haruest; they inuoke them and intreat them to be propitious and fauourable vnto them: they do also super∣stitiously obserue the singing of birds, and it cannot be spoken how much they abhor the shriking of an owle; whenas they heare any one, the old men come forth with their armes, and coniure them to be gon and not to hurt them; in the meane time the young men and women keepe within doores, least that this bird should presage some disaster vnto them. But they of Peru (to returne from whence we came) did attribute a diuinitie to the earth and sea, vnder the names of Pacacuma, and Mamacoca, and likewise to the Rainebow, and to euery thing that had any greatnesse or wonder in it; to trees, to the tops of mountaines, to riuers, to huge rockes, to beares, to snakes, to tigres, to the end [ C] they receiue no hurt from them. In their voiages they did cast and offer their old shooes, and such like things, vpon the mountaines, rockes, and in the high waies, to the end that they should giue them force & passage. They pulled the haire off their eyebrows, & offe∣red them to ••he Sun, to the Mountaines, to the Windes, & to other things wherof they did stan•• in feare. The Guacauilques made offrings to their gods of the teeth which they pu••••ed 〈◊〉〈◊〉. In Cusco they did great honour vnto a fox which they kept i•• their Guaca or Temple. At Manta (which is in the countrie of Port-Vieil) they did worship an Eme∣ra••ld of extraordinarie greatnesse and beautie, recommending themselues vnto it in their sic••••esse, and made diuers offerings vnto it. At Cassamalca they held for gods certaine stones of the bignesse of an egge, and some bigger: they were very superstitious to foun∣••ain•••• [ D] and running waters, and did wash themselues diuers times in them, to recouer th••ir health.

In the prouince of Cinaloa, which is beyond New Spaine, they hold that there is a Creato•• and Gouernor of the world, but they did not extend his gouernment and pro∣uidence to man, least he should restrain his free will: they did burne their dead men with∣out any ceremonie, or cast them into a pit which was six hundred yards deepe. They of M••chouacan had some knowledge of the beginning of the world, of the framing of man of the slime of the earth, and of the deluge (this last was common to them of Peru and Brasil) but with a thousand follies: they did beleeue that the gods aboue made the coelestiall things, and they below the terrestiall; and they appointed a mother to all the [ E] god••, as the Grecians made Cybilla. Euery art and trade had a peculiar god among t••em; and they did thinke that these gods had beene men of merit, who appeared to them of the countrie after their death, with diuers other practises of the deuill.

Of the Indians Idolatries towards the deceased.

THey of Peru did carefully preserue the bodies of their deceased kings, which were kept•••• Cusco, euery one in his chappell, wherof some had remained aboue two hun∣dr••d [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉: euery one of these left all his treasurers for the entertainment of the chap∣p••ll [ F] ••••ere he would be interred, and of those which should be appointed to attend and 〈…〉〈…〉 one of them caused his image of stone to be made in his life time, the which 〈…〉〈…〉 honour as himselfe, both whilest he liued, and after his death. In time of war and 〈…〉〈…〉 ••hey carried these images to obtaine victorie, and raine, and they made diuers 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••to them. It was a thing generally practised in Mechouacan, Peru, and the 〈…〉〈…〉 countries, at the death of the Inguas and others, to kill their best beloued

wiues and seruants, or to burie them quicke, to the end they should not want people to [ A] serue them: after diuers songs and dances they slue them, and these miserable wretches hold themse••ues happie to be so intreated. Some of the familiars or houshould seruants to the Ingua, and the Lords of the realme (for that they might not lie in the tombe) made certaine holes in those places whereas the dead bodie had been acc••stomed to pasle their time, hauing a conceit that the king passing that way, would carrie them to another life for his seruice. At th•• funerall of the Ingua they did sacrifice young children vnto him, and did paint his face with the bloud, drawing a line from one eare vnto the other: they vsed other ceremonies at the death of any of the common soft. They did set much meat vpon the graue, and did put gold, siluer, and other pretious things, in the mouth, bosome, [ B] and ha••ds of the deceased, giuing them new clothes, to the end they might be furnished for the other life; for they did b••leeue ••hat the soules of dead men went wandring vp and downe, and were subiect to hunger, thirst, cold and heat: and therefore they did ce∣lebra••e the end of the yeare, and did carrie thither diuers sorts of meat, and stuffes to clo•••• them Iohn de la Tour a (captaine to Gons••luo Pizarro) drew out of a tombe the value of fiftie thousand crowns in stuffes, which had been put there to that end. In Mechou∣acan, for that they beleeued that men did liue in the other world as in this, dying they made prouision not onely of victuals and apparrell, but also of other things belong∣ing to those exercises which they were wont to vse.

Of their Idolatrie to Im••g••s.

[ XXXII] THey of Peru are no lesse foolish about Idols of stone and wood; and for that they were moued to worship th•• deuils for the feare of ••arme which they did, or might do them, they did figure them in terrible shapes. The deuill spake in many of these Ima∣ges, and made answere to their Priests.

The Me••icans (besides their Images) did also worship liuing Idols. They tooke a priso∣n••r (and sometimes more) whom they thought fit for the sacrifice; they did attire him and trimme him vp like vnto the Idoll, to the which they would sacrifice, and they gaue him the same name: during the time of this rep••esentation, which continued many [ D] daies, and sometimes whole monethes, they did worship him, and did him as much ho∣nour as to the Idoll it selfe, and in the me••ne space he past the time merrily, and made good cheere; when he went through the streets, the people came flocking to doe him honour, offring diuers things vnto him; they brough•• children and sicke persons before him, that he might ••lesse them, and cure them; they suffered him to do any thing at his pleasure, onely by day he was garded by ten or twelue men or more, and by night he was shut vp in a ••••ge•• when the time of this comme die was expired, and that he was growne fat, they stew him for the sacrifice, and made a solemne feast among them.

Of their G••uco••s, & Templ••s.

[ XXXIII] THere was in Peru some Guacoes that were common to all the realme, and others that were priuat to euery prouince. There were three of greatest fame, the one foure leagues from Lima, the which was called Pacacama, whose ruines at this day doth shew ••he greatnesse thereof: the deuill spake in this place, and made answers to their Priests, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 most commonly wen•• in the night to ••onsult the Oracle, hauing their backes turned to 〈…〉〈…〉, the•• they bowe•• ••h••i•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉, vsing a vill••••ous gesture; so much doth the de∣uill 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in filthinesse: ••hey 〈◊〉〈◊〉 counsel•• of h••m, and he commonly answered with a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••nd piercing ••iss••ng, or wit•• 〈…〉〈…〉. The other Guaco was in Cus∣co, where 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a•• had p••t all the gods and goddesse•• of the nations that were sub∣iect vnto them, ••••g••ges of their subiection ••nd fideliti••, and euerie Idoll was entertained [ F] b•• the prouince, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a wondefull charge. Amo••g othe••s, the••e was the image of the 〈◊〉〈◊〉, of massie gold 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with such art towards the E••st, as when the Sun rising did 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vpon it, there w••s s••ch a light, by ••eason of ••he reue••beration of his beames, as it

[ A] doubled the light of the day. The third Guaco was in the Island of Titicaca, dedicated to the Sun, for that they said their countrie hauing beene long without any light, the Sun appeared sodainly in this Island, and gaue them day and light, by reason whereof the In∣gua buil•• a stately Guaco there. But the Mexicans exceeded them of Peru much in great∣nesse of Temples and ceremonies: there was one of the Idoll Vitzilpuitzli, with so great a Cloister about it, as eighteene thousand persons assembled there during their feast, to daunce; and this Temple was inuironed with a wall, made of great stones in forme of ser∣pents: there were foure doores turned to the foure parts of the world; and there was a way paued aboue six miles long, which answered to either of them. They did ascend vn∣to [ B] the Temple by a staire of thirtie steps, being thirtie fadome broad. Betwixt the staire and the Temple there was a little square place which was thirtie foot broad, with a row of trees and poles going crosse from the one vnto the other, whereon did hang the heads of such as were sacrifised. There were within the towne eight other temples of the same forme, but not so great.

Of Priests, and religious persons.

THe priests at Mexico were diuided into little, greater, and greatest of all, and these [ XXXIIII] were called Popes. Their perpetuall exercise was to cast incense vpon their Idols; the which they did at the rising, or setting of the Sun, at noone day, or at midnight. They did [ C] sacrifise in their temples euery one according to his degree. Besides the priests, there were monasteries of women; in Peru there was at least one in euerie prouince, in which there remained two sorts of women; for some of them were young virgins, and the other wo∣men of a ripe age, who were called Mamacones, and these did command and instruct the others. There was in euerie monasterie a gouernor, who commanded, and had power to make choise of such young virgins as he thought worthie of this place, for their beautie and grace, and these must be vnder the age of eight yeares. The virgins hauing l••••••ned the ceremonies of their superstition, and diuers things for the vse of life, they were sent v••to the Court, hauing exceeded the age of foureteene yeares, whereas some remained to se••ue in the Guacoes with perpetual virginitie, and some were reserued for the ordina∣rie [ D] s••crifises which th••y made of virgins, and for the extraordinarie which were made for the occurrents of the Ingua: and another part of them were giuen in marriage to the In∣guas ••insmen and captaines, or kept for himselfe. If any of them were found vnchast, they did 〈◊〉〈◊〉 burie her aliue, or put her to death with cruell torments.

The Mexicans had also a kind of religious women, whose profession continued but a yere, ••••d they remained in the Cloister of the Temple, or in certain houses, and they were call••d Th•• d••••ghters of penance. They did not exceed the age of thirteene yeares; they liued shut vp with chastitie; they swept the Temple, and prepared the meat which was set b••fore the Idoll, the which his ministers did eat. They did rise at midnight to pray, and fo•• p••nance they did cut the tops of their eares with certaine little kniues, and layed the [ E] blo••d vpon their cheeks. They tooke it for a signe of vnchastiti•• in these virgins, if the rat•• did gna•• any th••••g in their Guacoes, or came into them, and then they made a curious 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hich of ••hem had offended. Right against these virgins, there was a Conuent of young men of eighteene yeares of age, whom they called religious men: These carried certaine shauen crownes like vnto our Monkes, wearing the rest of their haire vpon their shoulders: they liued in pouertie, chastity, and obedience: they did serue the priests in the Guaco. There were also lesser or inferior Monkes appointed for manuall seruices, & base offices ••••ey went foure or six together, with so great modestie, as they durst not lift vp thei•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉; ••specially where there were women: they sought for almes in the ••owne, and if 〈…〉〈…〉 them not, they went into the fields and tooke what they could find, neither [ F] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 owners hinder them, or offer them any violence; and this libertie was giuen 〈◊〉〈◊〉, ••••r ••hat they liued poorely and of almes: at midnight they drew bloud from ••hei•• 〈…〉〈…〉 this life they continued during the whole yeare. But let vs now speake of the 〈…〉〈…〉 giuen incense to the Idoll about midnight, they did assemble altoge••he•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉, wh••re being set in order they did stab themselues into the logge, and rub ••hei••

temples with bloud, after which they did sticke the instruments which they had imploy∣•••••• [ A] to this effect in certain bag•• of straw, to the end that all men might see them, and know 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sharpe penance they did vndergo for the people. They did fast foure or fiue daies before their Idoll feasts. They obserued chastitie with so great rigour, as many of them did slit their genitories for that they would not breake it, and did many other things to make themsel••es vnable. They drunke not any thing that might prouoke them to lust.

Of Sacrifices.

[ XXXV] THey did sacrifice whatsoeuer they had good or goodly, to their gods; gold, siluer, ••orne, wax, and beasts. In Peru they did commonly sacrifice 100 sheepe a mone••h, but [ B] of diuers colo••rs, and with different ceremonies. They did sacrifice euery day vnto the sun a sheep tha•• was sho••••, the which they burnt being in a red shirt. They pulled off their eye browe•• and ••ffered them ••o the Sun. But there is nothing so horrible as the sacrifices of men, which they vsed in Peru, but more at Mexico. In Peru they did sacrifice children from the age of foure yeres vnto ten, and especially for the prosperitie of the Ingua in his enterprises of warre: and vpon the day of his coronation they did sacrifice two hundred young children. They did also sacrifice a good number of those virgins which they drew out of monasteries, for the Inguas seruice. Whe•• he was grieuously sicke, some man of qualitie, or some sorcerer (where of there were many) telling him that he was past hope of recouerie, they did sacrifise his sonne to Viracoca, or to the Sun, beseeching him that he [ C] would rest satisfied therewith.

But the Mexicans did not sacrifice any but such as they tooke in war; and to the end they might haue a great number, they did not care to subdue Tlascalla, a great towne neere vnto them. The man••••r how they in••rea••ed these wretches was after this sort: First ••hey made them kneel•• in order before the doore of the Temple, then went the Priest rou•••• about them with the Idoll in his hands, and shewing it to euerie one, he sayd, Be∣hold thy god▪ afterwards they were led to the place where they should be sacrificed: ••hen there appeared six of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Priests appointed for this ministerie, with so strange a ••ehauiour as they 〈◊〉〈◊〉 rather Deuils than men; two of them tooke the wreched sa∣cri••ise by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 feet, and two others by the armes, and a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 hold him by the throat; thus they [ D] laid him vpon a stone of a pyramidal forme, whose point was verie sharpe; then the so∣ueraigne priest did open hi•• b••est with a knife, and pulled out his heart, which he did first shew vnto the sun, offering vnto hi•• this heat and smoake, then he cast it at the Idols face; then kicking the bodie, i•• ••olled downe the staires, whereas they that had taken him in the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 diuided him, and made a solemne feast. The neighbour nations did the like in imitation of the Mexicans▪ In some feasts they vsed another kind of sacrifice: They tooke a slaue (and 〈…〉〈…〉) whom they ••lead; then some one of them couered himselfe with his 〈…〉〈…〉, he went through the towne, whereas euerie man was bound to gi••e 〈◊〉〈◊〉 something▪ ••his commedie, or rather tragedie, continued vntill the ••kin did 〈◊〉〈◊〉 vpon ••is 〈◊〉〈◊〉. Sometimes they did tie a slaue vnto a wheele of stone, gi∣uing [ E] him •• ••••••rd and •• ••a••gue••: he that would sacrifice him entred the field presently ••fter, with ••he same 〈◊〉〈◊〉 if the slaue suffered himselfe to be vanquished, he was instant∣••y sacrificed, but if he did vanquish, he was set free, and held for a great Captaine.

How the Deuill had counterfeited some Sacraments of the Church.

[ XXXVI] 〈…〉〈…〉, and ••lement Alexandri••u•• teach vs, That the Deuill to take from vs the 〈…〉〈…〉 of the incarnation of Iesu•• Christ, saigned many yeares before, 〈…〉〈…〉 by ••he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Po••ts, as for example, That Bacchus was twice 〈…〉〈…〉 and another of Iupiter▪ to blemish the diuinitie and humanitie of [ F] 〈…〉〈…〉 was borne of Pallas a virgin: that Hercules went 〈…〉〈…〉 with such like iuentions, to the end that men should 〈…〉〈…〉 of our Ladie, nor the descent of Christ into hel; 〈…〉〈…〉 oth•••• di••i••e wor••e••

[ A] At the New world he hath not made vse of Poets to this effect, but he himselfe hath impudently counterfeited the sacraments of the church, especially that of the Eucharist. For at Cusco the religious men of the Sunne made certaine cakes with the meale of maize and the bloud of white sheepe, which they did sacrifice that day, giuing a morsell to eue••y stranger that came at that time to the court, as a sacrament of confederation and vnion with the Ingua; and they, receiuing this present with great honour, protested that they would neither thinke nor do any thing against the Sunne nor against the Ingua; a••d that this meat should remaine in their bowells as a testimonie of the fidelitie and af∣fection which they had vnto the Sunne and the Ingua. This ceremonie was done twice [ B] in the yeare, in September and December: and they sent of these morsells to all the Guacoes of the prouince, to haue them distributed to the people.

But that which the Mexicans did was more remarkable. Two daies before the feast of Vitzilpuitzli, the religious men of that Temple made an Idoll of roasted maize, and the seed of an hearbe which they call Blite, mingled with honie, of the bignesse of that of wood which was in the Temple: afterwards they set it vpon a forme, and carried it with great speed through the fields, al the people following in procession, and then they retur∣ned to the Temple: after which, the virgins came attired in white, with garlands of flow∣ers and cer••aine peeces of past like vnto great bones, who deliuered them to young men that laid them at the Idolls feet: they termed these peeces, the flesh and bones of Vitzil∣puitzli: [ C] afterwards appeared the priests and ministers of the Temple in their ornaments, with garlands vpon their heads, and after them their gods and goddesses; who going about these peeces of past, sang and daunced: and by this meanes they remained conse∣crated, and were from that time held for the Idolls flesh and boanes:* 1.4 afterwards they performed the sacrifices of captiues, and then they stript the Idol, doing with these peeces as with other consecrated pasts, distributing them to the people, who receiued them with great reuerence, saying that they did eat the flesh and bones of their God.

The deuill had also counterfeited Confession, which the Papists make a sacrament: for that in Peru there were Priests appointed to heare confessions, in forme of great and lesse p••nitenciers, and in cases partly common and partly reserued to superiors. They [ D] held it a great offence to conceale any sin in confession, and if the Confessor discouered i•• not (for the which they vsed inchantments) they did beat the penitent grieuously vpon the shoulders vntill he had confessed himselfe. They went to confession in aduersitie, for th••t they thought their sinnes were the cause of it, and all the people confest them∣selues, whe••as the Ingua was sicke. The sinnes which they confest were all actuall, and especially, ••••orther, theft, adulterie, want of reuerence to the Temples and to festiuall daies, ill speech of the Ingua, and their obedience to him. The Ingua confest his sinnes ••ot to any P••iests, but vnto the Sunne, to the end he should tell them to Viracoca, then going into a running brooke, he spak these words: I haue confest my sins vnto the Sunne, thou riuer ••••••ie them into the sea where they may remaine for euer drowned.

[ E] They 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••so counterfeit the mysterie of the holie Trinitie, for that they did worship three Images of the Sunne, naming one Sunne the Father, another the Sonne, and the ••••••d the Brother. And in like manner they had three statues of Chuchille, which was ••he ••od of Thunder, and they gaue them the same names of Father, Son, and Brother.

T••e people of Saint Croix du Mont haue some causes which hinder marriage, and dis••••l•••• that which is contracted, and some wherein they cannot be seperated although i•• ••e vnlawfull.

Of the dispositions of the New World to receiue the Gospell.

[ F] GOd ••isposed the people of New Spaine, Peru, and other countries, to so strange [ XXXVII] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by diuers meanes: First, as to make easie the preaching of the Gospell, he 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the world vnder the Emperor Augustus, so he ordained that the Gospell should 〈…〉〈…〉 other world, when as the Empires of the Ingua at Peru, and the Mexicans 〈…〉〈…〉 we••e come vnto their height. And to shew how much the large bounds of

an Empire serues for the aduancement of the Gospell, I say first of all, that vnder a great [ A] Monarch we do commonly see peace and rest to flourish, and peace doth open the Ports of realmes, and the gates of townes for the commerce and communication of people, and by consequence for the propagation of the word of God. Peace makes learning, ver∣tue, ciuilitie, pollicie, good manners, and arts to florish, fit things to make a man more mild, and the Empire of one alone more capable to maintaine this peace: Whereas ma∣ny Princes breed disunion, from whence growes war, shedding of bloud, with the ruine of townes and people, and of vertue, faith, and religion. The greatnesse of an Empire ••ring•• this good with it, for the preaching of the Gospell, for that one language is com∣mon to many people, and is far dispersed; the Conquerors language extending it selfe [ B] with his dominion.

At the New World the Mexican tongue extended it selfe for the space of one thou∣sand leagues and that of Cusco had no lesse boundes: for the kings of Mexico and Pe∣ru h•••• no lesse care to extend their language, than their Empires; and although they vsed i•• these two re••lmes many languages, and much different among themselues, yet that of Mexico is eloquent and rich, and common to all New Spaine, and that of Cusco to Pe∣•••• as among vs the Latine, and among the Turkes, the Sclauonian in Europe, and the Arabian in Asia: so as it is sufficient for them that preach the word of God to learne one language, to passe through a countrie three thousand miles long, whereas otherwise they should haue need of fifteene or twentie languages. Besides the foresaid two languages, [ C] there are some others which are well vnderstood in many countries, as the Gorgotoque, and the Chanoise; but there is none more vniuersall than the Varayque: this is spoken in all Paraguay and Brasil; the Icatins vnderstand it, and many other people, almost from the strait of Magellan vnto saint Maria.

The third benefit which doth grow thereby, is that the greatnesse of the Empire drawes into one place people that are far scattered & dispersed, for you must vnderstand that in New Spaine and Peru, the people before they were subdued by them of Mexico and Cusco, liued like beasts, without commaunder, without law, and without communi∣tie; euery man planted himselfe where he thought best, and liued there with his familie: so they of Florida, some of the Chichimeques, they of Brasil, and the Varays liue at this [ D] day: they do often change their dwellings, and they remaine one day in one place, and the next in another: wherefore if they be not first drawne to liue together, and to stay their dwellings, they cannot be instructed in the word of God. The kings of Mexico and Cusco did free the preachers of Gods word of this trouble, for to the end they might the more easily rule the people which they had conquered, they would haue them liue together, and to this end they built townes and villages.

Finally, the greatnesse of an Estate and rule makes the people more ciuile, and courts do quicken their wits, and ripen their judgements, and the diuersitie of conuersation makes a man more polliticke and wise. The people of P••ru in the beginning liued in the mountaines naked, rude, and brutish, eating that which the earth brought forth, yea and mans flesh. Vnder the Empire of the Ingua, they did learne diuer•• arts, with ciuilitie: they [ E] did till and manure the ground, they did sowe and reape their corne and roots: they had care of mines of gold, siluer, and brasse: they did feed great troupes of catttell, they did sheare them, and made couerlets and cloth of the wooll, wherewith they did not only co∣••••r, but also adorne themselues: and besides this, they did build pallaces and houses of ••••••ortance, and also Temples. They had some forme of justice and reason, and some 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of lawes and ordinances, but otherwise alwaies full of brutishnesse, crueltie, confu∣sion 〈◊〉〈◊〉 disorder: vnder a great Monarch, the people grow ciuile, and practise humani∣tie, th•• Superiors learne to gouerne, and the subiects to obay and to put in execution that which ••••••••maunded. Wherefore ••iuil••ie being brought into the Estates of great [ F] Princes at America, did serue much to bring in the Gospell, for that it disposed the people to mildnesse, which is required in the life of a Christian, and without doubt, ex∣••••tience doth plainely shew vs the trueth thereof, for that the word of God hath more 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in one day in New Spaine and Peru, than it hath done in many yeares at Brasil,

[ A] Florida, Chichimeca, the Andes, and other countries, where it hath not found the like dispositions: For although they were capable of Christian doctrine, yet would it be difficult to maintaine them long in good estate, by reason of their perpetuall rolling vp and downe, and the vncertaintie of their aboad. It is certaine that the people of Brasil doe 〈◊〉〈◊〉 continue long in the faith, if they be not neere vnto the Portugals: for being far 〈…〉〈…〉, they return sodainly to their vomit, either by a natural inclination, or by the ••••••••••••sation of others. And for this cause the religious men which haue this charge, do ••••••••commonly thinke them fit for baptisme, vnlesse it be in some great sicknesse, or when they are verie old; for that then the passions which striue in them are more quiet, by rea∣son [ B] of the weakenesse of nature, and doe lesse darken reason and vnderstanding; and be∣sides they keepe them from all daungerous companie. The like may be said of the Chi∣chimecans, and such like nations.

Of some other dispositions.

THe foresaid reasons made easie the conuersion of America, as it were outwardly; but let vs speake of more liuely and important dispositions.

The first was the yoake of kings, and the insupportable burthen of the people: For the Ingua of Peru, and the king of Mexico did so charge their subiects, as they seemed rather beasts than men; and these princes would not be honoured like men, but as Gods. [ C] We may well guesse at their burthens by that which followes. The new king did not in∣herit any of his predecessors goods or treasure, but was forced to make a new house, and to furnish himselfe with gold, siluer, clothes, and such like, without imploying the means of the deceased, which were all appointed for the entertainment of the Guacoe, Chap∣pell, and house of the king deceased, who was presently put among the number of the gods. They erected statues vnto him, and ordained sacrifices, and his house was imployed from generation to generation in ceremonies, and other things inuented to his honour: so as the subiects were continually tro••••led to gather vp gold, and to dig in the mines, to make cloth, and to heape vp treasure, being in no sort eased by that which had beene formerly gathered together.

[ D] Besides, the people of Peru, vnder the Inguas, did sometimes build Tambes, and some∣times they made mountaines euen, and they filled vp valleis to make waies. Those Tam∣bes were certaine storehouses made in diuers parts of the realme, where they put their m••••••••tion for war, and victualls for the Inguas Court. Among other waies there were two made with the hand, which extended aboue one thousand fiue hundred miles in length; the one went by the mountaine, and the other by the plaine. We may judge of the toyle of these waies by the roughnesse of rockes, and the depth of the sand in the plaines, and yet they must vanquish these difficulties, with many others, without the vse of y••on instruments, and without carts or any beasts of burthen, onely with the force of ••••eir armes. It is much more easie to imagine what a toyle it was to cut great rockes, to [] ••r••nsport them from one place vnto another, to lodge them and to joyne them toge∣••her, without any helpe of yron, than to expresse it in words. It was yet a more insuppor∣••••••le thing for them of Peru, to giue their children to be sacrifised, for the recouerie and fo•• ••he suc••esse of the Inguas enterprises, and to be forced to burie themselues with their d••c••ased king, and the Caciques. When as Guaynacapa died, he had a thousand per∣son•• of his houshold slaine and buried with him, to serue him in the other world. The same ••ing hauing receiued some displeasure of a certaine people which inhabit betwixt Quito and Pasto, caused twentie thousand to be slaine, and to be throwne into a lake, w••ich fo•• this cause was called Ajaquarcoca, that is to say, a sea of bloud.

The reason which moued them of Peru to burie their families and riches with them, [] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 (•••• they say) for that in their opinions they did sometimes see them that were dead ••o walke in those places which they had most loued, hauing the same apparrell they had 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with them, and being accompanied with their families: by reason whereof 〈◊〉〈◊〉 themselues that in the other life they had need of seruice, gold, siluer, and 〈…〉〈…〉 furnished them the best they could.

The yoke of the kings of New Spaine was nothing more easie. Motezuma, who was [ A] the last, ordained, That none of the common people should looke him in the face vpon paine of death. When he went any journey, both he and his Barons were carried vpon a scaffold at pleasure, and the rest went here and there: He had diuers palaces, some for pleasure, others for mourning and affaires, according to occurrents: he had a great house with diuers par••itions, full of beasts, fishes, and foules of all-sorts, and for sea fish he had pooles of salt water, and for the others little lakes of fresh waters, with inestimable ser∣uice: so as the greatest part of his estate was imployed for his pleasures. For this reason those people were so readie to receiue the law of Iesus Christ, hoping to haue some case, and they that were most oppressed, much more than the rest. [ B]

What shall we say now of the insupportable yoke of the Deuill? We haue formerly discoursed of the religion of Mexico, and of the sacrifices which they made of men, whom they flew with so great crueltie, as it seemed the Deuill did not so much seeke the death of these poore wretches, as their torments in death: but I will not beare to speak of one thing which is remarkable. The Idoll Priests when as they saw a fit occasion, went vnto the king and princes, telling them their gods died for hunger, and that they should remember them: then the Princes sent Embassadors one vnto another, and gaue aduice of the necessitie wherein their gods were; inuiting them for this cause to make leuies of men to go to battaile, to the end they might haue wherewithall to feed their Idols. So they marched in order to the place appointed, and joyned battaile: hauing no other des∣signe [ C] but to take as many prisoners as they could, to be sacrificed. In Mexico the king could not be crowned bef••re he had made some enterprise, and brought backe a great number of sacrifices. The Mexicans were so opprest by the crueltie of their Deuils, and the multitude of sacrifices which they desired, as they could no more indure it, yet knew they not how to auoid it, if the light of the law of Iesus Christ (full of mildnesse) had not been offered vnto them: the which they receiued with great willingnesse and joy. They of Mechouacan hearing of the same of the Gos••ell, sent Embassadours presently to Fer∣nand Cortez, who had some few daies before made himselfe maister of Mexico, intreating him to send them his Law, and maisters to expound it, for that they were resolued to quit their owne, as insupportable and wicked. Ioseph Acosta reports, That the Spaniards on a [ D] time standing to behold the tragedie of those cruell sacrifices, a young man whose heart they had pulled out, being cast downe the staires of the Temple, said vnto the Spaniards, My maisters they haue slain me: the which bred a great horror and compassion in them.

Of some dispositions proceeding from the malice of the Deuill.

THe Deuill, maugre himselfe, did in some sort dispose these In••idels to the Faith, for that the wisedome of God is so high and profound, as it makes vse of euill for good, and turnes vnto his owne glorie; the meanes wherewith the Deuill seekes to darken his holie name. The greatest mysteries of the Christian faith, are those of the Trinitie, the [ E] Incarnation, and the Eucharist, the which doe surpasse all light of reason, all humane discourse, yea, and the intelligence of Angells. But the Deuill, seeking by his pride herein to crosse the maiestie of God, disposed the New world to the truth by his deceipts. The hardest and most austere points of Christian discipline to the sence of man, are, Con∣fession of sins, and Repentance: for that the Deuill exacted of these miserable wretches, greater austerities, than Iesus Christ enioynes to penitent sinners: the which is not strange, for that the Deuill is the tormentor of mankind, and Iesus Christ the physition, yea, the father. The kings of New Spaine, when as they tooke the crowne and possession of the realme, did sacrifice the bloud which they drew with great pain, from their armes and eares, to their Idols: for the Deuill sells nothing but for the price of bloud. He did [ F] also inure those poore people to pouertie, chastitie, obedience, and religion, as we haue formerly shewed: which made that the Councells of the Gospell did not seeme altoge∣ther strange vnto them.

[ A] Of some predictions of the future preaching of the Faith.

GOd meaning to dispose mankind for the comming of Iesus Christ, not onely gaue [ XXXVIII] prophets vnto the Iewes, but also Sybilles to the Gentilles; who did so plainly fore∣tell the comming of the eternal Word into the world, his life, and death, as their works did not seeme predictions of future things, but narrations of some euents past: by rea∣son wherof, Christians were forbidden (during the persecutions) to read Sibilles verses: our Sauiour hath not left the New world without the like helpe. There was in the Island [ B] of Hispaniola a king, whose name was Guarionex, who demanded of one of his Chemes (for so they called their Idolls) what should happen vnto his people after his death; and the Cheme answered, That within few yeares there should come into that Island men which should be apparrelled, and weare long beards, who should destroy the Idolls, with the auncient religion of the countrie, and all their ceremonies.

In the countrie which confines with the riuer of Plata a little before the comming of the Spaniards, there was one Oriquara, much esteemed among those nations for his good life, who inspired (as it is likely) by the holy spirit, ran vp and downe those countries, foretelling the comming of cer••aine men, who should teach a new religion, exhorting euery man to receiue it, and to leaue the pluralitie of wiues: and to the end that this his [ C] doctrine should be the better imprinted in their mindes, he put it into certaine verses, which they sing at this day.

In Acuzamilan Island ne••re vnto Iucatan, they found a crosse some two fadoms high, to the which they of the countrie had recourse, as to a celestiall and diuine thing, especi∣ally in the time of great drought, to obtaine raine for that which they had sowen.

In Mechouacan there was a priest of great authoritie and reputation among those people, who foretold them, that within a short time the Truth should be reuealed vnto them: he lead a Christian life (as some reported that had knowne him, and especially one that had serued him) for he did celebrate the Natiuitie of the resurrection of Iesus Christ, and to performe it with more deuotion, he withdrew himselfe some daies before from all [ D] affaires. With these and such like workes, he had purchased vnto himselfe so great a re∣putation of holinesse, and doctrine, as his words were held for Oracles: so as many which had conuersed with him, hauing heard the preachers of the Gospell, said that in their opinions they did not heare any new thing. And they were no sooner aduertised of the comming and progresse of Fernand Cortez in New Spain, but the king of Mechoua∣can went vnto him with all the flower of his realme, and made himselfe vassall to the Emperor: he required to bee baptised, and obtained from Cortez men to instruct his people in the Christian faith.

Moreouer all the people of Peru and New Spaine, did firmely beleeue the immor∣tallitie of the soule, and the paines of the wicked, and the reward of the good. Some [ E] among them (namely them of Chicora) held, That after death the soules did purge them∣selues in certaine cold places, and past afterwards into pleasing countries, where they did lead a happie and a contented life. They had knowledge (but very obscure, and full of a thousand fables and dreames) of the generall Deluge, and of the Resurrection of the dead, by reason whereof in Peru, whenas the Spaniards seeking the treasures which were buried with their Princes, and destroying the tombes, scattered the bones of the dead; they of the countrie were much grieued, and intreated them not to offer so great an out∣rage to the soules of their ancestors, for that they beleeued, that in dispersing these bones they should ••inder their resurrection.

[ F] Of diuers prodigies, and subiects, which made the entrie of the Gospell easie.

THe Spaniards entred Peru and New Spain with good meanes to extend, both their [ XXXIX] Estate, & the kingdome of God: for in New Spain the people of Tlascalla (which was the•• a mightie towne and well peopled) were at war with the Mexicans; and to fortifie

themselues, they entred into league with Fernand Cortez, who with the ayd of the Tlas∣callans [ A] preuailed in his enterprise, and subdued the realme of Mexico, both to Iesus Christ and to the Emperor, whose captaine he was. But they had seene strange prodi∣gies and accidents, which made way for the passage of the Gospell, with the wonder∣full amazement of king Motezuma. In the towne of Cholola they did worship a famous Idoll, which they called Quezalcoail: he told them plainely that there came straungers to conquer and possesse these realmes. At Tescusco their gods foretold, that many ca∣lamities did hang ouer the head of Motezama, and all the Mexican Empire; the Ma∣gitians foretold the same: whereat Motezuma was in such a rage, as he caused them to be put in prison; and for that they escaped easily and fled away, he slew their wiues and [ B] children, his furie was so great. Then bending all his cogitations how to pacifie the wrath of his gods, he commaunded that they should bring a goodly great stone into the citie, whereon to make his sacrifices: but notwithstanding that there were many assem∣bled to that end, and that they did their best endeuours, yet could they not moue it; and whilest they labored about it, they heard a voice which seemed to come out of the stone, and said vnto them, That they laboured in vaine, for it was impossible to remoue it: which being vnderstood, Motezuma commaunded that they should sacrifise where the stone had staied: they say that at that time there came forth a voice to this purpose; Haue I not told you that you laboured in vaine? and to the end you may be the better assured, I will suffer my selfe to be drawne some little space, then will I stay againe, and you shall not [ C] moue me: the which happened, for it fell in the end into a channell of water, and was af∣terwards found in his first place.

There did also appeare in the firmament a great flame like vnto a Pyramide, which they saw about midnight, then at the Sunne rising, and at nooneday; and this spectacle continued a yeare. They did see in the day time running from the East vnto the West, a Comet, like vnto a very long tayle of a beast with three heads: the Temple burnt, and there was no light seen neither within nor without, nor any thunder heard, nor any light∣ning seene in the aire, and although that multitudes of men ran to quench this fire, yet could they not do it: the fire did seeme to come out of the very walls, and it encreased by casting on water, vntill all was consumed. The lake began sodenly without any apparant [ D] cause to boile with such violence, as the neere buildings fell to the ground. There were lamentable voices heard, as of a woman in labour and in great ex••remitie; which voice spake these words, Alas my children, the time of your ruine is come, whether shall I lead you that you perish not quite? There were diuers monsters seene with two heads, which being carried before the king vanished away. The fishers of the lake tooke a bird in big∣nesse and colour like vnto a Crane, but of a forme which had neuer beene seene, the which they presented vnto the king, who was much amased.

This beast had vpon the top of the head a certaine crest like vnto a looking glasse: which Motezuma beholding, he saw the firmament and stars at noone day, whereat he was much astonished; then viewing it againe, he saw armed men come from the East, who fought furiously, and made a strange slaughter of those that incountered them: [ E] whereat being much troubled, he assembled his Diuines, who were also much distracted and could giue him no reason for it, whereupon the bird vanished away. At the same time there came vnto Motezuma a peasant who was generally held to be an honest true dealing man, who said vnto him, that as he was sowing his field, an Eagle of extraordina∣rie greatnesse tooke him vp sodenly and did him no harme, but carried him into a caue, where he heard one say: Most mightie Lord I haue brought thee him, whom thou com∣maundedst me; then without sight of any man ••e heard a voice which directed it selfe vnto him with these words, Doost thou know that man which lies vpon the ground? and then looking downe he saw a man in a sound sleepe hauing royall habiliments, flowers, [ F] and a perfume which burnt by him, according to the manner of the countrie: The peasant taking courage, answered, Mightie Lord, this seems to be our great king Motez••∣ma: Thou saiest true (replied one) behold how soundly he sleeps, and yet there are strange accidents and great miseries which hang ouer his head; it is now time that he receiue

[ A] punishment for so many offences which he hath committed against God; take this coale of perfume which burnes in his hand, and set it to his nose, and thou shalt see that he hath no feeling: and for that the Peasant durst not well approach, the voice said againe vnto him, Feare not any thing, for I am much greater than he, and wil keepe thee from harme: then resuming courage, he tooke the coale and set it to Motezumas nose, who had no fee∣ling: Now, said the voice, for that thou seest how soundly he sleepes, go and awake him, and report to him all that hath past. And at the same instant, the Eagle tooke the peasant and raising him vp into the aire, he carried him to the place where he first tooke him.

Besides these things, you must vnderstand, the Mexicans had an opinion that in former [ B] times a certaine great Prince, whom they called Topilchin, had abandoned them, and that he should returne againe to comfort the••. The newes of the comming of Cortez vpon the Easterne coast of New Spaine, being come vnto them, they did all beleeue that their great freind and lord Topilchin was returned according to his promise: They there∣fore sent fiue Embassadors vnto Cortez, who were men of qualitie, with many rich pre∣sents: th••se men being come to the Spaniards, told them, That they knew well that their lord Topilchin was returned with them, and that his seruant Motezuma had sent them to visit him, and to kisse his hands. Cortez making vse of this good occasion, fained himselfe to be Topilchin, and accepted the presents and complement: He could not wish a fitter meanes and opportunitie to bring the Gospell and the name of Christ into this realme. [ C] But it seemes that God would not haue the truth of his Gospell brought in by any coun∣terseiting, and that the sins of these people, especially the Idolatrie, the crueltie of sacri∣fices, and the pride of Motezuma, opposed themselues to so peaceable a manner of change in these estates: hence grew so many reuolts, bloudie battailes, ruine of townes, and losse of men of either side.

The Spaniards in like manner entred Peru with as fauourable an occasion. Gu••ynacapa, Ingua of Peru, had two sonnes, Guacar, and Attahualpa (whom others call Attabalipa) of which Guacar or Guascar was the lawfull successor to his father, and as such tooke possessi∣on of the realme: but his brother made war against him, and tooke him: whereat his sub∣iects being wonderfully discontent, and hauing not power sufficient to deliuer him, they [ D] made (according as they had beene accustomed in necessities) a great and solemne sacri∣fice to Viracoca, beseeching him, that seeing they were not able to free the Ingua their lord, he would send men from heauen to set him at libertie. Liuing thus in great hope, they heard news, That certain strangers being come by sea into Peru, had put Attabalipa to rout at Cassimalca, and had taken him prisoner: so as imagining that these men (this was Francis Pizarro and his companions) were come thither, by reason of the great sacrifice which they had made to Viracoca, they called them Viracoques; a name which remaines vnto the Spaniard to this day, as to men descended from heauen, and sent by God. Wherefore, as God opened a passage for the Spaniards at New Spaine, by the dis∣cord of the king of Mexico, and the common-weale of Tlascalla, and by so many prodi∣gies, [ E] as happened during the raigne of Motezuma: so he made them a way into Peru by the discord which was betwixt the sonnes of Guaynacapa, and by the successe of their sa∣crifice; by reason whereof the Spaniards were held the children of God, and men descen∣ded from heauen.

Of the Ordinance or Decree of Pope Alexander the sixt.

Alexander the sixt hearing of the discouerie of so many new lands, and seeing that the Spaniards made shew to haue a will to extend religion, as much as their estate; he first of all bound the kings of Spaine and Portugal, to haue a speciall care to the conuersion [ F] of those nations; and afterwards, to incourage them all he could to so good and generous a worke, and to take away all occasion of debate betwixt these two kings, he diuided the enterprises of these two nations, by that famous line of partition: and to preuent all kinds of pretensions of other princes, who had not beene ingaged in the charge nor paine, he forbad them all in generall to enter within the said bounds. But Alexander had no more

authoritie to dispose of the New world, nor to giue vnto them the kingdomes which had [ A] neither beene discouered nor conquered, than his successors haue had sence to a••rogate vnto themselues power to depose lawfull kings and princes from their crownes and estates.

What made the conuersion of the Indians easie.

[ XL] THere was neuer countrie whereas the Gospell did sooner flourish than at the New world, for that whole countries were conuerted, and one Frier of the order of Saint Francis baptised in many yeares about foureteene hundred thousand in New Spain: and some write, That there were ten millions christened in fiue or six yeares, others say, but [ B] eight. The souldiers did helpe much in this sodaine progtesse of the faith; for that al∣though there be none more vnfit to bring in pietie and religion than souldiers, and that in the ••oyse of armes the voice of ciuile lawes is not heard, and much lesse of the gospell, (which is full of mildnesse) and holinesse, yet the libertie and nsolencie of souldiers did much assist the preachers for the ruining of the Idols and Temples in New Spaine, and Peru. Our nature is such, as it cannot subsist without religion, nor without a place where to exercise it; so as if she hath no knowledge of the true religion, she abandons herselfe to superstitions; and if she wants holie places made with the hand, she seekes God vpon mountaines, or in caues. The Indians being wonderfully giuen to the adoration of their gods, both by nature and custome, remaining now without Idols, and without Guacoes, [ C] for that the furie of souldiers and the violence of warre had broken downe and ruined all; they went easily to Churches, and did accommodate themselues to the religion whereunto they were inuited by Christian preachers, and the rather for that it was much more mild than their old Idolatrie: for as a streame finding the ordinarie passage stopt, turns easily his course to that place whereas they haue made a new channell; so man not able to performe his accustomed voyage, makes one like to it, or that approacheth neere: and the Indians hauing no more their Idols, nor their accustomed places of deuotion, did easily change the way of their losse to that of health, idolatrie to pietie, and the bondage of Sathan to the seruice of God. Some politicians dispute, Whither he that makes new conquests should make such changes sodainly, as the Spaniards did at Peru and Mexico? [ D] or, Whither he should doe it by degrees, like vnto the Roman Emperors? But this que∣stion may be easily resolued, for that whereas a conquest is made with a great aduantage of fortune, by meanes whereof they surmount all difficulties, in that case they may take away all lets at one instant; or else when they haue not forces sufficient, and wheras there wants power, they must vse art, and win that by opportunitie and time which they could not effect by force. The Turke, for that he executes his enterprises with great aduaun∣tage, hauing once obtained a victorie, and made himselfe maister of a towne or realme, he sodainly giues it what forme he pleaseth, and rootes out the princes and men that are great either by prerogatiue of bloud, or by greatnesse of authoritie; he depriues the people both of goods and libertie, conuerts townes into villages, palaces into cottages, [ E] Churches into Mosques or stables; and to be short, he makes himselfe absolute maister of their goods and persons. But Christian princes, for that they doe not execute their en∣terprises with so great forces, follow another course, which requires more time and pol∣licie. But returning from whence we parted, the Indians hauing neither Idols nor temples whereunto they should flie in their necessities, according to their custome, they came easily to the Christian churches which they had before their eyes, and without any great difficultie imbraced the faith which was preached vnto them. The Guacoes of Peru we••er••ined by the furie of the souldiers, and rage of wars; and the most famous of these Gua•••••••• were those of Pacacama, foure leagues from the towne of Kings, whereas the deuill ma•••• answer to that which was demaunded of him. There was another at Cusco, [ F] wheras they saw (as in a Pantheon) all the gods of the prouinces and nations conquered by the Inguas, as hostages of their fidelitie: There was in the same towne aboue foure hundred other Gua••••••••. But in New Spaine, the ruine of Idols, and of their houses, proceeded not so much from the custome of warre (whose propertie is to wast and de∣stroy)

[ A] as from the wisedome and zeale of Fernand Cortez which conquered it, who com∣maunded his Captaines and Lieutenants to ruine all the Idols and Temples: so as the Indians not able to go where they had beene accustomed to doe euill, were easily drawn to those places where they might doe good.

¶ Of hinderances in the conuersion of the Indians.

HAuing shewed the meanes whereby our Lord aduanced the faith and preaching of his word in America, it is fit to speake something of that which was opposit to this [ B] aduancement. One thing which did much hinder this spirituall plantation at the New World, was the bad opinion which they had in the beginning of the capacitie of those people, for that partly, for their pouertie they were contemned, and partly for their rude∣nesse of behauiour they were ranked with beasts of burthen, especially by the souldiers, who were accustomed to do all things with violence, and to make vse of all pretextes (be they neuer so vaine, weake, and impertinent) yea there were some amongst them which had no desire to see the Indians conuerted, least they should be bound to intreat them more mildly after they had receiued baptisme. But the greatest let of their conuersion proceeded from the Spaniards themselues, first from their Priests and Friers, who did not seeke to win them by doctrine and good example, as Christ and his Apostles had [ C] taught them, being dissolute themselues in their liues and conuersation, and giuen to all vices and disorders: neither did they instruct them in the faith, or take knowledge of their liues, but forced them to be baptised, as some of their owne orders and profession haue written, to their shame and reproach: whose manner of preaching was to send sorth a proclamation enioining all men vpon paine of confiscation of life, lands, libertie, goods and all, to acknowledge God, the Pope, and the King of Spaine, of whom they had neuer heard. These with many other detestable courses of churchmen, made a Franciscan Fri∣er to exclaime openly, That there was neither Priest, Monke, nor Bishop good at the In∣dies, whose ends were onely gaine. The second let was, by reason of the auarice of com∣manders, and crueltie of the souldiers, which were most horrible and inhumane, whereof [ D] many of their owne nation haue written large treatises: these courses caused the Indians to conceaue an implacable hatred against the faith, being incensed at the Spaniards cruelties. It seemed that this manner of proceeding against these miserable wretches was iustifiable, by reason of the detestable vices and sinnes wherein they were plunged, es∣pecially for their Sodomie, Idolatrie, and eating of men: and the matter proceeded so far, as for the said three vices the Caribes or Canibals were giuen for slaues; and this edict was extended (by the aduice of Frier Thomas of Ortis and some others) to al the rest, in the time of the Emperor Charles the fift in the yeare 1525, by reason whereof the inso∣lent souldiers (who naturally haue no measure) seeing themselues fauoured by the coue∣tousnesse of their Superiours, and counselled therein by religious persons, grew more [ E] outragious, and burst forth like a furious torrent which swells with a sodain raine and snow. Couetousnesse is by nature vnreasonable and cruell, neither humane, nor diuine lawes can restraine it, no not the feare of death, nor of Hell it selfe: What shall she then do to souldiers, to whose discretion they haue abandoned a feeble multitude? and what shall they do in those places whereas being far from their Prince, they see themselues ma∣sters of all things? To conclude, the countrie was in a manner vnpeopled by the barba∣rous and butcherly crueltie of the Spaniards, and by the seruile workes whereunto they forced them, for many poore Indians perished in the mines of C••bao, in the fishing ••••r pearle at Cubaqua, and Tiraquei, and in the seeking of Emeralds at Saint Martha, [ F] and in other workes of the countrie. Many found these things vnworthie, and it was a great burthen of conscience to some men of vnderstanding, so as some did write to the Emperour Charles touching this subiect, and others being come to court, did treat with him and his councell of the Indies.

The Emperor who was both iuditious and religious, hearing of these inconuenien∣ces and disorders in his Estates, and how badly they intreated them of the countrie, de∣siring

to remedie it, and to discharge his conscience, he propounded the matter in [ A] coun∣sell, where there assisted men that were excellent in pietie and doctrine; by whose adu••ce he decreed in the yeare 1543, that no man should presume to imploy any Indians in their mines, to fish for pearle, nor to beare any burthens, but in cases of necessitie, and then they should pay them for their paines: that the tributes which the Indians were to pay vnto Spaniards should be taxed, and that all they of the countrie which should be freed by the death of Spaniards, who were then their Maisters, should remaine immediatly subiect to the crowne of Spaine, and that neither Bishops, Conuents, nor Hospitalls should haue any Vassalls in America: with these ordinances and some others, the busi∣nesse was reduced vnto those termes, as the Spaniards were all without Vassals, which [ B] was the cause of a war which followed, and of an open rebellion, whereof Pizarro was the head, in which the rebells flew Blasco Nugnez de Vela, Viceroy of Peru: to pacifie these disorders, the Emperour sent the Licentiat Gasca to Peru, a man very circumspect and wise, who furmounted force by his dexteritie, and furie by pollicie; he defeated the rebells in battaile, and pacified all things by the taking and death of Pizarro: since which time, matters of religion and gouernment haue been better mannaged.

¶ Of the diuersitie of barbarous people, and of the manner of preaching the Gospell.

[ XLI] WRiters giue the name of barbarous to people whose manners stray from reason, [ C] and from the common kind of liuing; if this definition were true, the name of barbarous (touching the second part) would agree more sitly to the Grecians and La∣tines, than to other nations: for if we shall call that manner of liuing common which most men lead, and if we shall call them barbarous which stray from it, seeing that the Grecians and Latines haue liued otherwise than the rest, they should rather be termed barbarous: Let vs therefore say that they are to be held barbarous, whose manners and customes stray extraordinarily from perfect reason; which happens either by fiercenesse of courage, by ignorance, or by rudenesse of manners: Fiercenesse is a kind of brutish∣nesse which hath foure degrees: the first, is of them that haue not any knowledge of Di∣uinitie, or religion; and these are of many sorts, for that some liue without any God, [ D] and yet giue themselues to inchauntments and sorceries; and it is a strange thing, that they, which neither know a God in heauen, nor vpon earth, yet submit themselues to sorcerers and inchaunters: wherein they are like vnto certaine horses, which being ter∣rible by nature, not fearing either yron or fire, will yet be restie, and start at the noise of a cart or some such like thing: such are the Chichimeques, and they of Brasil: the second sort▪ is of those which haue some forme of religion, or rather superstition, but without any ground or probabilitie, being more like to fables and dreames than to discourses of reason: such were the people of Hispaniola, and such are at this day the inhabitants of the Islands of Salomon: the third, is of those which worship diuers gods and idolls, and yet doe not acknowledge one Soueraigne Prince and Creator: the fourth, is of those [ E] which hold the Creator of the world to be the Soueraigne, but not the onely God, as they of Cusco: They of the first and second kind haue no forme of ceremonies, or else they haue them without solemnitie: they of the third and fourth haue them lawful, firme and solemne, as the Mexicans, and they of Cusco.

The second degree of brutishnesse consists in feeding, and this is after two sorts: some are ••rutish, for that they sow not, nor haue any care of tillage, but eat, like beasts, that wh••ch the earth doth produce of it selfe. And for that our complexion is according vnto ou•• breeding, it followes of necessitie, that a sauage breeding will haue a sauage nature and dispo••••••••on▪ Others are brutish, for that they feed vpon mans flesh, either indifferent∣ly or onely of their enemies taken in war, as they of Popayan and of Mexico: In the [ F] countrie of Popayan they did plant before their houses the heads of such as they had ••••uoured vpon great canes, for a shew of their crueltie and horrible brutishnesse: in ••••••er places hauing eaten their enemies, they did fill their skins with ashes, and did hang

[ A] them on their walls: they did trim their faces with wax, putting a launce or an arrow in their hands, which was a horrible spectacle, and this was their tapistrie. In some places they persuaded themselues that they would cha••e the Spaniards out of the countrie through ••unger; but victualls not onely failing the Spaniards, but themselues by this neglec•• ••he eating of mans flesh hath beene brought in of late yeares among them of Ara••••••▪ where it had neuer beene. But there is nothing more prodigious than that of ••he valley of Not, vpon the confines of Popayan: The Caciques of those places went in to the enemies countrie to hunt for women, bringing away as many as they could; they kept them onely to haue children, whom they deuoured being twelue or thirteene [ B] yeares old. In the valley of Guaca they married their prisoners to their kinswomen, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the end they might haue children to eat, and afterwards they did eat their slaues when they were no more able to ingender.

The third degree of brutishnesse consists in nakednesse, which is of many kinds. For some hauing no feeling of honestie (which was the first reason which moued Adam to couer himselfe) do not hide their priuie parts; others couer them in some sort, but for the ••est they go naked; others are clothed onely from the nauell vnto the knees. Some although they shew their nakednesse in all or in part (for that they vse not any garmenes) yet they paint their bodies of diuers colours to make themselues faire or terrible, and they carrie stones of little or no value fastened to their lips, nose, and eares, as they of [ C] Brasil doe. Some are altogether couered, but with the skins of wild beasts or of Seales; the which notwithstanding doth not argue so much brutishnesse as rudenesse of the people.

The fourth sort consists in the habitation, which is diuers. The most barbarous haue no other dwelling but in caues or hollow trees, and in that which defends them from the wind, cold, and raine, without any industrie. They passe the day whereas they find meat, and sleepe whereas night surpriseth them. They haue a certaine kind of pollicie; for hauing no certaine aboad touching the place, yet haue they it setled concerning the forme; so liue the Tartarians vpon their chariots couered with felt, and the Arabians in their Adiuares: the first attaine to the perfection of pollicie, who not onely haue cer∣taine [ D] aboads touching the forme, but also for the place; and the others liue in townes, villages, or houses dispersed. Betwixt these three kinds of habitation, there is this dif∣ference, that the first seeke their food whereas necessitie and occasion doth lead them; the second lead cammels with them, or some other kind of beast, of whom their liues depend, who change their aboad according to the commoditie of pastures which they seeke; the last being stayed touching their aboad in one place, draw all their victualls and necessarie commodities thither. Among the Arabians, some liue in the open field in their Adiuares, and these retaine the name of Arabians: the others liue in townes, and they are called Moores. In like manner some Tartarians liue in fields, and others in townes, as they of Zaquetay; and yet both the Arabians and Tartarians which campe [ E] after this manner, hold themselues more noble than the rest. The fift sort of brutish∣nesse consists in gouernement. For some being altogether barbarous, liue without any lawes or commaunder, either in peace or wa••re; some others haue neither laws nor com∣maunders in time of peace, but onely in occasions of warre: others haue in peace and warre, and these gouerne themselues in forme of a common-weale, as Tlascalla, and Chiololla; or by way of a monarchie, which comes by election, as it did in New Spain; or by succession, as in Peru: They are barbarous which gouerne themselues according to the two first sorts. And vndoubtedly we must confesse that at the New world the first inhabitants were in the beginning without any forme of gouernment, but by little and little some men more capable than the rest, persuaded their countriemen to liue toge∣ther, [ F] and to build themselues lodgings, first of the bows of trees, then of great wood, and in the end of earth and stone. From this mutual communication grew laws, & arts, which are the ornaments of mans life. Touching nourishment, the first art was breeding of cat∣tel, the which was much vsed and esteemed in Peru, whereas they made great account of the increase of their troupes: They did not sacrifice any female beasts, neither did they

〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••hem, or take them in their hunting: and if they found any cattell that were scab∣bed [ A] ••r sicke, they buried them quicke, least they should infect the rest. The art of spin∣ning, weauing, and making of cloth to cloath and adorne themselues withall, was as it were a branch springing from the art of gouerning their troupes. Tillage came after∣wards, and first that which hath care of corne, then they busied themselues about fruit and trees. In the end followed archi••••cture and the building of houses, first of wood, then of earth, and last of all, of stone and marble, whereof they of Cu••co and Mexico had knowledge, but the last more than the first: and although both the one and the other made exc••llent buildings both for greatnesse and state, yet could they not make any vaults; notwithstanding they had wit and art sufficient to make admirable bridges, of a [ B] verie we••••e substance, to passe ouer great and deepe riuers, for they make them of a cer∣taine kind of reed, which they call Totora, and also of straw, the which (for that it is light) ••••••••es not: they c••st vpon these bridges much reed and such like matter, and fast∣••ing them ••o either side of the riuer, both men and cattell passe ouer safely. There is one of these bridges, being three hundred foot long, vpon the channell of the Lake of Cu∣cuy••••, which is without bottome. Trafficke is a companion to husbandrie, by meanes whereof we doe interchange our commodities one with another: the greatest traf∣ficke which they haue discouered at the New world hath beene that of Salt, Cacao, and Synamon, other arts and industries sp••ong vp afterwards by degrees. The last are lear∣ning and sciences, especially speculatiue, as the fruits o•• peace, safetie, idlenesse, and [ C] aboundance: and therefore humane sciences flourish in peaceable townes, and among men which liue at their ease; and the speculatiue are refined in religious houses and cloisters: for these require attention, and are nothing pleasing nor popular, as eloquence, poetrie, and such like.

Hereby we may comprehend that barbarousnesse carries with it an incapacitie of ce∣lestiall things, for two reasons, that is to say, by reason of brutishnesse, and stupiditie: The first raigned in Chichimeque, Brasil, and among the Caribes; and the latter in the Islands of Barlouent and Salomon, in the valleis of Peru and other places: wherefore religion is not to be gouerned after one manner in all places. They must proceed with the Canniballs and others which deuoure mans flesh indifferently, as with the enemies [ D] of mankind, or madmen; they must first make them capable of reason and humanitie, and then instruct them in vertue, and the Christian faith. Neither is it impertinent to vse force and armes, to the end that they might know that they are men, and then teach them the Gospell. Aristotle saith, That such men should be taken as beasts, and tamed by force. The neighbours to these people are those which abstaine from mans flesh, but yet go naked without any shame, for that there is not any thing that doth more distinguish a man from a beast than shamefastnesse, for the which Adam couered him∣selfe, first with fig leaues, and then clothed himselfe with skins. Yet it is not lawfull to vse violence and the sword to these men; but rather a restraint, neither must they teach them Christian doctrine, before they learne bashfulnesse and honestie. Others haue no [ E] need of force or violence to retire them from barbarisme, but rather conduct and dire∣ction; for that they are not wild and brutish like vnto Wolues and Tigres, but simple and dull like vnto sheepe, and beasts of burthen, and these haue more need of threats, ••han of blowes, and of feare, than of force, for that fawnings and flatteries preuaile little with them. But for that neither the one nor the other perseuer in the faith once re∣ceiued vnder their naturall prince, and for that both Princes and subiects returne cas••ly 〈◊〉〈◊〉 idolatrie; it is needfull that they be vnder the gouernement of a Christian Prince, which may haue a care to maintaine both the people and their lords in their dueties and in the faith: for that as God giuing the forme to naturall things, doth presently fur∣nish them with those things which shall follow; so giuing vnto his deputies and mini∣sters [ F] the precept to teach the truth to euerie creature, he doth also giue them the autho∣ritie to vse fit meanes to make easie the conuersion and preseruation of such as are con∣uerted. And herein I find no cause of doubt or scruple, so as they exclude ambition and ••ouetousnesse from this care.

[ A] The conuersion of the New World began by armes and victories, and was followed by preaching; and now it must be continued, in adding vnto the preaching the authori∣tie of magistrates and gouernment. The Apostles did purchase authoritie to the Gos∣pell by the greatnesse of miracles, with the which they did confound the arrogancie of the Ie••••s, and the hautinesse of the Gentiles, for that the Iewes were accustomed to see prod••••ies, and things aboue the course of heauen, and the force of nature. Contrari∣wise 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Grecians were puft vp with an opinion of their learning and wisdome: and therefore for that it was not fit for the messengers of Iesus Christ to incounter them with affected words and eloquent discourses, or that the worlds conuersion should be [ B] attributed to humane reason and pollicie; the Apostles did conuict them by miracles, and workes impossible to the force of man, by meanes wherof they made them see, That the God which they preached was aboue Nature, and by consequence much aboue their wisedome: and yet they found some difficultie to beleeue that Iesus Christ crucified and dead, was he by whose vertue they did all those miracles; for that the crosse was a scan∣dall vnto the Iewes, and held as a folly by the Grecians. But at the New World, for that there were neither Iewes which might remember Moyses, and the miracles which God ••ad done by his meanes, nor Grecians who esteemed not any thing but what was aboue their knowledge; being inhabited by people that were either brutish or dull, there was not any need of miracles, but of humane helpe, with the which these people might be [ C] brought to the vse of reason; for that hauing attained thereunto, they did speedily im∣brace the truth, the which was simply propounded vnto them by their preachers, or by the maisters of the Christian doctrine; for that the light of the Gospell is so sweet and pleasing of it selfe, and the yoke of Iesus Christ so light, as it hath no need of miracles to make men desire it: neither was there euer countrie whereas the gospell was more spee∣dily receiued at the first, than at the New World, of which sodain conuersion there were many reasons; but the chiefe was the bad estate wherein the inhabitants were, and the bountie of the law of God. Their Idolatrie was not full of sensualitie, as that of the Gentiles, or of prosperitie, and worldly delightes, like vnto the law of Mahomet, which might draw and flatter them: and on the other side they sought no miracles like the [ D] Iewes, or the subtiltie of Philosophie as the Grecians, who contemned all the world, but they were simple without arrogancie or presumption, and they did not much loue their Idolls whose seruice was painefull, nor their sacrifices which cost them their bloud and liues; and for this cause they were ready to receiue a better law: and there cannot be a better than that which Iesus Christ hath giuen vs. Moreouer the duller they were of vn∣derstanding, the more they admired heauen, and heauenly things, and what••oeuer was propounded vnto them of the greatnesse, power, and maiestie of God, and of the mer∣cie, sweetnesse, and passion of Iesus Christ; for that the more things did passe their ca∣pacitie and vnderstanding, the more they seemed answerable to the greatnesse of God, and the infinit bountie of Iesus Christ.

[ E] ¶ Of the difficulties they found in the conuersion of the Americans.

VVE must not thinke that the conuersion of the New World past without many [ XLII] great difficulties, and that these roses had no thorns: the first difficultie was the ignorance of the tongue, for that there being not any thing which requires a greater fa∣cilitie to expresse the conception, and the grace of a language, than the mysteries of our holie faith. The preaching was begun in America by men which vnderstood not their auditors language, neither was vnderstood by them; wherefore they were constrained to [ F] vse certaine interpreters or truchmen, who vnderstanding not well what was said vnto them, deliuered one thing for another, and in stead of Catholicke doctrine sowed errors among the assistants; so as it was a great trouble for the one to deliuer their concepti∣o••s, and to heare others by a third person, in all which things they lost much time. This di••••der increased by another which was of no lesse importance, for that in their pro∣ceedings they vsed no certaine and common forme: there being no superiour who had

••h•• c••••e & authoritie to prescribe an order for so many things, and in such different [ A] coun∣••••ies. Another difficultie grew by the want of workemen fit for such an important en∣••••rprise as the conuersion of America; there was a great haruest and few labourers, and they which imploied themsel••••s vnderstood not, nor were vnderstood; from these two difficulties proceeded diuers defects in the conuersion of the Indians; the one was igno∣rance, in which the Neophites or new Christians remained, and their little vnderstan∣ding of matters necessarie to saluation; for that being baptised without instruction, they had scarce any other thing of a Christian but baptisme, and they required it rather to content their Cac••iques, or the Spaniards, and to do that which they saw others do, than for any firme resolution. The first religious men which imploied themselues, tooke [ B] so gr••at a pleasure to multiplie the number of the faithfull, as they cared for no more, be∣ing partly moued thereunto by the consolation which the conuersion of soules brings with it, and partly for the impossibilitie there was to a••tend the instruction of so many persons; so as they held it better to leaue them without catechising, than without bap∣tisme. We read that of those twelue Friers of the order of S. Francis there was not any one but had baptised at the least one hundred thousand persons in New Spaine, and one of them baptised foure hundred thousand: how then could they instruct so great a mul∣titude of m••n that were rude and sauage, in the doctrine of Iesus Christ, especially, they but yet learning the Mexican tongue. But the worst of al is that in so smal a number of tea∣chers, th••••e were & are yet many which haue bin imploied in so great a ministerie, which [ C] are ignorant, carelesse, and of a bad life. In the prouince of Paraguay in the yeare 1587, there was a priest who had charge of a very great countrie, this man vsed no other dilli∣gence towards them that came to be baptised▪ but only asked them if they would haue the name of Peter or Iohn▪ and at this day in New Spaine, where there are bishops and a great number of religious men, one Curat hath vnder his charge fiftie, yea seuentie villages, and fortie miles in circuit or more. The people therefore continued as much inclined to their auncient superstition and idolatrie as before, for that hauing no knowledge of di∣uine things, they did not eleuat their spirits more than ordinarie, and liued with ma∣ny wiues or concubines: the other defect which they found in the conuersion of the In∣dians was for that these first Fathers baptised these Indians not one by one, but by [ D] hun∣d••eds and thousands, it fell out therefore that of many which ran to baptisme, some were in doubt whether they were baptised or not: moreouer, euery one of them hauing aboue one wife▪ some of them continued after baptisme in their first estate: but the greatest part of them knew not what they should retaine or leaue, and the preachers themseues were also in doubt.

Of the Remedies of the foresaid defects.

[ LXIII] THe first which imploied himselfe to amend and better the condition of the New Christians at America, was the Marquis of Vallee: for besides the good order which he did set in New Spaine for matters of ciuile gouernment, he procured also in the yeare [ E] 1524 the celebration of a prouinciall Synode, at the which there assisted fiue Priests, nineteene Monkes or Friers, and six Lay men, of the which the said Marquis (who was of the house of Cortez) was one, and Friar Martin of Valencia the Popes Vicar: there they made cleere the point of the Indians marriages, that is to say, with which wife they s••ould remaine; and it was resolued, that for as much as the forme of their contract of ••arriage was not knowne, nor what stile they followed in that case, they should for that ••i••e retaine which of them they would, and dismisse the rest. But there was not any one whi•••• did more assist the zeale of the New Christians in New Spaine, than Vasco of Qui∣roga th•• first Bishop of Mechouacan, who made very good ordinances, & put in practise profitable institutions, both concerning the spirituall and temporall affaires of the [ F] In∣dians, whose memorie doth liue vnto this day; so as there is not any thing which those people do preach with more affection, than the vertues of that Prelat: he tooke away the pluralitie of wiues, abolished idolatrie and superstition, and procured that such as had ••ot yet receiued baptisme should be first catechised & instructed; and he did wonderfully

[ A] increase the seruice of God, the holinesse of Churches, and the reuerence vnto sacred things. He obtained this, in procuring to haue the Churches wel built, to haue good re∣••enues, & to be furnished of all that was necessarie for the celebration of diuine seruice, and the administration of the sacraments. But he made himselfe chiefely famous for his chariti•• ••owards the poore and needie; whereof there were worthie ma••kes to be seene throughout the realm of Mechouacan; for that there is not any borough or village how litt•••• ••r poore soeuer, where there is not a lodging for pilgrims, and an hospitall for disea∣sed ••••rsons. And for the entertainement of those places which haue no certaine reue∣oues, there are certaine companies appointed, whose change is to prouide and serue the [ B] sick••, and to giue them all things that shall be necessarie. Euerie one of these (which are di••i••••d by countries) serues his weeke. The time of the countrie being come, all go forth with their families, and carrie whatsoeuer the sicke shall need for that weeke. Eue∣rie countrie hath a man into whose hands they deliuer whatsoeuer hath beene prepa∣red for the sicke, as wine, meat, napkins, vessell, and such like, and he disposeth of all ac∣co••ding to the necessitie of the diseased. He that hath the charge of all, doth aduertis•• them seuen daies before, of the weeke they ar•• to serue. In this time the men of the coun∣trie make great prouision of wood, both great a••d small, the which they seeke six miles 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or more, and in the meane time their wiue•• make prouision of corne a••d other neces∣saries. The time being come, euerie man brings vnto the Hospitall what he hath pre∣pared, [ C] some wood, some bread, some flesh; and there are some which do gouern the sick persons; for as soone as they vnderstand that any one is fallen sicke, they of the compa∣nie go presently vnto him, they carrie him to the Church to be conf••st, and from thence vnto the Hospitall, where he is attended day and night with great care, and a charitie wort••ie of commendation: these customes brought in by this Bishop continue vnto this day. They haue no lesse care of the seruice of God, and the ornament of Churches; for they thinke if all should go to ruine, yet should they ne••er abandon the Church: They imploy much money to buy images, and ornaments for the Altar, and although they be poore, and lead a miserable and painefull life, yet in that which concernes the ornament of sacred places, and the celebration of feasts, they spare not their goods, nor labour; and [ D] they depriue themselues of necessarie things, to the end that the seruice of God may be performed worthily, and with maiestie. They vnfurnish their houses of their moueables, to furnish the Church, and they spare bread out of their owne mouthes (as a man would say) to feed their curat, and when as mony failes them, they supplie that want with their labour. That which was verie important also to repaire those defects, which happened in the first conuersion of the Indians, was the multitude of religious men, and the foundati∣on of conuents, of the orders of S. Francis, S. Dominicke, S. Augustine, and de la Merced, to whom they haue since added the Iesuits, and some Carmelites, the Cathedrall and Collegiall Churches, Vniuersities, Seminaries, prouinciall Councells, Catechismes prin∣ted, and visitations made by the Bishop.

[ E] ¶ An estimate of all that the king of Spaine receiues out of all his countries.

BEfore we enter into this discourse, it shall be fit to instruct the Reader touching the money or coyne wherewith the Spaniards make their accounts. You must there∣for•• vnderstand that alwaies in Spaine they account by Marauedis, or duckats, and not in any other kind of money, notwithstanding that they haue croisadoes, pistolls, and royalls both of eight and foure, but their most vsuall accounting is by Marauedis, which kind of coyne being verie small, doth easily amount to millions, and yet the sum is of [ F] no great value: as for example, a million of Marauedis, or Quento (as the Spaniards call it) is worth two thousand six hundred seuentie three duckats, eight royals, twentie and six M••••auedis. Foure and thirtie Marauedis make a royall or six pence, eleuen royalls make a 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and twelue a French crowne.

A treatie of all the rents, and reuenues, which the king of Spaine [ A] hath in all his realmes, and at the Indies, which consist in Alcauales, and Thirds, Subsidies, Imposts, Customes, Dueties for salt, and other reuenues con∣tained in his finances of Spaine, with a declaration of the Alcauales.

* 1.5THe king of Spaine exacts the tenth penie of all goods, lands, houses, merchan∣dises, or whatsoeuer el••e, atsuch times as they are sold, and this tenth is called Alcauala. In like maner artizans and workemen, and such as keepe shops and fell any thing oftheir handie worke or industrie, or else in those places wheras [ B] they sel fish, in the butcheries, and tauerns, they are bound to pay the tenth part of all that they sell. Fo•• this cause many townes, and their members, compound with the king, and pay him a ce••••aine summe without any further charge, and they themselues gather ••p ••hese Alca••••l••s in their jurisdictions; which accord is called Encabeçamiento. More∣••uer the kings receiuers remaine in the Metropolitan townes and prouinces, where they looke to the payment of the Alcauales, and giue an account. Besides, they haue the charge of certaine recompences ordained to some by the king of Spaine, and in like man∣ner of other debts and assignations, whereof they doe afterwards giue an account to the soueraigne Chamber of the accounts. But to the end that you may know the qualitie of thirds, you must vnderstand, that Popes in former times haue graunted to the kings [ C] of Spaine the third penie of the reuenues of the Clergie, to ayd them in their warres against the Moores, and to defend the Catholicke religion. The same receiuers receiue the thirds with the Alcauales, and they are in like manner rented out to townes. The king of Spaine hath sold some Alcauales, and giuen others in recompence, whereof we will make mention.

The salt, that is to say, the places from whence the king of Spaine drawes salt, are ren∣••ed yearely for

93 (Quentos) or millions of marauedis.

The tenths of the sea, of merchandise which comes from forraine parts into Biscai, and the prouinces of Guipuscoa, and of the foure Maritime valleis of the mountaines, pay for all the mercandise which is carried by land into Castille, vnto the houses appointed to [ D] that end in the townes of Victoria, Horduna, and Valmoscede, the sum of

70 mill. of marau.

The tenths of the sea which passe by the realme of Leon, and by the ports of Sanabre, and Villa Franca yeeld yearely

1 mill. of marau.

The tenths of the principalitie of Asturia, passing by the Towne of Ouiedo yeeld

375000 marau.

The reuenues of the gouernment of the towne of Bilbao, for merchandise which come from forraine parts

490500 marau.

The citie of Burgos, with the jurisdiction, paies yearely for the Alcauales, thirds, and rents

17 mill. 129880 marau. [ E]

The Bayliwicke of Burgos, which they terme Bureba, payes yearely

2 millions 646 marau.

The mountaines of Oca yeeld yearely

34000 marau.

The Bayliwicke of the prouince of Rioja

3 mill. 757000 marau.

The Bayliwicke of Ebro payes

2 mill. 34000 marau.

The jurisdiction on the other side of Ebro yeelds

1 mill. 402000 marau.

The citie of Victoria payes yearely vnto the king

269000 marau.

The prouince of Guipuscoa p••yes yearely for the Alcauales and thirds

1 million 181000 marau.

The mines o•• yron which are in the said prouince yeeld

150000 marau. [ F]

The seuen Bayliwickes of the mountaines of old Castille

942000 marau.

The valley of Mena in the same mountaines of Castille

228000 marau.

The prouince of Logrono

7 millions 746000 marau.

The towne of Ianquas, and the territorie, payes

541000 marau.

[ A] The citie of S. Dominico de la Calçada paies yerely

4 mil. 812000 Marau.

The bailiwicke of the towne of Diego

1 million, 545000 Marauedis.

The bailiwicke of Can de Munno paies

4 millions, 612000 Marau.

The bailiwicke of Castro Xeris

8 millions, 485000 Marauedis.

The bailiwicke of Ceriato

1 million, 968000 Marauedis.

The bailiwicke of Monson

2 millions, 276000 Marauedis.

The citie of Palence, and the prouince of Campo paies yerely for the Alcauales and thirds

16 millions, 940000 Marauedis.

The towne of Carion paies

4 millions, 948000 Marauedis.

[ B] T••e jurisdiction of Carion paies

2 millions, 910000 Marauedis.

The places of Peter Aluares of Vega

655000 Marauedis.

The towne of Sahagun is rented for

2 millions, 125000 Marauedis.

The bailiwicke of Pernia paies

178000 Marauedis.

The bailiwicke of Campo in the mountaines

1 million, 730000 Marauedis.

The valley of Miranda in the mountaines

557000 Marauedis.

The foure Townes called of the coast▪ that is to say, S. Ander••, Laredo, Castro of Vrdi∣••ales, and S. Vincent, pay yearely

3 millions, and 345000 Marauedis.

The principallitie of Asturia, and the towne of Ouiedo

12 mil. 345000 Mara.

The citie of Lugo in the realme of Gallicia, with the Bishopricke, paies yearely

4 mil. [ C] 137000 marauedis.

The citie of Mondonedo in the realme of Gallicia

1 million, and 132000 Marauedis.

The citie of Orense, and the jurisdiction

6 millions, and 58000 Marauedis.

The citie of Saint Iames or Compostella, with the Archbishops territorie, paies

18 millions 212000 Marauedis.

The citie of Tuy, and the Bishops jurisdiction in Gallicia

5 mil. 827000 Marauedis.

The towne of Pontferado in Gallicia

1 million, 975000 Marauedis.

The citie of Leon with the jurisdiction and Bishopricke

6 mil. 350000 Marau.

The towne of Sardagne

1 million, and 13000 Marau.

The citie of Astorga and Bishopricke in the realme of Leon pay

2 mil. 455000 Marau.

[ D] The villages or places called Cauadiaz of the Abbey of Leon and Astorga are rented at

797000 Marau.

The Barrios or parishes about Salas within the principallitie of Asturia pay yearely

231000 Marauedis.

The citie of Zamora with the jurisdiction

15 mil. 525000 Marau.

The citie of Toro and the jurisdiction

11 mil. 112000 Marau.

The towne of Vrena paies for the thirds, the tenths, or Alcauala belonging to the duke of Osso••na

62000 Marau.

The towne of Garena paies yearely

2 mil. 335000 Marau.

The towne of Barasil de la Coma

250000 Marau.

[ E] The citie of Salamanca and the jurisdiction

24 mil. 345000 Marau.

The citie of Rodrigo and the jurisdicton

14 mil. 345000 Marau.

The jurisdicton of Trigueros

417000 Marau.

The towne of Ol••illo

47000 Marau.

The towne of Tordesillas and the territorie

2 mil. and 600000 Marau.

The towne of Valladolid and the jurisdiction

29 mil. 730000 Marau.

The towne of Tordehumos paies

827000 Marau.

The towne of Medina del Campo and the jurisdiction paies yearely

31 millions, and 149000 Marau.

The towne of Olmedo, and the territorie

2 mil. 149000. Marau.

[ F] T••e towne of Naua, and the seuen churches paies for the thirds

333000 Marauedis, for t••at the tenths belong vnto Don Francis de Fonseca.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 towne of Madrigal

682000. Marau.

〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••••wne of Ariualo with her jurisdiction

5 mil. 310000 Marau.

〈…〉〈…〉 of Auila, and the jurisdiction

19 mil. 35000 Marau.

The citie of Segouia, and the jurisdiction

12 mil. 470000 marau. [ A]

The towne of Aranda of Duero, with her jurisdiction

3 mil. 350000 marau.

The towne of Roa paies yearely

1 mil. 515000 marau.

The towne of Gomiel of Yzan (where the tenths belong vnto the Duke of Ossouna) paies yearely for the thirds▪

154000 marau.

The towne of Sepulueda with the territorie

3 millions, 54000 marau.

The citie of Soria with the jurisdiction

10 millions, 282000 marau.

The citie and Bishopricke of Osma, with the jurisdiction

4 millions.

The towne of Agreda and Caracena

2 millions, 83000 marau.

The towne of Molina and the jurisdiction

5 millions, 792000 marauedis. [ B]

The citie of Ciguença and the jurisdiction

3 millions, 662000 marauedis.

The towne of Cuenca and her jurisdiction paies

24 millions, 645000 marauedis.

The towne of Hue••e with the territorie

17 millions, 916000 marauedis.

The towne of Villarejo de F••entes

2 millions, 517000 marauedis.

The prouince called the Marquisat of Villena, that is to say, the townes of Timihillha, Abasette, Roda, Saint Clement, and the towne of Villena, with the jurisdiction paies yearely

31 millions, 503000 marauedis.

The towne of Beaumont, whose Al••auales belong vnto the Marquis of Villena paies onely for the thirds

476000 marauedis.

The citie of Murcia and the jurisdiction

14 mil. 820000 marau. [ C]

The towne of Lorca, and her jurisdiction

5 millions.

The citie of Carthagena and her jurisdiction

2 millions.

The towne of Alcarras, with the jurisdiction

16 millions, 984000 marauedis.

The towne of Segura de la Sierra with the mountaines thereabout, and territorie be∣longing to the maister of Saint Iames

11 millions, 91000 marauedis.

Villa Noua de los Infantes, with her prouince called el Campo de Moryel, belonging to the knights of Saint Iames

8 millions, 664000 marauedis.

Ocagna and the prouince called Castille, belonging also to the knights of Saint Iames paies

23 millions.

The citie of Guadalajara with the jurisdiction paies

11 millions, 64000 marau. [ D]

The towne of Prox and Poso pay yearely

160000 marauedis.

The towne of Almonacid, and the prouince of Sorite, which belong to the knights of Saint Iames

1 million, 188000 marauedis.

The towns of Vzeda, Talamanca, and Tardelaguna, with the territorie which belongs to the Archbishop ••f Tolledo

18 millions 250000 marauedis.

The towne of Yepas

423000 marauedis.

Alcala of Henarez and the jurisdiction, with the towne of Briuega, which are the Arch∣bishops of Tolledo, pay

16 millions, 250000 marauedis.

The towne of Madrid, with her territorie

23 milions, 250000 marauedis.

The countie of Puno in Rostro, yeelds

1 million, 262000 marauedis. [ E]

The townes of Cubas, and Grinon, where the Alcauales belong to the house of Mendo∣za, pay vnto the king for the thirds

117000 marauedis.

The towne of Gualapagar, where the tenths belong vnto the Duke of Infantasgo, pay for the thirds

160000 marauedis.

The towne of Illescas, and the territorie, paies

2 milllions, 297000 marauedis.

T••e cittie of Tolledo with the members, pay yerely

37 millions.

T••e reuenues of the mountai••••, which are paied by the maisters of the flocks of sheepe, which go to feed in Estremadura, yeeld

19 millions, 503000 marauedis.

The villages of the Priories of Saint Iohn

7 millions, 55000 marauedis.

The towne of Almagro, with the prouince which is called el Campo de Calatraua [ F] paies

7 millions, 120000 marauedis.

Moreouer the Alcauales for greene corne which is sold there for horse meat, yeeld vnto the king

3 millions, 438000 marauedis.

The towne of Ciudad Real paies yearely

4 millions, 150000 marauedis.

[ A] The villages lying in the countrie called the Archdeaconship of Talauera de la Roina pay

14 millions, 326000 marau.

The citie of Plaisance, and the villages which belong to the Archdeacon, pay yearely

18 millions, 475000 marau.

The tow••e of Truxillo, and the territorie, yeelds

12 millions, 224000 marau.

The towne of Carceres, with the jurisdiction, payes

7 millions, 850000 marau.

The citie of Badajos, with the jurisdiction and prouince, payes

9 mill. 972000 marau.

The towne of Alcantara, with her territorie, which belong vnto the knights of Alcan∣tara, payes yearely

9 millions, 403000 marau.

[ B] The tenths of the greene corne which is sold for the feeding of horses of price, in the mo∣neth of March, yeelds vnto the king

3 millions, 481000 marau.

The prouince of Serne, or Serene, belonging to the knights of Alcantara

7. mill. 570000 marau.

The citie of Merida, with the territorie, in the prouince of Leon

21 millions, 234000 marau.

The towne of Fuente el Maestro in the same prouince

6 mill. 973000 marau.* 1.6

The towne of Guadancanal, with her territorie, payes yearely

3 mill. 305000 marau.

The towne of Xeres of Badajos, with the territorie, yeelds

7 mill. 100000 marau.

The citie of Seuille, with the lands, and jurisdiction, yeelds

182 mill. 387000 marau.

[ C] All the rent of the seigneurie of Seuille yeelds

2▪ millions.

The townes of Palma and Gelues, vnder their Earles, pay

235000 marau.

The townes of Teuar and Ardales, where the tenths belong to the Marquis of Ardales, pay yearely for the thirds

23••000 marau.

The towne of Lerena, and the territorie, and the prouince of Leon, vnder the knights of S. Iames, yeelds

3 millions, 325000 marau.

The reuenues of Cadiz, which they call Almadraues, that is to say, the fishing of Tonnie amounts to

3 millions, 35000 marau.

The citie of Cadiz payes yearely

8 millions, 452000 marau.

The towne of Gibraltar payes onely thirds, and is exempted from all the rest, and these [ D] thirds come to

1 million, 500000 marau.

The towne of Xerez de la Frontera, with the jurisdiction, payes yearely

21 millions, 50000 marau.

The towne of Carmona yeelds vnto the king

9 millions, 450000 marau.

The townes of Lora and Setafilla pay

680000 marau.

The towne of Ecija, with the suburbes,

15 millions, 500000 marau.

The citie of Cordoua, with the territorie, yeelds yearely

48 mill. 995000 marau.

The places called Realengos of Cordoua

17 millions, 316000 marau.

The towne of Anduxar, and the territorie,

4 millions, 800000 marau.

The citie of Vbeda, and her jurisdiction,

11 millions, 346000 marau.

[ E] The citie of Ba••ca payes yearely

17 millions, 316000 marau.

The towne of Quexado yeelds vnto the king

1 million, 415000 marau.

The Ad••lantad or Lieutenant ship of Caçorla yeelds yearely

6 mill. 885000 marau.

The countie of S. Stephen payes vnto the king

1 million, 340000 marau.

The towne of Martos, and the territorie which belongs to the knights of Calatraua, of the members of Andaluzia, yeelds yearely

11 millions, 436000 marau.

The citie of Iuen, with the territorie, payes

15 millions, 909000 marau.

The citie of Granado, with the territorie, yeelds

42 millions, 910000 marau.

The silke of the realme of Granado, before the expulsion of the Moores, was wor••h, 42 millions but now it yeelds vnto the king but

22 millions.

[ F] The tent called Guelayabizes, in the realme of Granado, is worth

2 millions, 750000 marau.

The ••ow••es of Loxa, and Alhama, in the realme of Granado, pay

3 millions, 650000 marau.

The ••••••ne of Baca, in Granado, yeelds yearely

10 milllions, 626000 marau.

The citie of Guadix, in the realme of Granado, and the mountaines thereabout, pay by [ A] the yeare

6 millions, 395000 marau.

The citie of Almerie, in the realme of Granado yeelds

3 millions, 80000 marau.

The townes of Almunecar, Mutril, and Salobrena, pay yearely

2 mill. 643000 marau.

The citie of Malaga yeelds vnto the king

16 millions, 269000 marau.

Velez Malaga, in the realme of Granado, payes yearely

16 millions, 519000 marau.

The towne of Pulchena payes vnto the king

410000 marau.

The citie of Ronda, with the jurisdiction, yeelds

5 millions, 334000 marau.

The Island of Canarie yeelds yearely

4 millions, 850000 marau.

The Island of Teneriffe yeelds yearely

3 millions. [ B]

The Island of Palma yeelds yearely

2 millions.

The tax which is yearely due throughout the realmes of Spaine is worth

104 millions, 305000 marauedis: And this tax is diuided among the people throughout all the pro∣uinces and towns, for that the noblemen which are Feudataries and knights are exempt: they are seased according to their estates.

The tols or customes by land of the realmes of Valencia, Arragon, and Nauarre, which are to be paied for all things that are carried by land in the said realmes, as well for the entrie, as for the going forth, yeeld vnto the king of Spaine

49 mill. 35000 marau.

The drie ports or passages within the countrie, as wel at the comming in, as going forth, which passe betwixt the realmes of Portugal and Castille, pay yearely for the tenths of [ C] such things as are brought in, or carried forth

34 millions, 155000 marau.

The woolls which are transported yearely out of Spain into other countries, yeeld for euerie sack (which doth commonly weigh 10 Arobes, and the Arobe weighs 25 pound) 2 duckat••, so as it be of the countrie wooll, for strangers pay 4 duckats: and in all it yeelds yearely to the king of Spaine

53 millions, 586000 marau.

The Almoxarif, or great custome of Seuille, which the citie doth farme of the king of Spaine, yeelds yearely in rent

154 millions, 309000 marauedis: They doe so call the tenths of all the merchandise which comes from the Low-countries, France, England, Portugal, Italie, and other pla••••••▪

The Almoxarif, or custome of the Spanish or West Indies, which the citie of Seuille [ D] hath rented, whereas all the merchandise receiued into the ships at Seuill••, and is to be transported thither, payes the twentieth part, and being carried to the Indies, they are forced to giue another twentieth part, all which amounts to

67 millions.

The reuenues which the king of Spaine drawes from the money of Spaine, that is to say, from euerie marke of siluer, or six duckats of siluer (whereas they coyne money) a Royall▪ and this is called El S••ndreaxo de l•• Aloneda, or the right of the mint; and the mint at Seuille yeelds as much as all the rest: the which yeelds vnto the king of Spaine yearely

22 millions.

The king of Spain dot•• farme out to the Foukers of Ausbourg, and to other Banquers, the maisterships of S••i••t Iames, Calatraua, and Alcantara; which are only the customes [ E] and tenths of wh••••••, wi••e, oyle, and other thi••gs which the maisters were wont to en∣ioy, not compreh••••ding therei•• ••he A••••auales a••d thirds, as hath been said: which rent doth yeeld vnto the ki••g yearely

98 millions.

The power of thes•• maisters 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••ont to be great, and extended into many prouinces, but now this charge is of lesse esteeme, since that the kings of Spaine haue taken vpon them the maisterships▪ who by little and little draw away all the reuenues. Moreouer, ••he ki••g of Spaine le•••• ••o f••rme the feedi••g•• and p••s••ures of the said maisteries and com∣mand••ri••s, and it doth yeeld hi•• y••are••y

37 millions.

T•••• ••ing of Spaine doth rent out the mines of quicksiluer, of Almedan, of Sierra Mo∣rena, in the field of Calatraua, and ••••ceiues for••

73 millions. [ F]

Th•• Croisado, or Popes Bulls, all charges deducted, yeeld vnto the king of Spaine yearely

200 millions.

That which they call subsidie, which the Clergie giues out of their reuenues taxed vp∣o•• their benefices, to make war against Inf••dells and others, yeelds yearely

65 millions.

[ A] Moreouer, all the Bishops and Churches of Spaine giue vnto the king for the ma∣king of war against Infidells,

one hundred and one millions. This reuenue is cal∣led El Excus••do, and is wont to bee granted to the king of Spaine by the Popes Bul, whereby it is lawfull for him to take the tenths of the wheat, millet, wine, oyle, and other fruits belonging to the Clergie and Churches; and the Clergie giues this summe vnto the king, all charges deducted.

The mines of Guadalcanal in Estremadura vpon Sierra Morena did sometimes yeeld

187 millions of marauedis: but being at this day much decayed, it cannot be taxed.

All the lands of Spaine paie yearely vnto the king a certaine imposition which they cal, [ B] Exercise for the Slaues and Galleis, and this makes the sum of

7 mil. 750000 mara.

The reuenue called Moneda Forera, for the which eue••y fire whatsoeuer it be, is con∣strained to pay 7 marauedis yearely vnto the king of Spaine, and this doth make by the yeare

6 mill. and 656000 marauedis.

That which comes vnto the king yearely from the West Indies, amounteth vnto the summe of

300 millions.

The realme of Nauarre yeelds yearely vnto the king

35 mil. 500000 marauedis.

The realme of Valencia, Arragon, and Cartalognia giue vnto the king, besides other tributes

75 millions of marauedis.

The Islands of Sardinia, Maiorca, and Minorca, yeeld

no profit vnto the king of [ C] Spaine, for that the reuenues of these places are consumed in the guard of them, and be∣sides they are not very rich.

The realme of Sicile brings yearely vnto the king of Spaine

375 millions▪

The realme of Naples, with the countries of Pouillia and Calabria yeeld yearely vnto the king

450 millions of marauedis.

The Duchie of Milan yealds

300 millions of marauedis.

Bourgondie and Flanders were wont to yeeld vnto the king of Spaine 700 millions, but now they are no more his, being giuen in dowrie to the Infanta Isabella Clara Eu∣genia, whenas she martried with Albertus who was before a Cardinall.

 

The farme or reuenue of playing-cardes which are sould in Spaine, and pay vnto [ D] the king for euery paire six pence, yeelds

20 millions.

The Serges or Rash of Florence which is brought into Spain, and pay vnto the king for euery peece six duckats, yeelds yearely

10 millions.

Such was the reuenue of the king of Spaine in the yere 1578 before that he was king of Portugal:* 1.7 by reason whereof we will set the reuenues of the crowne of Portugal apart. All these reuenues and summes of marauedis being reduced into duckats of Spain, amount vnto the summe of 13 millions, and 48000 duckats, euery duckat being worth eleuen roialls of Spaine, and fiue shillings six pence of our English money.

The realmes comprehended vnder the name of Spaine, but more properly of Castille, are these which follow, Leon, Arragon, Castille, Nauarre, Granado, Tolledo, Valencia, [ E] Seuille, Cordoua, Murcia, Iaen, Gallicia, Gibraltar, and Cattalognia.

The realmes, prouinces, and cities which assemble at the Eastes of Spaine are, the realmes of Leon, Seuille, Tolledo, Granado, Cordoua, Murcia, and Iaen: the cities of Burgos, Salamanca, Segouia, Soria, Auila, Cuenca, Toro, Zamora, and Guadalajara, all which are Bishoprickes. Of those which haue no Bishops, or are not walled in, there are but two admitted to the Estates, and which haue voices, that is to say, Madrid and Val∣ladolid. The other realmes, as Arragon, Nauarre, Valencia, and Cattalognia haue their Viceroies and Gouernors apart, which commaund with the kings councell like to the Viceroy of Scicile and Naples, and the Gouernor of Milan.

[ F] In Spaine they vse the words of citie and towne distinctly, and make a great difference betwixt the one and the other: for the cities in Spaine are those which serue for gouern∣ment to others, and which haue greater preheminencies and prerogatiues, and therefore they comprehend Archbishopricks, Bishopricks, and other gouernments. There are ci∣tie•• which enioy this title by a speciall priuiledge, although they be not great: and there

is great difference betwixt a citie and a towne, as well in authoritie as in other freedomes [ A] and immunities.

In cities, there are commonly gouernors, whom the Romans called Pretors, or gouer∣nors of cities or prouinces: and so one citie hath many townes and villages which are subiect vnto it, so as the townes are members to cities, for that the townes are subiect vn∣to cities, and villages vnto towns; seeing that in Spaine whenas there falls out any mu∣tinie or reuolt in a prouince, the towns, and countrie people submit themselues to the de∣fence of cities, in all accidents that may happen.

To make a towne a citie, they must haue more regard vnto the antiquitie, than to the greatnesse, for that there are many smal cities, and very great townes, such are, Medina del [ B] Campo, a very great towne, Saint Foy, a very little citie, Madrid, where the king doth sometimes keepe his court, a very great towne, Orihuela, a little citie, Carceres, a great towne, Alicanta, a little citie, Saintiren, Abrantes, Ceroual, and Oliuensa, great townes in Portugal without any titles of citie: there are also many smal cities, as Guadix, Baesa, Carthagena, and others.

¶ The Reuenues of the crowne of Portugal.

THe ordinarie reuenues of the crowne of Portugal do euery yeare passe a million and 100000 duckats: the reuenues of the knights of Portugal, whereof the king is at [ C] this day great maister, and to whom belong the Islands of Açores, Madera, Cape Verd, Saint Thomas, and of the Prouince, yeeld yearely 200000 duckats: the reuenues of the mine which belongs vnto the knights called of Christ, amounts yearely to 100000 duc∣kats: the reuenues of spices and other things which comes from the East Indies, yeeld yearely 600000 duckats, that is to say, eighteene tunne of gold. You must vnderstand that this is drawne from the customes and imposts of merchandise; for the other reue∣nues and fruits of the earth are easily consumed in the guard and defence thereof: wher∣fore the whole reuenues of the crowne of Portugal, and of the countries which are subiect vnto it, amounts to two millions of duckats.

¶ The wages and pensions of the officers, gentlemen, and other seruants of [ D] the king of Spaines houshould and court.

• THe great maister of the houshould, or lord Steward, hath for his yearely fee 3000 duckats.
• Foure other maisters of the houshould, either of which hath 1500 duckats a yeare.
• One and thirtie gentlemen seruants, the which haue eight roialls a day a peece for their expences.* 1.8
• Fower and twentie gentlemen of the kings house, either of which haue six roialls a day.
• Ten gentlemen of the chamber, and to euerie one twelue roialls a day. [ E]
• Ten assistants or goomes of the chamber, and to euery one six roialls a day.
• Three keepers of the wardrope, who haue charge of the apparrell and other moueables, to either of them six roialls a day.
• Foure keepers of the jewells, to the first, eleuen roialls a day, and to the rest foure.
• Fiue pantlers, and to either foure roialls a day.
• Foure butlers, to the first, foure roialls a day, and to the rest two.
• Foure officers of the kitchen who haue the charge of salt meates, and to the two first, foure roialls a day a peece, and to the others two roialls.
• Three officers of the larder, to the first, foure roialls, and to the others two.
• To the maister cooke, and his first assistant, foure roialls a day a peece, and to another two. [ F]
• To the two boies of the kitchen a roiall a day a peece.
• To the cooke of the first maister of the houshould, three roialls a day.
• To the porter of the kitchen and his assistant, two roialls a day a peece.
• ...

• [ A] To the maister feather-maker for himselfe, his assistants, and foure boyes, foure hundred duckats a yeare wages.
• To the kings chiefe tapestrie-man, foure royalls a day, and to fiue assistants of the tape∣strie, two royall•• a day a peece.
• To the maister locksmith, three royals a day, and to either of his two seruants, two royals.
• To two physitions of the kings chamber, & to the physition for the houshold, three hun∣dred duckats a yeare a peece.
• To the chi••urgion, and to two barbers of the bodie, foure royals a day a peece, ••nd to the assistant to the barbers, three royals a day.
• [ B] To two apothecaries, three royals a day a peece, and to their assistant, two royals a day.
• To the tayler, hosier, shoomaker, imbroidere••, and skinner, fiftie duckats a yeare a peece.
• To the goldsmith, seampster, and landerer, fortie duckats a yeare a peec••.
• To two porters of the palace, foure royals a day a peece.
• To two vshers of the chamber, foure royals a day a peece.
• To seuen porters of the hall and chamber, three royals a day a peece.
• There are threescore and seuen groomes of the ch••mber,* 1.9 euerie one of which hath twen∣tie thousand marauedis yearely for his wages, the which makes fiftie three duckats, twentie soulz, and foure deniers.
• There are also ••w••lue por••ers, which are called of the Cadenas, who are alwaies at the palace gate, who haue foure and twentie ••ho••••and marauedis for their yearely wages; which makes threescore and nine duckats, nine soulz.

¶ Offices.

• TO the lieutenant of the maister of the houshold is giuen one hundred thousand ma∣ra••••di•• •• yeare for his wages, which are two hundred sixtie seuen duckats, foure roy∣als, and twelue marauedis.
• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 him 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ke••pe•• the accounts, and prouides for the charges of huntsmen, and to the ••ead clarke, th•• lik•• year••ly wages.
• To him tha•• ••a••ri••s the kings crosbow, twentie thousand marauedis a yeare, which are fiftie thr•••• ••uckats, six and twentie marauedis.
• To the chi••u••gion of the houshold, twentie fiue thousand marauedis, which make th••ee∣s••or•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ducka••s, fortie six soulz and a halfe.
• To the drawer of gold, fifteene thousand marauedis, which are fortie duckats, one soulz, and a halfe.
• To the glouer, twelue thousand marauedis, which are thirtie two duckats, foure soulz, ••••d a half••.
• To the te••••i•• court keeper, eleuen thousand mara••edis, which comes to twentie nine duckats, twelue soulz.
• To ••••e fou••busher and crosbowmaker, six thousand marauedis a peece.
• To the muletors or moyle keepers of the kings house, that is, to the maister and his six as∣sistants, three hundred thousand marauedis a yeare, which make eight hundred and 〈…〉〈…〉▪ seuen soulz, and six deniers.
• To the chi••••••••••eep••r, and his eight assistants, fiue hundred thirtie foure duckats, for∣tie one soulz, and a halfe.

¶ Guards of the kings bodie in his palace. The Bourgondian guard.

• TO the captaine of the archers of the kings guard, a thousand duckats a yeare.
• [ F] To ••he lieu••••nant of the companie, fiue hundred duckats a yeare.
• T•• the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 bearer, foure hundred duckats a yeare.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 ar••hers all gentlemen Bourgo•••••• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 by nation, foure royals a day a peece.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 tr••••peter as much.
• To 〈◊〉〈◊〉 chaplaine three royals a day.

¶ Guard of the Germans. [ A]

• TO the captaine of the Germaine guard, a thousand duckats a yeare.
• To the lieutenant, three hundred duckats.
• To the sergeant of the guard, two hundred duckats.
• To the phife, threescore duckats a yeare.
• To two drummes a ••••ndred and thirtie duckats a yeare a peece.
• To a hundred Germans of the footguard, two royals a day a peece.
• To the chaplaine two royals a day. [ B]
• To the chiru••gion ten thousand marauedis a yeare.

¶ Guard of the Spaniards.

• T•• the captaine of the footguard, a thousand duckats a yeare.
• To the the lieutenant, fiue hundred duckats a yeare.
• To the sarge••nt, two hundred duckats.
• To two drummes, a hundred and thirtie duckats a peece.
• To the phife, threescore duckats.
• To foure captaines or corporals of squadrons, three royals a day a peece.
• To a hundred Spaniards, two royals a day a peece. [ C]
• To a chaplaine two royals a day.
• To a chirurgion, one royal a day.
• To a phisition foure royals a day.

¶ Guard on horseback••.

• To three score Spaniards of the guard on horsebacke, three royals a day a peece.
• To two trumpeters, three royals a day a peece.
• Ten harbingers euerie one of which hath fiftie thousand mar••uedis a yeare wages, the which is payed wheresoeuer the king keepes his court, be it at Mad••i••, or elsewhere, and this amounts to a hundred thirtie three duckats, thirtie so••en m••rauedis. [ D]
• Fortie harbingers of waies, to euerie one thirtie thousand marauedis a yeare.
• Three hundred gentlemen in ordinarie of the kings house ••uerie one of which hath for∣tie thousand marauedis a yeare wages: for they that serue by quarter haue but foure. score duckats.

¶ Gentlemen of the chamber:

• TO the captaine of the gentlemen that are in ordinarie, three hundred thousand ma∣rauedis a yeare, which make eight hundred and three duckats and halfe a royal.
• To his lieutenant, one hundred and fiftie thousand marauedis.
• To the ensigne bearer, a hu••dred thousand marauedis, which make two hundred sixtie [ E] seuen duckats, two royals and fiue marauedis.
• To two trumpe••ers of the said companie, foure royals a day a peece.
• To a hundred gentlemen at armes of the guard, six royals a day a peece, and twelue when as his maiestie doth ma••ch to the wars, or goes to any publike feast or sport.
• To the chaplaine of the companie, two royals a day.
• To the paymaister, foure royals a day.

¶ Ha••tsmen.

• THese are verie famous in Spaine, being all gentlemen and knights; they are fiftie [ F] in number, whereof twentie serue to keepe a guard in the Queens chamber, & in the Infantas: the which is a verie auncie•••••• priuil••dge; for which cause the Spaniards call them Monteros de Garda: they come all ••ut of the mountaines of Bourgos, and euerie one hath eightie duckats a yeare wages
• ...

• [ A] Nineteene pages and a gouernour, with two thousand duckats a yeare.
• To the gouernors assistant or deputie, one hundred duckats.
• To a chaplaine, fourescore duckats.
• To the pages scholemaister, two hundred duckats.
• To their cooke, threescore duckats.
• To the musitians which teach the pages to daunce and play, eightie duckats a yeare.
• To the maister that teacheth them to vault, fortie duckats.
• To him that teacheth them their weapons, fiftie duckats.

[ B] ¶ His Maiesties Chappell.

• TO the deane of the chappell, two thousand duckats a yeare.
• To the head Almoner, one thousand duckats a yeare.
• To the clarke of the closet, foure roialls a day.
• To foure chaplaines of the habit of saint Iames, one hundred and thirtie thousan•• marauedis a yere to either of them, which makes 347 duckats six roialls and 18 mara.
• To two chaplaines of the order of Alcantara, and to two other chaplaines of the order of Calatraua, the like pay.
• To foure and twentie chaplaines which serue in the chappell, fiftie thousand marauedis [ C] a yeare a peece, which come to 133 duckats 38 foulz.
• To the chiefe keeper of the vestrie, 150000 marauedis, which make foure hundred duc∣kats, fiftie eight soulz, nine deniers.
• To foure assistants to the keeper of the vesterie, and to two others which serue in the said chappell, three roialls a day a peece.
• To the Subalmoner, fifteene thousand marauedis, which are fortie duckats, one soulz, nine deniers.

¶ Musitians.

• TO the maister of the musicke, 267 duckats, foure roialls, and fiue marauedis.
• [ D] To the maister of the chappell, fiftie thousand marauedis.
• To twelue quiristers, one hundred and fiftie thousand marauedis, which makes one hun∣dred thirtie three duckats, eight soulz, and it is paied vnto the maister of the said chil∣dren of the chappell.
• To fiue and fortie singing men of the chappell, foure roialls a day a peece.
• To a musitian that sings the base, the like summe.
• To him that teacheth the children latine, to the organiste, and to him that markes the notes, foure roialls a day a peece.
• To the harbinger, fortie thousand maraued. which makes 106 duckats, 50 soulz, 2 deniers.
• To the keeper of the vestrie, and to the keeper of the chappel, thirtie thousand marauedis [] a peece.
• To him that tunes the organes and other instruments, fiftie thousand marauedis, which are worth one hundred thirtie and three crownes, thirtie and eight soulz.
• To two blowers of the organs, fifteene thousand marauedis.
• To six violons and two cornets, soure roialls a day a peece.
• To fo••••ie chaplaines which serue not in court, fortie thousand marauedis a peece, which make one hundred and six duckats, fiftie soulz, nine deniers.

¶ The kings Quirrie or Stable.

• [ F] TO the maister of the horse, two thousand duckats a yeare.
• To other fiue quirries, one hundred thousand marauedis a yeare a peece.
• To foure riders, the same pay, that is 267 duckats, foure roialls, fiue de••iers.
• ...•••• ••oure mace beares, or sergeants at armes, one hundred thousand marauedis a peece.
• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the kings at armes, fiftie thousand marauedis a peece.
• ...

• ...〈…〉〈…〉 ••••rbinger of the stable, fiftie ••ho••••and marauedis. [ A]
• 〈…〉〈…〉 three assistants, thirtie thousan•• ••••••auedis.
• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 six messengers of the stable, twentie thousand marauedis a peece.
• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the fourbusher of the stable and his assistant, sixtie thousand marauedis a peece.
• To the chiefe groome of the stable, fiftie thousand marauedis.
• To foure 〈…〉〈…〉 ••housand marauedis a peece.
• To foure 〈…〉〈…〉 the horses, fifteene thousand marauedis a peece.
• To him 〈…〉〈…〉 the Quirrie, fiftie thousand marauedis.
• To th••ee 〈◊〉〈◊〉 twentie thousand marauedis a peece.
• To 〈…〉〈…〉 the charge of sadles and bridles, and to his assistant, twentie thousand [ B] 〈…〉〈…〉 a peece.
• To the coachmaker, and him 〈◊〉〈◊〉 furnish them, twentie thousand marauedis a peece
• To the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 ••eathermake••, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉, fifteene thousand marauedis a peece.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 thousand marauedis.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 thousand marauedis a peece.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 one thousand marauedis.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 and his assistant, thirtie thousand marauedis a peece.
• To the maister of the caroches, and to his deputie that keeps account of them, twentie 〈◊〉〈◊〉 thousand marauedis a peece.
• To him that hath the charge to carrie the kings harquebuze and to his assistant, fortie and fiue thousand marauedis. [ C]
• To fourescore groomes of the stable, two roialls and a halfe a peece.
• The king hath twentie and foure caroches, and euery coachman hath foure roialls a day.
• Six litters, and in euery one two moiles, and two seruants, which haue three roials a day.
• ••he•••• are ••ix wagons for the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the s••••ble, to either of which belong two boies, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 haue three roialls a day for their charges.
• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 maister of the moiles hath 〈…〉〈…〉 duckats a yeare, and his deputie hath one hundred duckats.
• There 〈◊〉〈◊〉 fiftie 〈…〉〈…〉 boy, who hath three roials a day to spend.
• The maker of the 〈…〉〈…〉 thousand marauedis a yeare. [ D]
• 〈…〉〈…〉 hath 〈…〉〈…〉 who besides their apparrell and shooes, haue three 〈…〉〈…〉 day to 〈…〉〈…〉
• They that march 〈…〉〈…〉 after his maiesties traine, haue the same entertainment.
• To eighteene 〈…〉〈…〉 a day a peece.
• To twelue trump••••••••, the same pay.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 marauedis a yeare a peece.
• The kings cons•••••••• hath for his yearely fee, three hundred thousand marauedis, which are 〈…〉〈…〉.

¶ Huntsmen and Faulconers. [ E]

• TO the 〈…〉〈…〉 o•• chiefe hun••s••an, for him and for his vnder offi∣cers, two hundred and 〈…〉〈…〉 marauedis a yeare.
• To his lieutenant for himselfe and other two hun••smen, 110 thousand marauedis.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 one hundred and ten thousand marau.
• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 other assistant and 〈…〉〈…〉, ••ightie thousand marauedis.
• ...〈…〉〈…〉 ••••ther assistants, and three other huntsmen, sixtie and six thousand marauedis.
• T•• 〈…〉〈…〉 in the 〈…〉〈…〉 a peece.
• To 〈…〉〈…〉 the carpenters 〈…〉〈…〉, twentie thousand marauedis.
• To 〈…〉〈…〉, one 〈…〉〈…〉. [ F]
• To his 〈…〉〈…〉 gray••••••••nds that are vnder his charge, sixtie 〈…〉〈…〉
• 〈…〉〈…〉, 50000 thousand marau.
• 〈…〉〈…〉 which 〈…〉〈…〉 thirtie thousand marau. a peece.
• ...

• [ A] 〈◊〉〈◊〉 foure other boyes which haue the charge of grayhounds, thirtie thousand 〈…〉〈…〉.
• To 〈◊〉〈◊〉 that feed the grayhounds and bloudhounds, twentie thousand marau. a peece.
• To 〈◊〉〈◊〉 keepers, twentie foure thousand marauedis a peece.

Notes

• * 1.1

  A Rickes is fiue shillings starling.
• * 1.2

  Wint••r an•• somer at ••ne time with•••• 70. miles.
• * 1.3

  This may well seeme incredi∣ble.
• * 1.4

  This hathsome ••esemblance to the opinion of the Papists touching the Eucharist.
• * 1.5

  Alcauala what it is.
• * 1.6

  All these be∣long to the knights of S. Iames.
• * 1.7

  The totall sum of the king of Spaines reue∣nues.
• * 1.8

  E••ery roiall is six pe••ce sta••∣lin••▪
• * 1.9

  Euerie fiue soul•• is s•••• penc••.